As 117800 Iv-H2000ma Iv-H500ca Iv-H500ma Um 519GB WW GB 2031 8

519GB
1 Getting Started
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor 2 Installation and

Connection
IV-HG Series 3 Basic Operation
Vision Sensor 4 Settings Navigator

(Setting the Judgment Condition)
IV-H Series 5 Operating/Adjusting
6 Various Functions
User’s Manual Controlling with
(Monitor) 7 the Input/Output Line
Read this manual before use. 8 Specifications

After you read this manual, keep it in a safe place for future
Status Table,
A
reference.
Troubleshooting
Introduction
Introduction
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.
Symbols
The following symbols alert you to important messages.
Be sure to read these messages carefully.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product

damage as well as property damage.
Indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during

operation.
Indicates additional information on proper operation.
Indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.
Indicates the reference pages in this manual or the reference pages in separate manuals.
Cautions
(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice.
(3) An utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible. If
there are any mistakes or questions, please contact a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the manual.
(4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit.
(5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.
The company names and product names used in this manual are registered trademarks or the trademarks
of their respective companies.
Ethernet/IP is a trademark of ODVA, inc.
Safety Information for IV-H/IV-HG Series
Safety Information for IV-H/IV-HG Series
General Precautions
yyDo not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of human body.
yyThis product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in
hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.
yyYou must verify that the IV-H/IV-HG Series are operating correctly in terms of functionality and
performance before the start and the operation of the IV-H/IV-HG Series.
yyWe recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage in the event of
a problem occurring.
yyKEYENCE never warrants the function or performance of the IV-H/IV-HG Series if it is used
in manner that differs from the IV-H/IV-HG Series specifications contained in this instruction
manual or if the IV-H/IV-HG Series are modified by yourself.
yyWhen the IV-H/IV-HG Series is used in combination with other instruments, functions and
performance may be degraded, depending on operating conditions and the surrounding
environment.
yyDo not place the instruments, including peripherals, under the rapid temperature change. It
may cause condensation and may damage instruments or peripherals.
yyRemove the power cable from the power supply if you do not use this product for a long time.
519GB 1
Important Instructions
Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction of the IV-H/IV-HG Series
and to ensure that it is used properly.
Precautions on use
yyThe power of this product and instruments connected to this product must be turned off when
the cable is to be installed or removed. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or a
product damage.
yyUse this product in the correct supply voltage. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.
yyFor instructions
yyDo not turn OFF the power while setting the items or saving the settings. Otherwise, all or
part of the setting data may be lost.
yyDo not let water, dust or oil stick to the camera/light of the sensor (IV-H series) or sensor head
(IV-HG series). Failure to do so may cause a malfunction.
yyThe enclosure rating of the monitor (IV-M30) is IP40. This is not designed for water proof so be
careful to operate it.
yyWhen this product becomes dirty, do not rub it with a wet cloth, benzene, thinner, or alcohol.
Doing so may change the color or shape of the unit.fe
yyIf the unit is heavily contaminated, disconnect all the cables including the power supply cable,
wipe off the dirt with a cloth soaked with mild detergent, and then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
yyFor an LCD panel
yyDo not press the touch panel with the tip of your nail or anything that has a sharp tip such as
a pen or a screwdriver. Doing so may cause damage.
yyDo not apply shock to the touch panel or press it with excessive force. Doing so may cause
damage.
yyThe LCD panel may have some dots that are always lit (bright dots) or ones that are always
unlit (black dots). This phenomenon is not a problem.
yyDue to the unique characteristics of an LCD, displaying the same image for a long time may
cause an afterimage.
yyFor USB memory
yyUse products recommended by KEYENCE.
yyA USB memory device with a security function cannot be used.
yyUnplug the USB memory when turning on or off the power of IV-H/IV-HG Series.
yyDo not remove the USB memory while the USB is being written on. Otherwise, all or part of
the setting data may be lost or it may cause a damage.
yyFor external master image registration
When the external master image registration is used frequently, set [Write ROM when using “Ext.
Master Save”?] of the input option to [No] for nonvolatile memory protection of the internal
sensor. When the option is set to [Yes], the nonvolatile memory is guaranteed to write for
100,000 times.
yyFor automatic focus function
yyAutomatic focus function is used for adjusting the focusing position at the time of installation.
This will not activate during the operation.
yyFocusing position can be registered in each program. The program configurations are guaranteed
to switch for 100,000 times. If the focusing position does not need to change for each program,
set [Auto Focus Adj Pos] to [Common] for extending the life-span.
yyDo not apply shock or vibration to the sensor (IV-H series) or sensor head (IV-HG series)
during the focusing position adjustment. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.
2 - IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs
In the following cases, turn the power OFF immediately. Using the IV-H/IV-HG Series in an abnormal
condition could cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
Contact our office for repair.
yyIf water or debris enters the IV-H/IV-HG Series.
yyIf the IV-H/IV-HG Series is dropped or the case is damaged.
yyIf abnormal smoke or odor emanates from the IV-H/IV-HG Series.
Precautions on installation
yyTo use this product correctly and safely, avoid installing it in the following locations. Failure to
do so may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
yyOutdoors
yyAltitude above 2000 m
yyLocations that are humid, dusty or poorly ventilated
yyLocations where the temperature is high such as those exposed to direct sunlight
yyLocations where there are flammable or corrosive gases
yyLocations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact
yyLocations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash onto the unit
yyTo improve the anti-noise feature, install the unit following the precautions below. Otherwise, a
malfunction may occur.
yyGround the FG cable (drain wire) of the sensor (IV-H series) or sensor amplifier (IV-HG series).
yyDo not mount the unit in a cabinet where high-voltage equipment is already installed.
yyMount the unit as far from power lines as possible.
yySeparate the unit as far as possible from the devices that emit strong electric or magnetic
field (such as solenoid or chopper).
yySeparate the I/O signal line from the power line or high-voltage line.
yyFor power supply
yyNoise superimposed on the power supply could cause malfunction. Use a stabilized DC
power supply configured with an isolation transformer.
yyWhen using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the frame ground
terminal.
yyAttach the sensor amplifier to the DIN rail then set it on the sheet metal.
yyDevices including this unit are precision components. Do not apply shock or vibration.
yyWhen connecting to a network, let engineers who are knowledgeable about networks handle it.
- IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 3

Safety Precautions on LED Product
Safety Precautions on LED Product
The degree of risk of this product is shown below.
IV-HG Series
Model Light source Risk Group*

IV-HG500CA
IV-HG500MA White LED Risk Group 1
IV-HG150MA
IV-HG300CA White LED Exempt Group
IV-HG600MA Infrared LED Exempt Group
* LED product is classified as shown below according to IEC 62471.
yyExempt Group Does not pose any photobiological hazard

yyRisk Group 1 (Low-Risk) Does not pose a hazard due to normal behavioral limitations on exposure.
yyRisk Group 2 (Moderate-Risk) Does not pose a hazard due to the aversion response to very bright light
sources or due to thermal discomfort.
yyRisk Group 3 (High-Risk) May pose a hazard even for momentary or brief exposure.
IV-H Series
Model Light source Risk Group*

IV-H500CA White LED Risk Group 1
IV-H500MA
Red LED Exempt Group
IV-H150MA
IV-H2000MA Infrared LED Exempt Group
* LED product is classified as shown below according to IEC 62471.
yyExempt Group Does not pose any photobiological hazard

yyRisk Group 1 (Low-Risk) Does not pose a hazard due to normal behavioral limitations on exposure.
yyRisk Group 2 (Moderate-Risk) Does not pose a hazard due to the aversion response to very bright light
sources or due to thermal discomfort.
yyRisk Group 3 (High-Risk) May pose a hazard even for momentary or brief exposure.

Precautions on Regulations and Standards
UL Certification
For IV-HG500CA/IV-HG500MA/IV‑HG150MA/IV-HG300CA/IV-HG600MA/IV-HG10/
IV‑HG15
This product is a UL/C-UL Listed product.
yyUL File No. E301717
yyCategory NRKH2, NRKH8
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a UL/C-UL Listed Product.
yyUse a power supply with Class 2 output defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electrical Code).
yyPower supply/External input/Control output shall be connected to a single Class 2 source only.
yyUse copper wire of AWG 16 to 18 (stranded wire) whose temperature rating is 60 ºC or higher for the
power terminal block.
yyEnclosure Type 1 (Based on UL50)
yyUse under pollution level 2.
For IV-H500CA/IV-H500MA/IV-H150MA/IV-H2000MA
yyCategory NRKH, NRKH7
yyPower supply/External input/Control output shall be connected to a single Class 2 source only.
yyUse with an over current protection device which is rated 24 V or more and not more than 1A.
yyEnclosure Type 1 (Based on UL50)
yyUse under pollution level 2.
UL Certification For IV-M30

yyCategory NRAQ, NRAQ7
yyThis product is for use on a flat surface of a Type 1 enclosure.

CE Marking
For IV-HG500CA/IV-HG500MA/IV‑HG150MA/IV-HG300CA/IV-HG600MA/IV-HG10/
IV‑HG15/IV-H500CA/IV‑H500MA/IV-H150MA/IV-H2000M
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of
the applicable EU Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following
specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.
zz
EMC Directive
yyApplicable Standard EN60947-5-2
yyThe length of power I/O cable, Ethernet cable and Monitor cable must be less than or equal to 30m.
Remarks:
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated
complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely
responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.
For IV-M30
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of
the applicable EU Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following
specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.
zz
EMC Directive
yyApplicable Standard EN61326-1
yyThe length of Monitor power cable, Ethernet cable and Monitor cable must be less than or equal to 30m.
Remarks:
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated
complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely
responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.

Version of the IV-H/IV-HG Series
You can download the most recent operation software for the sensor (IV-H150/500/2000,
IV-HG150/500/300/600) and the monitor (IV-M30) from the KEYENCE web site.
Please refer to the description on the homepage for the introduction method.
URL : http://www.keyence.com/
Operation software of the Vision Sensor (IV‑H150/500/2000)
Version Description
R4.00.** The initial version.
This is the version of this document. Functions for initializing the IP address of the
R4.01.**
sensor amplifier and for assigning a fixed IP address have been added.
Operation software of the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV‑HG150/500/300/600)
Version Description
R5.00.* * The OCR tool was added.
This is the version of this document. Functions for initializing the IP address of the
R5.01.**
sensor amplifier and for assigning a fixed IP address have been added.
You cannot upgrade from R4.00.* * to R5.**.**.

Operation software of the monitor (IV-M30)
Version Description
R1.01.** Compatibility with Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional).
R1.02.** Compatibility with German.
R1.10.** Compatibility with Tool Auto Tuning using a registration information file (*.ivt).
R2.00.** Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean.
This is the version of this document.
yyDirect connection (2 units or more)
R.3.00.**
yyList of NG Sensor Occurrences function
yyNG hold function
The following functions are added. (IV-H/IV-HG series only)
yyFunction of adding sensor date information
R.4.00.**
yyFunction of individual program backup
yyFunction of displaying matching list
R5.00.* * Compatible with the OCR tool. (IV-HG series only)
R5.02.** This is the version of this document.

Structure of This Manual
Structure of This Manual
This chapter explains the system configuration and overview

1
1 Getting Started of IV-H/IV-HG Series, package contents, and names and
functions of each part. 2
Installation and
2
This chapter explains how to mount the sensor and monitor,
Connection and explains connection procedures. 3
3 Basic Operation
This chapter explains the basic operation and operation flow
of the IV-H/IV-HG Series. 4
4 Settings Navigator
This chapter explains how to set the sensors using 5
the Settings Navigator.
6
5
This chapter explains how to operate and adjust the
Operating/Adjusting
IV-H/IV-HG Series.
7
6 Various Functions This chapter explains the detailed features.
8
Controlling with
7
This chapter explains how the input and output terminals
the Input/Output Line control each operation.
A
8 Specifications This chapter explains specifications and dimensions.
A Appendices This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.

Contents
Contents
Introduction........................................................... H2
Symbols............................................................ H2 Chapter 1 Getting Started
Cautions............................................................ H2 System Configuration...........................................1-2
Safety Information for IV-H/IV-HG Series................1 Basic configurations of IV-H/IV-HG Series........1-2
General Precautions............................................1 When connecting with the Vision Sensor
Important Instructions..............................................2 (IV-H Series)..................................................1-2
Precautions on use..............................................2 When connecting with the Ultra Compact
Measures to be taken when an abnormality Vision Sensor (IV-HG series).........................1-3
occurs..................................................................3 Connecting the monitor and multiple
Precautions on installation...................................3 sensors..........................................................1-4
Safety Precautions on LED Product........................4 Overview of IV-H/IV-HG Series............................1-6
IV-HG Series........................................................4 IV-H/IV-HG Series.............................................1-6
IV-H Series...........................................................4 Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)....1-6
Precautions on Regulations and Standards............5 Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)...............1-7
UL Certification.....................................................5 Judgment processing flow................................1-8
For IV-HG500CA/IV-HG500MA/ Checking the Package Contents........................1-10
IV‑HG150MA/IV-HG300CA/IV-HG600MA/ Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
IV-HG10/IV‑HG15.............................................5 (IV-HG series): Sensor head...........................1-10
For IV-H500CA/IV-H500MA/IV-H150MA/ Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
IV-H2000MA.....................................................5 (IV-HG series): Sensor amplifier.....................1-10
UL Certification For IV-M30..............................5 Optional parts for the Ultra Compact Vision
CE Marking..........................................................6 Sensor (IV-HG series).....................................1-11
For IV-HG500CA/IV-HG500MA/ Dome attachment........................................1-11
IV‑HG150MA/IV-HG300CA/IV-HG600MA/ Polarizing filter attachment..........................1-11
IV-HG10/IV‑HG15/IV-H500CA/ Spread lens attachment...............................1-11
IV‑H500MA/IV-H150MA/IV-H2000M.................6 Sensor head/amplifier cable for IV-HG
For IV-M30........................................................6 series...........................................................1-11
Version of the IV-H/IV-HG Series............................7 I/O cable for IV-HG series............................1-11
Operation software of the Vision Sensor Vertical mounting bracket for IV-HG
(IV‑H150/500/2000)..............................................7 series...........................................................1-12
Operation software of the Ultra Compact Transverse mounting bracket for
Vision Sensor (IV‑HG150/500/300/600)...............7 IV-HG series................................................1-12
Operation software of the monitor (IV-M30).........8 Adjustable bracket for IV-HG series............1-12
Structure of This Manual.........................................9 Vision Sensor (IV-H series): Sensor................1-12
Contents................................................................10 Optional parts for the Vision Sensor
(IV-H series)....................................................1-13
Dome attachment........................................1-13
Polarized visible light filter attachment........1-13
Infrared polarization filter attachment..........1-13
Power I/O cable
(M12 12pin - strand wire).............................1-13
L type Power I/O cable
(M12 12pin - strand wire).............................1-13
Mounting adapter.........................................1-14
Front cover (for replacement)......................1-14
Bracket........................................................1-14
Intelligent Monitor............................................1-14
Optional parts for the monitor.........................1-15
Monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand
wire).............................................................1-15
Protection sheet...........................................1-15
USB memory (1GB).....................................1-15
Stylus...........................................................1-15
Wall mounting adapter.................................1-15
Panel mounting adapter..............................1-15
DIN mounting adapter.................................1-15

Contents
Communication Cable.....................................1-16 Mounting the attachment for IV-HG series........2-6

Monitor cable for a sensor with a built-in Using the dome attachment (IV-GD05/IV-
amplifier (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)...................1-16 GD10)............................................................2-6
L type Monitor cable for a sensor with a Mounting the dome attachment.............2-6
built-in amplifier (M12 4pin - M12 4pin).......1-16 Mounting examples................................2-7
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)..............1-16 Using the polarizing filter attachment
L type Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)....1-16 (OP‑87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or
LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45)..........................1-16 spread lens attachment (OP-87902).............2-8
Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-17 Mounting the polarizing
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series): filter attachment for
Sensor head....................................................1-17 IV‑HG500CA/500MA/150MA
Name and function of each part of (OP‑87899), polarizing filter
the sensor head...................................1-17 attachment for IV‑HG300CA
Operation of the sensor head (OP‑87900), or polarizing filter
indicator light........................................1-17 attachment for IV-HG600MA
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series): (OP‑87901)............................................2-8
Sensor amplifier..............................................1-18 Mounting the spread lens attachment
Name and function of each part of for IV‑HG150MA (OP-87902)
the sensor amplifier.............................1-18 (for the IV‑HG150MA)............................2-9
Operation of the sensor amplifier Mounting the Vision Sensor (IV-H series).........2-9
indicator light........................................1-19 Mounting the mounting adapter.....................2-9
Vision Sensor (IV-H series): Sensor................1-20 Mounting on the wall..............................2-9
Name and function of each part of Mounting from the jig side......................2-9
the sensor............................................1-20 Mounting the sensor onto the mounting
Operation of the indicator light.............1-21 adapter........................................................2-10
Monitor............................................................1-22 Unmounting the sensor...............................2-10
Mounting the attachment for IV-H series.........2-11
Chapter 2 Installation and Connection Using the dome attachment (IV-D10)..........2-11
Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2 Mounting the dome attachment...........2-11
For Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG Installed distance of the dome
attachment...........................................2-11
series)...............................................................2-2
Using the polarizing filter attachment
Mounting the sensor head.............................2-2
(OP‑87436/OP-87437)................................2-12
Checking the view and installed distance
Mounting the Monitor..........................................2-13
(IV‑HG series)................................................2-2
Mounting to a wall...........................................2-13
For Vision Sensor (IV-H series).........................2-3
Hanging on the hook...................................2-13
Checking the view and installed distance
Mounting with the wall mounting adapter....2-13
(IV-H series)...................................................2-3
Unmounting from the wall mounting
Mounting the sensor head of the Ultra
adapter........................................................2-14
Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series).............2-4
Mounting to a panel........................................2-15
Mounting the sensor head.............................2-4
Mounting to a panel.....................................2-15
When screws are secured from the
Panel cutting dimension..............................2-15
sensor head...........................................2-4
Mounting to the DIN rail..................................2-16
Mounting using DIN mounting adapter........2-16
wall.........................................................2-4
Unmounting from the DIN mounting
Attaching the optional mounting bracket.......2-4
adapter........................................................2-16
When using the vertical mounting
bracket for IV-HG series (OP-87908).....2-4
When using the transverse mounting
bracket for IV-HG series (OP-87909).....2-5
When using the adjustable bracket
for IV‑HG series (OP-87910).................2-5
Mounting the sensor amplifier of the Ultra
Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series).............2-5
Mounting the IV-HG10 (Main)........................2-5
Mounting the IV-HG15 (Expansion)...............2-5

Contents
Cables................................................................2-17
Connecting the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Chapter 3 Basic Operation
(IV-HG series).................................................2-17 Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2
Connecting the sensor head/amplifier Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4
cable for IV-HG series and sensor head......2-17 Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5
Connecting the sensor head/amplifier Operation flow when the power is turned on.....3-5
cable for IV-HG series and sensor Operation for initial startup of the monitor
amplifier.......................................................2-17 (Direct Connection (1 unit))...............................3-6
Connecting the cable to the sensor Operation for initial startup of the monitor
amplifier.......................................................2-18 (Direct Connection (2 units or more))................3-7
Connecting the Ethernet cable or Operation for initial startup of the monitor
LAN cable............................................2-18 (Network Connection).......................................3-9
Connecting the I/O cable Setting the network address of the monitor...3-9
(OP-87906)..........................................2-18 Searching for a sensor to be connected......3-10
Supplying power to the sensor Specifying sensor to be connected by IP
amplifier...............................................2-20 address........................................................3-12
Connection diagram.............................2-21 Operation for initial startup of the sensor........3-13
Connecting the Vision Sensor (IV‑H series)....2-22 Operation for changing the sensor head
Specification of I/O circuit and current (IV‑HG series only)..........................................3-14
of the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Setting to the Factory Default.............................3-15
(IV-HG series).................................................2-24 Initializing the sensor......................................3-15
Input circuit..................................................2-24 Initializing the monitor.....................................3-16
No-voltage input Basic Operation for the Monitor..........................3-17
(When the NPN output is selected).....2-24 Editing the value with the slider......................3-17
Voltage input Editing the tool window...................................3-18
(When the PNP output is selected)......2-24 Inputting characters........................................3-19
Output circuit...............................................2-24 Selecting the file in the USB memory.............3-20
When the NPN output is selected........2-24
When the PNP output is selected........2-24 Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting
Specification of I/O circuit and current
of the Vision Sensor (IV-H series)...................2-25 the Judgment Condition)
Input circuit..................................................2-25 Settings Navigator................................................4-2
No-voltage input Flow in the Settings Navigator..........................4-2
(When the NPN output is selected).....2-25 Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3
Voltage input Starting the Settings Navigator.........................4-3
(When the PNP output is selected)......2-25 Settings Navigator screen
Output circuit...............................................2-25 and operation flow.............................................4-4
When the NPN output is selected........2-25 Displaying the Settings Navigator guide...........4-5
When the PNP output is selected........2-25 Finishing the Settings Navigator.......................4-5
Connecting the power cable of the monitor....2-26 Finishing by completing all steps...................4-5
When connecting with the Ultra Compact Finishing without completing the step............4-5
Vision Sensor (IV-HG series) and the 1. Image Optimization
monitor............................................................2-27 (Clearly Image a Target).......................................4-6
Connecting directly (1 unit)..........................2-27 Setting the Image Optimization.........................4-6
Connecting via network (Direct Connection Main screen for the Image Optimization...........4-7
(2 units or more)/Network Connection)........2-28 Setting the Trigger Options...............................4-8
Other connections.......................................2-29 Settings for the Trigger Options.....................4-8
Connection examples Setting the Trigger Options..........................4-11
of the IV-HG series..............................2-29 Auto Brightness Adjustment............................4-12
Connection examples when Focus Adjustment...........................................4-13
connecting the IV-H series Extended functions for the Image
and IV‑HG series sensors together......2-30 Optimization....................................................4-16
When connecting the Vision Sensor Items of extended functions
(IV-H series) and the monitor..........................2-31 for the Image Optimization..........................4-16
Connecting directly (1 unit)..........................2-31 Imaging Area...............................................4-18
Connecting via network (Direct connection Advanced Brightness Adjustment................4-19
(2 units or more)/Network connection)........2-31 Lighting........................................................4-19
Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet Color Filters (color type only).......................4-20
cable............................................................2-32 Digital Zoom................................................4-20

Contents
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image Position Adjustment tool..................................4-69

as a Reference for Judgment)............................4-22 Setting items
Main screen for the Master Registration.........4-22 for the Position Adjustment tool...................4-69
Registering the master image.........................4-23 Setting the Position Adjustment tool............4-70
Extended functions for the Master Setting a search region........................4-72
Registration.....................................................4-24 Settings for disabling outlines..............4-72
Items of extended functions Setting a sensitivity..............................4-73
for the Master Registration..........................4-24 Extended functions for the Position
Master image registration Adjustment tool............................................4-74
from the image history in the sensor...........4-24 Rotation Range....................................4-74
Registering from the image Extended functions for the Tool settings.........4-75
in the USB memory.....................................4-26 Items of extended functions
When using a batch backup file for the Tool settings......................................4-75
(*.iva)...................................................4-26 Copy Tool.....................................................4-75
When using an image capture file Width tool........................................................4-76
(*.ivp)...................................................4-27 Setting items for the Width tool....................4-76
Brightness correction...................................4-28 Setting the Width tool..................................4-77
3. Tool Settings Mask....................................................4-78
(Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)........4-30 Edge Sens Auto Adj.............................4-79
Types of tools..................................................4-30 Upper Limit..........................................4-80
Basic Tools...........................................4-30 Extended functions for the Width tool..........4-81
Advanced Tools...................................4-33 Width Extract.......................................4-82
Main screen for the Tool Settings....................4-38 Edge Sens Man. Adj............................4-83
Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool.........................4-39 Scaling.................................................4-84
Adding a tool................................................4-39 Tool Name............................................4-85
Editing a tool................................................4-39 Diameter tool...................................................4-86
Deleting a tool..............................................4-39 Setting items for the Diameter tool..............4-86
Outline tool......................................................4-40 Setting the Diameter tool.............................4-87
Setting items for the Outline tool.................4-40 Mask....................................................4-88
Setting the Outline tool................................4-41 Diameter Extract..................................4-89
Setting a search region........................4-43 Upper Limit..........................................4-90
Settings for disabling outlines..............4-43 Extended functions for the Diameter tool....4-91
Setting a sensitivity..............................4-44 Advanced Diam.Ext.............................4-92
Extended functions for the Outline tool........4-45 Scaling.................................................4-93
Rotation Range....................................4-46 Tool Name............................................4-95
Search Algorithm.................................4-46 Edge tool.........................................................4-96
Tool Name............................................4-47 Setting items for Edge tool..........................4-96
Color Area/Area tool........................................4-48 Setting the Edge tool...................................4-98
Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool...4-48 Mask....................................................4-99
Setting the Color Area/Area tool..................4-50 Edge Sens Auto Adj...........................4-100
Mask settings.......................................4-53 Upper Limit........................................4-101
Setting the upper limit..........................4-54 Extended functions of the Edge tool..........4-102
Extended functions Edge Detection..................................4-103
of the Color Area/Area tool..........................4-56 Edge Sens Man. Adj..........................4-103
Advanced Color Extraction/ Tool Name..........................................4-104
Advanced Brightness Extraction..........4-57 Pitch tool.......................................................4-105
Tool Name............................................4-58 Setting items for the Pitch tool...................4-105
Fixed Reference Area..........................4-59 Setting the Pitch tool..................................4-106
EdgePixels tool...............................................4-60 Mask..................................................4-107
Setting items for the EdgePixels tool...........4-60 Edge Sens Auto Adj...........................4-108
Setting the EdgePixels tool..........................4-62 Upper Limit........................................4-109
Mask....................................................4-64 Extended functions of the Pitch tool..........4-110
Edge Sens Adjust................................4-65 Pitch Extract....................................... 4-111
Upper Limit..........................................4-66 Edge Sens Man. Adj..........................4-112
Extended functions Scaling...............................................4-113
for the EdgePixels tool.................................4-67 Tool Name..........................................4-114
Fixed Ref. Area....................................4-68
Tool Name............................................4-68

Contents
OCR Tool.......................................................4-115
Setting items for the OCR tool...................4-115 Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting
Setting the OCR tool..................................4-117 Starting an Operation...........................................5-2
Mask..................................................4-118 Turning on the power and starting an
Reading settings................................4-119 operation...........................................................5-2
Setting the status conditions..............4-121 Exiting the sensor settings and starting an
Extended functions for the OCR tool.........4-124 operation...........................................................5-2
Setting shade contrast.......................4-124 Overview of the Operation Screen.......................5-3
Setting the OCR algorithm.................4-125 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen...5-4
Tool Name..........................................4-126 Menu Screen.....................................................5-4
Hi-Sp.Adj tool................................................4-127 Switching the display to the full-screen mode...5-6
Setting items for the Hi-Sp.Adj tool............4-127 Enlarging the image display..............................5-6
Setting the Hi-Sp.Adj tool..........................4-129 Selecting the tool whose information
Edge Sens Auto Adj...........................4-133 to be displayed..................................................5-7
Extended functions Selecting the tool
for the Hi-Sp.Adj tool.................................4-134 from the pull-down menu.......................5-7
Edge Detect.......................................4-136 Selecting the tool
Edge Sens Man. Adj..........................4-136 by tapping it on the monitor...................5-7
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Selecting a display method for tools.................5-7
Outputting to Output Line)................................4-138 Display methods for tools..............................5-8
Main screen for the Output Assignment........4-138 For color type.........................................5-8
Setting range of the Output Assignment.......4-138 For monochrome type............................5-9
Default value......................................4-139 Displaying the statistical information...............5-11
Setting the Output Assignment.....................4-139 Displaying the statistical information...........5-11
Extended functions for the Output Hiding the statistical information..................5-12
Assignment...................................................4-140 Displaying the histogram.................................5-13
Extended functions items for the Output Displaying the histogram.............................5-13
Assignment................................................4-140 Hiding the histogram....................................5-15
Logic Settings....................................4-141 Displaying Matching List.................................5-15
Total Status Conditions......................4-143 Displaying Matching List..............................5-15
Display Method Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-17
of Extended Functions Menus..........................4-144 Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting
the Judgment Condition)....................................5-18
Using the images taken
in the Test mode..................................5-18
Using the image history saved
in the sensor........................................5-18
Using the image files saved
in the USB memory..............................5-18
Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..........5-19
Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning.....5-19
Registering the OK/NG images to be used
for the Tool Auto Tuning..................................5-21
Registering the images taken
in the Test mode..........................................5-21
Registering the images from
the image history saved in the sensor.........5-23
Registering the images from
the file saved in the USB memory...............5-25
Confirming or deleting the images registered
for the Tool Auto Tuning..................................5-28
Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration
information......................................................5-29
Tool Auto Tuning by the registration
information file.................................................5-31

Contents
Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-34 Stabilizing the Outline tool..............................5-40

Stabilizing the judgment process If the outline cannot be detected
by taking a clear image of the target...............5-34 when the target becomes out of
Imaging the target widely.............................5-34 position................................................5-40
Adjusting the installed distance If the detection becomes unstable
(WD)....................................................5-34 due to the effect of the unwanted
Using the digital zooming function.......5-34 outline other than the target.................5-40
Correcting the distorted images If the target tilts and the outline
due to the installation...................................5-35 cannot be detected..............................5-41
Achieving adequate image brightness.........5-35 If the match rate difference between
If the brightness cannot be adjusted the high and low-quality-targets is
in the Auto Brightness Adjustment.......5-35 small....................................................5-41
If the brightness cannot be adjusted If the outline of the target cannot be
due to uneven brightness....................5-35 detected...............................................5-41
Achieving good focus..................................5-36 Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool................5-41
If good focus cannot be achieved by If the color you wish
the Auto Focus Adjustment..................5-36 to judge cannot be extracted...............5-41
Reducing the image blur..............................5-36 If the area search becomes unstable
Reducing the shininess of the glossy or due to unwanted colors being
metal surface...............................................5-37 extracted..............................................5-41
Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment.5-37 Stabilizing the EdgePixels tool........................5-42
Using the dome attachment.................5-37 If the target edge pixels cannot be
Using the polarizing filter attachment...5-37 extracted..............................................5-42
Installing the sensor at an angle..........5-37 If it becomes unstable due to
Adjusting the color tint unwanted edge pixels being
(for color type only)......................................5-38 extracted..............................................5-42
Reducing the effect of illumination Stabilizing the Width/Edge/Pitch tool..............5-42
variation.......................................................5-38 If the detection becomes unstable
Stabilizing by correcting due to the effect of unwanted edges
the misaligned target position.........................5-38 other than the target............................5-42
Tool settings.........................................5-38 If the edge of a target cannot be
Processing during an operation...........5-38 detected...............................................5-42
Stabilizing the position adjustment..................5-39 Stabilizing the Diameter tool...........................5-43
If the target tilts and the position If the detection becomes unstable
adjustment becomes unstable.............5-39 due to the effect of unwanted circles
If the position adjustment becomes other than the target............................5-43
unstable due to the effect of the If the target circle
unwanted outlines................................5-39 cannot be detected..............................5-43
If the outline of the reference target Stabilizing the OCR tool..................................5-43
cannot be detected..............................5-39 When the text and date
Stabilizing the High-Speed Position on the object cannot be read...............5-43
Adjustment......................................................5-40 When unwanted text
If the detection becomes unstable and date are read................................5-43
due to the effect of unwanted edges Shortening the Processing Time........................5-44
other than the target............................5-40 For the processing time..................................5-44
If the edge of a target cannot be Flow of the internal process.................5-44
detected...............................................5-40 Shortening the imaging processing time.........5-45
If the target tilts and the position Selecting the tool............................................5-45
adjustment becomes unstable.............5-40 Shortening the processing time of each tool...5-46
Shortening the processing time
of the Outline tool........................................5-46
of the Color Area/Area/EdgePixels/Width/
Diameter/Edge/Pitch tool.............................5-46
of the OCR tool............................................5-47
of the position adjustment............................5-47

Contents
Saving the Sensor Settings

Chapter 6 Various Functions and Images to a USB Memory...........................6-23
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen..........6-2 Installing/Removing the USB memory............6-23
Changing the Sensor Displayed on the Monitor Installing the USB memory..........................6-23
(Change Connected Sensor Function).................6-3 Removing the USB memory........................6-23
Changing the sensor to be displayed Displaying the USB Memory screen...............6-23
on a monitor......................................................6-4 Displaying from the run screen............6-23
Confirming the NG Occurrence Status Displaying from the Sensor Setup
of the Sensor Connected Menu screen........................................6-23
(List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function)..........6-5 Saving the sensor settings or the image
Overview of the List of NG Sensor history.............................................................6-24
Occurrences function........................................6-5 Backing up in a batch..................................6-24
Setting the List of NG Sensor Occurrences......6-7 Saving the program individually...................6-25
Holding the Image of the Sensor Saving the image history individually...........6-27
on which NG Occurred(NG Hold Function).........6-9 Transferring the settings backed up
Overview of the NG Hold function.....................6-9 in the USB memory to the sensor...................6-28
Setting the NG Hold function............................6-9 Capturing the monitor screen
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)...6-10 and saving to the USB memory......................6-30
Overview of the program functions.................6-10 Enabling the screen capturing function.......6-30
Things can be performed Capturing the screen...................................6-30
with the program functions..............................6-10 Folder composition and file naming rules.......6-31
Preparing the program functions.....................6-11 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor...6-33
Preparation flow...........................................6-11 Sensor advanced settings...............................6-33
Preparation procedures...............................6-11 Environmental..............................................6-33
Using the program functions Setup Adjustment........................................6-33
(changing over)...............................................6-12 Program.......................................................6-33
When the [Monitor/PC] is selected System.........................................................6-33
in the Program Switch Method....................6-12 I/O Settings.....................................................6-34
When the [External IN] is selected Input Settings...............................................6-34
in the Program Switch Method....................6-13 Output Settings............................................6-36
Editing a program name..................................6-14 Polarity.........................................................6-37
Copying a program.........................................6-14 I/O Monitor...................................................6-37
Initializing a program.......................................6-15 Device settings................................................6-38
Sensor Image History Device Name...............................................6-38
(Confirming the Images whose Status Result Password Lock............................................6-39
is NG).................................................................6-16 Network Settings.............................................6-40
Displaying Advanced Network Settings............................6-41
the Sensor Image History screen....................6-16 FTP..............................................................6-41
Displaying from the run screen............6-16 FTP Destination Settings.....................6-42
Displaying from the Sensor Setup Transfer Condition Settings.................6-43
Menu screen........................................6-16 Transfer Destination Folder Settings...6-45
Loading and confirming the saved images.....6-17 Field Network...............................................6-47
Clearing the saved images.............................6-19 Tilt Correction..................................................6-48
Changing the logging conditions of the Rotate 180°.....................................................6-50
image history...................................................6-19 White Balance (for color type only).................6-51
Adding Date and Time information Program Switch Method..................................6-52
to the sensor(function for adding sensor date Auto Focus Adjustment Position.....................6-52
information)........................................................6-20 Sensor Information..........................................6-53
Overview for Adding Sensor Date Initializing the sensor......................................6-54
Information Function.......................................6-20 Updating the sensor........................................6-54
Setting Adding Sensor Date Information
Function..........................................................6-20
For direct connection (1 unit)...............6-20
Direct Connection (2 units or more)/
Network Connection............................6-21

Contents
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information.........6-55

Monitor Settings..............................................6-55 Chapter 8 Specifications
Sensor Connect...........................................6-55 Specifications.......................................................8-2
Monitor Device Settings...............................6-55 IV-HG Series.....................................................8-2
Monitor Environment...................................6-55 IV-H Series........................................................8-4
System.........................................................6-55 Intelligent Monitor..............................................8-6
Sensor Connect..............................................6-56 Dimensions...........................................................8-8
When directly connecting with a sensor Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
(1 unit).........................................................6-56 Sensor head......................................................8-8
When directly connecting with multiple Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
sensors (2 units or more).............................6-57 Sensor amplifier..............................................8-12
When connecting with the sensor via a Optional parts
network........................................................6-58 for the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor...............8-13
Network Settings.............................................6-60 Dome attachment for IV-HG series..............8-13
Display Settings..............................................6-60 Polarizing filter attachment
Touch Screen Lock.........................................6-61 for IV‑HG500CA/500MA/150MA
Language........................................................6-62 (OP‑87899)
Time................................................................6-63 Polarizing filter attachment
Backlight.........................................................6-63 for IV‑HG300CA
Touch Panel Calibration..................................6-64 (OP-87900)
Monitor Information.........................................6-64 Polarizing filter attachment
Initialize Monitor..............................................6-65 for IV‑HG600MA (OP‑87901).......................8-13
Update Monitor...............................................6-65 Spread lens attachment
for IV-HG150MA..........................................8-13
Chapter 7 Sensor head/amplifier cable
for IV-HG series...........................................8-13
Controlling with Input/Output Line I/O cable for IV-HG series............................8-14
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......7-2 Vertical mounting bracket
External trigger..................................................7-2 for IV-HG series...........................................8-14
Internal trigger...................................................7-3 Transverse mounting bracket
Operating in the shortest cycle......................7-4 for IV-HG series...........................................8-14
Importing the Status Output.................................7-5 Adjustable bracket for IV-HG series............8-14
Importing the total status/total status NG Vision Sensor..................................................8-15
output................................................................7-5 Optional parts for the Vision Sensor...............8-16
Importing the individual status output of Dome attachment for IV-H series................8-16
each detection tool/logic...................................7-6 Polarizing filter attachment..........................8-17
Changing the timing of the status output..........7-7 Front cover..................................................8-17
Cancelling One-Shot output..........................7-7 Power I/O cable...........................................8-17
Changing Over.....................................................7-8 L type Power I/O cable................................8-17
Registering the Master Image..............................7-9 Mounting adapter.........................................8-17
Clearing Errors...................................................7-11 Bracket........................................................8-18
Operations when Power of the Sensor is Intelligent Monitor............................................8-19
Turned on...........................................................7-12 Optional parts for the monitor.........................8-22
Input Response Time.........................................7-13 Monitor power cable....................................8-22
Response time for the switch program Protection sheet...........................................8-22
input.............................................................7-13 Stylus...........................................................8-22
Response time for the external master Wall mounting adapter.................................8-22
registration input..........................................7-13 Panel mounting adapter..............................8-22
Response time for the error clear input.......7-13 DIN mounting adapter.................................8-22
Description for symbols...............................7-13 Communication cables....................................8-23
Monitor cable for a sensor
with a built-in amplifier.................................8-23
L type Monitor cable for a sensor
with a built-in amplifier.................................8-23
Ethernet cable.............................................8-23
L type Ethernet cable...................................8-23
LAN cable....................................................8-23

Contents
Appendices
Status Table......................................................... A-2
Status table...................................................... A-2
Displaying and outputting the status result...... A-4
Displaying and outputting the status result
at the time of position adjustment.................... A-5
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool
and Position Adjustment Tool.............................. A-6
Matching rate at the time of protrusion............ A-6
Cut-off process of the matching rate................ A-6
Troubleshooting................................................... A-7
Error Messages................................................. A-10
Checking errors
by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light.... A-10
Confirming error messages of the monitor..... A-12
Remedy when the Monitor cannot be
Connected with the Sensor............................... A-16
Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is
unavailable..................................................... A-16
Remedy when direct connection (2 units or
more) is unavailable....................................... A-17
Remedy when connection
via a network is unavailable........................... A-18
Confirming the status by observing
the indicator light of the sensor...................... A-21
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light......... A-21
STATUS indicator light................................ A-22
Confirming the status by observing the
SENSOR indicator light of the monitor........... A-23
Other methods of
confirming a network connection................... A-24
Confirming the existence of the sensor
from the monitor......................................... A-24
If the displayed confirmation result is
“NG”.................................................... A-24
Confirming/Setting the IP address
of the monitor.............................................. A-25
Confirming/Setting the IP address
of the sensor............................................... A-26
Confirming the router settings.................... A-27
Remedy when data transfer
via FTP is unavailable................................. A-28
Initializing the Network Settings
(IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-30
Settings after initialization.............................. A-30
Initializing the network settings...................... A-31
For the IV-HG10 / IV-HG15......................... A-31
For the IV-H500CA/IV-H150MA/
IV‑H500MA/IV‑H2000MA............................ A-31
Maintenance...................................................... A-33
Attaching the protection sheet....................... A-33
Replacing the front cover............................... A-33
Index.................................................................. A-34
Copyright notice................................................ A-42
STLport.............................................................. A-43

1
This chapter explains the system configurations 1
and overview of IV-H/IV-HG Series, how to check
Getting Started
Getting Started
package contents, and the name and function of
each part.
System Configuration........................................1-2
Overview of IV-H/IV-HG Series..........................1-6
Checking the Package Contents.....................1-10
Name and Function of Each Part....................1-17
- IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 1-1

System Configuration
1 Basic configurations of IV-H/IV-HG Series

Getting Started
When connecting with the Vision Sensor (IV-H Series)
Simulator
Intelligent Monitor
IV-Navigator IVP-Converter
IV-M30
Monitor power cable

OP-87443 (2 m)
OP-87444 (5 m)
OP-87445 (10 m)
Monitor cable
for a sensor with a
built-in amplifier
OP-87450 (2 m)
Eth OP-87451 (5 m)
ern OP-87452 (10 m)
et
co OP-87453 (20 m)
mm
un OP-88039 (2 m: L type) USB memory
ica OP-88040 (5 m: L type)
tio
n OP-88041 (10 m: L type)
(Optional)
Dome attachment
IV-D10
Polarizing filter attachment
Sensor OP-87436/OP-87437
IV-H500CA
IV-H500MA Power I/O cable
IV-H150MA OP-87440 (2 m)
IV-H2000MA OP-87441 (5 m)
OP-87442 (10 m)
OP-88036 (2 m: L type)
OP-88037 (5 m: L type)
OP-88038 (10 m: L type)
24 V DC power
Photoelectric/ Indicator light/buzzer PLC

proximity sensor etc. etc. PLC can control the trigger
Sends the signal to the Alarm can be output by input and the status output
trigger input when the the status output function. function, and can switch the
target is detected. program number.
1-2 - IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

When connecting with the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series)
1
Getting Started
Simulator
Intelligent Monitor
IV-Navigator IVP-Converter
IV-M30
Monitor power cable

OP-87443 (2 m)
OP-87444 (5 m)
OP-87445 (10 m)
Ethernet cable
OP-87907 (1 m)
OP-87457 (2 m)
OP-87458 (5 m)
OP-87459 (10 m)
USB memory
Sensor Head
IV-HG500CA
IV-HG500MA
IV-HG150MA I/O cable for IV-HG series
IV-HG300CA OP-87906
IV-HG600MA
24 V DC power
Photoelectric/ Indicator light/buzzer PLC

proximity sensor etc. etc. PLC can control the trigger
Sends the signal to the Alarm can be output by input and the status output
trigger input when the the status output function. function, and can switch the
target is detected. program number.

1 Connecting the monitor and multiple sensors

Getting Started
When Direct Connection (2 units or more) or Network Connection is selected, the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)
can select a single sensor from among multiple sensors and connect with the selected sensor.
* The IV-M30 requires a power cable.
Intelligent Monitor Ethernet switch

IV-M30 (Example) NE-Q05
LAN cable
OP-87950 (1 m)
OP-87951 (3 m)
OP-87952 (5 m) Ethernet cable
OP-87953 (10 m) OP-87907 (1 m)
OP-87457 (2 m)
OP-87458 (5 m)
Sensor head/amplifier OP-87459 (10 m)
cable for IV-HG series OP-88042 (1 m: L type)
OP-87903 (2 m) OP-88043 (2 m: L type)
OP-87904 (5 m) OP-88044 (5 m: L type)
OP-87905 (10 m) OP-88045 (10 m: L type)
Sensor Head
IV-HG500CA
IV-HG500MA
IV-HG150MA
IV-HG300CA Sensor
IV-HG600MA IV-H500CA
IV-H500MA
IV-H150MA
IV-H2000MA

MEMO
Getting Started

Overview of IV-H/IV-HG Series
1 IV-H/IV-HG Series
Getting Started
The IV-H/IV-HG series is a “Vision Sensor”. This sensor can be attached easily so complicated detection
operations such as detecting the shapes of parts with a photoelectric switch can be achieved easily.
Operation condition settings require the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the PC software for IV-H/IV-HG
series IV-Navigator (IV-H1).
The sensor with monitor and the sensor with PC are connected via an Ethernet so connection with multiple
sensors besides direct single connection can be performed.
Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)

zz
Direct Connection (1 unit) zz
Direct Connection (2 units or more)/Network Connection
Ethernet switch
Functions of monitor
yySetting the sensor
yyMonitoring the
operation screen
yyMonitoring the
statistical information
yyReading the image
history
Power I/O
Functions of sensor
yyCamera
yyLighting
yyImage detection
yyI/O
yySaving the image
history

Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)

1
Getting Started
The IV-Navigator has the same functions as the intelligent monitor (IV-M30).
For details of operations using the IV-Navigator, refer to “IV-H/IV-HG Series User’s Manual (PC Software)”.
zz
Direct Connection (1 unit) zz
Direct Connection (2 units or more)/Network Connection
Ethernet switch
Functions of IV-Navigator
yySetting the sensor
yyMonitoring the operation screen
yyMonitoring the statistical
information
yyReading the image history
yySimulator
Power I/O
Functions of sensor
yyCamera
yyLighting
yyImage detection
yyI/O
yySaving the image
history

1 Judgment processing flow

Getting Started
This section describes the basic judgment processing flow of this device.
Trigger input
BUSY output
Total status
output
Inputs the imaging startup signal by synchronizing to the

Trigger input target position from a photoelectric switch or PLC.
Also, the trigger can be input at a regular interval with an
internal trigger function.
Light up the built-in light and image the target by using the
Imaging CMOS image sensor. BUSY output function turns ON.
According to the settings of a detection tool, the image of the target

Tool processing is scanned for detecting whether a target is high or low quality.
Up to 16 detection tools can be set. Also, misaligned
positions of the target can be corrected by using the
position adjustment tool.
After the detection process is completed, the BUSY output
function turns OFF.
Outputs the status results.
Status output When the total status result is OK, the total status output
is ON.
When the total status result is NG, the total status NG
output is ON.
Saves the image to the image history memory in the sensor.

Save images Conditions for saving the image can be selected from “NG
only” or “All”.
Color type can save 100 images, and monochrome type
can save 300 images.
* When the FTP client function is used, color type can save
70 images, and monochrome type can save 210 images.

MEMO
Getting Started

Checking the Package Contents
1 IV-H/IV-HG series are constructed by each following model. Check that all the following packed items are
packed for each model you purchased before using.
Getting Started
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series): Sensor head
yyIV-HG500CA yyIV-HG500MA yyIV-HG150MA yyIV-HG300CA yyIV-HG600MA
Sensor head x 1
“Name and Function of Each Part” (Page 1-17)
“Mounting the Sensor” (Page 2-2)
“Cables” (Page 2-17)
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series): Sensor amplifier
yyIV-HG10 (Main) yyIV-HG15 (Expansion)

Instruction Manual x 1 End unit x 2
LAN port cap (for Main)
Power terminal block

(mounted in the amplifier)
Sensor amplifier (Main) x 1 Sensor amplifier

(Expansion) x 1

Optional parts for the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series) 1
Getting Started
Dome attachment Spread lens attachment
yyIV-GD05 yyOP-87902 (Spread lens attachment for
IV‑HG150MA)
Mounting screw
(M4 x L7) x 2
Mounting screw
Mounting screw (M3 x L5) x 2
Dome attachment for (M4 x L10) x 2 * Double-washer sems screw
IV-HG series (Small) * Double-washer sems screw Spread lens
attachment x 1 Instruction Manual x 1
Instruction Manual x 1
“ Using the polarizing filter attachment
yyIV-GD10 (OP‑87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or spread lens
attachment (OP-87902)” (Page 2-8)
Mounting screw Sensor head/amplifier cable for IV-HG

(M4 x L7) x 2
series
Mounting screw
(M4 x L10) x 2 yyOP-87903 (2 m) yyOP-87904 (5 m)
* Double-washer sems screw yyOP-87905 (10 m)
Dome attachment for
IV-HG series (Large)
“ Using the dome attachment (IV-GD05/
IV-GD10)” (Page 2-6)
Sensor head/amplifier cable for IV-HG series x 1
Polarizing filter attachment “ Connecting the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
yyOP-87899 (Polarizing filter attachment for (IV-HG series)” (Page 2-17)
IV‑HG500CA/500MA/150MA)
yyOP-87900 I/O cable for IV-HG series
(Polarizing filter attachment for IV-HG300CA) yyOP-87906 (3 m)
yyOP-87901
(Polarizing filter attachment for IV-HG600MA)
Mounting screw
(M3 x L5) x 1
* Double-washer sems screw I/O cable for IV-HG series x 1
“ Connecting the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
Instruction Manual x 1 (IV-HG series)” (Page 2-17)
Polarizing filter
attachment x 1
“ Using the polarizing filter attachment
(OP‑87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or spread lens
attachment (OP-87902)” (Page 2-8)

1 Vertical mounting bracket for IV-HG Adjustable bracket for IV-HG series
series
Getting Started
yyOP-87910
yyOP-87908
Mounting screw
(M4 x L8) x 2
Mounting screw
Mounting * Double-washer
(M4 x L8) x 2
bracket x 1 sems screw Bracket x 1
Mounting bracket x 1 * Double-washer sems screw
Transverse mounting bracket for

IV-HG series
yyOP-87909
Mounting screw
(M4 x L8) x 2
* Double-washer sems screw
Mounting bracket x 1
Vision Sensor (IV-H series): Sensor
yyIV-H500CA yyIV-H500MA yyIV-H150MA yyIV-H2000MA
Waterproof cap for Ethernet connector x 1

Mounting adapter x 1
Screw for mounting
adapter x 1
Sensor x 1
The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in the
default factory setting.

Optional parts for the Vision Sensor (IV-H series) 1
Getting Started
Dome attachment
yyIV-D10
Mounting screw x 2
Hexagon wrench
Dome attachment x 1 (L-shaped) x 1
“Using the dome attachment (IV-D10)” (Page 2-11)
Polarized visible light filter attachment Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire)
yyOP-87436 yyOP-87440 (2m)
yyOP-87441 (5m)
yyOP-87442 (10m)
Mounting screw x 2
Polarized visible light

filter attachment x 1
“Using the polarizing filter attachment (OP‑87436/
OP-87437)” (Page 2-12)
Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire) x 1
Infrared polarization filter attachment
L type Power I/O cable (M12 12pin -
yyOP-87437
strand wire)
Mounting screw x 2 yyOP-88036 (2m)

Instruction Manual x 1 yyOP-88037 (5m)
yyOP-88038 (10m)
Infrared polarization
filter attachment x 1
“Using the polarizing filter attachment (OP‑87436/
OP-87437)” (Page 2-12)
L type Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire) x 1

1 Mounting adapter Bracket

Getting Started
yyOP-87460 yyOP-87685
Screw for the bracket and
Screw for the mounting nut x 1
adapter x 1
Mounting screw x 4
Bracket A x 1
Mounting adapter x 1
Same as accessories for the sensor.
Optional parts in case of loss/damage.
Bracket B x 1
Front cover (for replacement)
yyOP-87461
Mounting screw x 2
Front cover (for

replacement) x 1 O-shaped ring
(Small x 2, Large x 1)
Hexagon wrench (L-shaped) x 1

Optional parts for replacement.
“Replacing the front cover” (Page A-33)
Intelligent Monitor
yyIV-M30
Wall mounting adapter x 1

Stylus x 1
Screw for the adapter x 2
String for hanging the stylus x 1
Hexagon nut x 2
Monitor x 1
Starting Guide x 1
“Mounting the Monitor” (Page 2-13)
Optional parts for the monitor 1
Getting Started
Monitor power cable Wall mounting adapter
(M8 4pin - strand wire) yyOP-87464
yyOP-87443 (2m)
yyOP-87444 (5m)
yyOP-87445 (10m)
Screw for the adapter x 2
Hexagon nut x 2
Wall mounting adapter x 1

Same as accessories for monitors.
Monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire)
Panel mounting adapter
Protection sheet yyOP-87465
yyOP-87463
Mounting screw (lateral) x 2

Mounting screw (front) x 4
Protection sheet x 1
Panel mounting
“Attaching the protection sheet” (Page A-33)
adapter x 1
“Mounting to a panel” (Page 2-15)
USB memory (1GB)
yyOP-87502 DIN mounting adapter
yyOP-87466
USB memory x 1
Mounting screw (lateral) x 2
Stylus
yyOP-87462
DIN mounting
adapter x 1
String for hanging the
stylus x 1 “Mounting to the DIN rail” (Page 2-16)
Stylus x 1
Same as accessories for monitors.

1 Communication Cable
Getting Started
Monitor cable for a sensor with a built- Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)
in amplifier (M12 4pin - M12 4pin) yyOP-87907 (1 m)
yyOP-87450 (2 m) yyOP-87457 (2 m)
yyOP-87451 (5 m) yyOP-87458 (5 m)
yyOP-87452 (10 m) yyOP-87459 (10 m)
yyOP-87453 (20 m)
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1

Monitor cable for a sensor with a built-in amplifier
(M12 4pin - M12 4pin) x1
L type Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)
yyOP-88042 (1 m)
The monitor cable for a sensor with a built‑in
yyOP-88043 (2 m)
amplifier is the cable for connecting the
yyOP-88044 (5 m)
IV-H series sensor (IV-H500CA/IV-H500MA/
yyOP-88045 (10 m)
IV‑H150MA/IV-H2000MA) and the monitor.
L type Monitor cable for a sensor with a

built-in amplifier (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)
yyOP-88039 (2 m)
yyOP-88040 (5 m)
yyOP-88041 (10 m) L type Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1
LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45)

yyOP-87950 (1 m)
yyOP-87951 (3 m)
yyOP-87952 (5 m)
yyOP-87953 (10 m)
L type Monitor cable for a sensor with a built-in
amplifier (M12 4pin - M12 4pin) x1
The L type monitor cable for a sensor with a

built-in amplifier is the cable for connecting the
IV-H series sensor (IV-H500CA/IV-H500MA/
IV‑H150MA/IV-H2000MA) and the monitor. LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45) x 1

Name and Function of Each Part
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG

Operation of the sensor head indicator 1
series): Sensor head light
Getting Started
yyIV-HG500CA yyIV-HG500MA yyIV-HG150MA
yyIV-HG300CA yyIV-HG600MA

Name and function of each part of the
sensor head
Indicator light
yyGreen (ON).......Comprehensive result is “OK”.
yyGreen (Blink).....Under startup or setting
in progress. Operation is
stopped.
1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7
Blinks once a second.
1 Indicator light yyRed (ON)...........Comprehensive result is “NG”.
Indicates the operating status of the sensor yyRed (Blink)........An error has occurred.
head. yy(OFF)................Standby status until the
“ Name and function of each part of the first judgment finishes after
sensor head” (Page 1-17) starting the operation or
2 Mounting part after switching the program
Used for mounting the sensor head. number.
Also used for mounting to the dome attachment The versions of the sensor
for IV-HG series. head and sensor amplifier do
“Mounting the sensor head of the Ultra Compact not match.
Vision Sensor (IV-HG series)” (Page 2-4) An incompatible sensor head
3 Connector for sensor head/amplifier cable is connected.
for IV-HG series yyGreen and red are ...“LED Blinking” is requested.
blinking alternately
The connector can rotate.
Example of rotating
4 Camera and built-in light
5 Mounting part for the spread lens attachment
for IV-HG150MA
6 Mounting part for polarizing filter attachment
for IV-HG500CA/500MA/150MA, polarizing filter
attachment for IV-HG300CA, polarizing filter
attachment for IV-HG600MA
7 Connector for sensor head/amplifier cable
for IV-HG series

1 Ultra Compact Vision Sensor 5 IP reset switch

Used for resetting the IP address assigned to
(IV-HG series): Sensor amplifier
Getting Started
this sensor amplifier.

yyIV-HG10 yyIV-HG15 “ Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset
Switch)” (Page A-30)

6 Add-on connector
sensor amplifier
Used for adding the IV-HG15 (Expansion).
IV-HG10
“ Mounting the sensor amplifier of the Ultra
1 Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series)”
5 (Page 2-5)
Protection sheet is attached for shipping.
2
7 Power terminal block
3 Supplies power to the IV-HG10. This is not
equipped with the IV-HG15.
4 6 8 Add-on connector
7 Used for connecting the IV-HG10 (Main).
IV-HG15
3
5
4
8
1 Connector for sensor head/amplifier cable

for IV-HG series
“ Cables” (Page 2-17)
2 Indicator light
Indicates the operating status of the sensor
amplifier.
“ Name and function of each part of the
sensor head” (Page 1-17)
3 Ethernet connector
Used for connecting with the intelligent monitor
(IV-M30) or PC.
When the connector is not used, attach the
included LAN port cap.
4 I/O connector
Used for connecting the I/O cable for IV-HG
series (OP-87906).


Operation of the sensor amplifier 4 STATUS 1
indicator light Indicates the connection status within the
Getting Started
monitor.
yyGreen (ON).......Normally connected with
monitor or PC.
1
yyGreen (Blink).....IP address has been retrieved
2 but the sensor amplifier is
3 not correctly connected with
monitor or PC.
4
yyRed (ON)...........The IP address coincides with
5 other device or a network loop
is detected.
yy(OFF)................IP address is not assigned.
1 PWR/ERR Sensor amplifier is not
yyGreen (ON).......Operating. correctly connected with
yyGreen (Blink).....Under startup or setting monitor or PC.
in progress. Operation is 5 LINK/ACT
stopped. Blinks once a Indicates the linking status within monitor or
second. Ethernet switch.
yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error has yyGreen (ON).......Normally linked.
occurred. yyGreen (Blink).....Normally linked, and the data
yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error has is sending/receiving.
occurred. yy(OFF)................Sensor is not normally linked.
yy(OFF)................Power is not supplied.
2 OUT
Indicates the comprehensive result.
yyGreen................Comprehensive result is “OK”.
yyRed...................Comprehensive result is “NG”.
yy(OFF)................Setting processing.
Standby status until the
first judgment finishes after
starting the operation or
after switching the program
number.
3 TRIG
Green light lights up (one-shot) according to
input of the internal or external trigger.

1 Vision Sensor (IV-H series): Sensor 3 Connector for monitor cable/Ethernet cable
Connector for connecting a monitor cable or
Getting Started
yyIV-H500CA yyIV-H150MA yyIV-H500MA Ethernet cable. Use this for connecting the
yyIV-H2000MA monitor, PC, or Ethernet switch.

sensor
When the cable is not connected, attach
1
the waterproof cap for Ethernet connector
2 to maintain enclosure rating.
Tightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 N·m
3
4 Indicator light
Indicates the operating status of the sensor.
“Operation of the indicator light” (Page 1-21)
4
5 Built-in light
LED light that illuminates the target
6 Camera
Images the object.
7 Front cover
Protects the camera and built-in lights.
The front cover is protected by the protection
sheet (blue) in the default factory setting. Remove
the sheet when the sensor is to be used.
5 Front cover for replacement is provided for
maintenance.
“Replacing the front cover” (Page A-33)
6
7
1 Mounting adapter
Use this for mounting and fixing the sensor.
2 Connector for power I/O cable

Connector for connecting the power I/O cable.
Use this for supplying the power to the sensor
and for connecting with external devices.


Operation of the indicator light 3 TRIG 1
Details on operations of the indicator light are Green light lights up (one-shot) according to
Getting Started
shown below. input of the internal or external trigger.
4 5 4 STATUS
Indicates the connection status within the monitor.
yyGreen (ON).......Normally connected with
monitor.
yyGreen (Blink).....IP address has been retrieved
but the sensor is not correctly
connected with monitor.
yyRed (ON)...........The IP address coincides with
1 2 3
other device.
1 PWR/ERR yy(OFF)................IP address is not assigned.
Indicates the power supplying status to the Sensor is not correctly
sensor and the error status of the sensor. connected with monitor.
yyGreen (ON).......Operating.
When the sensor cannot correctly connect with
yyGreen (Blink).....Setting processing. Operation
the monitor, refer to “Remedy when the
is stopped. Blinks once a
Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor”
second.
(Page A-16).
yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error has
occurred. 5 LINK/ACT
yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error has Indicates the linking status within monitor or
occurred. Ethernet switch.
yy(OFF)................Power is not supplied. yyGreen (ON).......Normally linked.
For countermeasures when an error occurred, yyGreen (Blink).....Normally linked, and the data
refer to “Error Messages” (Page A-10). is sending/receiving.
yy(OFF)................Sensor is not normally linked.
2 OUT
Indicates the comprehensive result.
During searching for the sensor to be connected
yyGreen................Comprehensive result is “OK”.
using Direct Connection (2 units or more)
yyRed...................Comprehensive result is “NG”.
and tapping the [LED Blinking] button, [PWR/
yy(OFF)................Setting processing.
ERR], [OUT], and [STATUS] blink in orange
Standby status until the first
simultaneously.
judgment finishes after starting
the operation or after switching
the program number.

1 Monitor 4 Indicator light (PWR)

Indicates the operating status of the monitor.
Getting Started
3 yyGreen (ON).......The power is turned ON.

yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error occurred
to the sensor or monitor.
yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error occurred to
4
the sensor or monitor.
5
yy(OFF)................
The power is turned OFF.
6
For countermeasures when an error occurred,
refer to “Error Messages” (Page A-10).
7
5 Indicator light (SENSOR)
Indicates the connecting status to the sensor.
yyGreen (ON).......Connected normally to the
sensor.
yyGreen ....Linked normally but it is not
8 (Slowly blinks) properly connected to the
1 2 sensor.
yy(OFF)................It is not properly connected
because it did not link
normally.
If the monitor cannot correctly connect with the
9 sensor, refer to “Remedy when the Monitor
cannot be Connected with the Sensor” (Page A-16).
6 LCD monitor/Stylus
Displays the operation screen and setup screen.
10 Operates by touching the screen with the stylus.
7 USB connecting connector
Connector for connecting the USB memory.
1 Power connector Connector is protected by the cover.
Connects the monitor power cable. “Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a
“Cables” (Page 2-17) USB Memory” (Page 6-23)
2 Connector for the monitor cable/Ethernet 8 Stylus
cable Used to operate the touch-screen.
Connector for connecting the monitor cable or 9 Stylus holder
Ethernet cable. Used when connecting with the
Stores the stylus.
sensor or Ethernet switch.
“Cables” (Page 2-17) 10 Strap holder
3 Unlock button Holds the strap or hangs the stylus.
Push this button when dismounting the monitor from
the wall mounting adapter or DIN mounting adapter.
“Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter”
(Page 2-14)
“Unmounting from the DIN mounting adapter”
(Page 2-16)

2
This chapter explains how to mount the sensor and
monitor, and explains connection procedures.
Installation and
2
Connection
Installation and Connection

Mounting the Sensor..........................................2-2
Mounting the Monitor.......................................2-13
Cables................................................................2-17

Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the Sensor
For Ultra Compact Vision Sensor zz

IV-HG150MA
(IV-HG series) Installed distance
View H (mm) View V (mm)
2 yyIV-HG500CA yyIV-HG500MA yyIV-HG150MA
WD (mm)
40 8 6
yyIV-HG300CA yyIV-HG600MA 50 11 8
100 22 16
Mounting the sensor head 150 34 24
Do not place the sensor in the environment zz

IV-HG500CA / IV-HG500MA
that exceeds the limit of sensor's resistance Installed distance
to the environment, or environment that View H (mm) View V (mm)
WD (mm)
propagates the vibration directly to the sensor.
Those may cause a damage or malfunction. 20 10 7.5
50 20 15
100 40 30
yyView and optical axis have individual differences. 200 80 60
Adjust the position by checking the actual image 300 120 90
at the time of installation. 400 160 120
yyPlace the sensor where no ambient light has 500 200 150
effect. Ambient light includes solar light, lights of
other devices, and photoelectric sensors. Also,
be careful when the light intensity of the ambient
zz
IV-HG300CA
light changes. Use the shield to protect when Installed distance
View H (mm) View V (mm)
the location cannot be changed. WD (mm)
yyPlace the sensor where no object can block out 40 42 31
the internal light or the view of the sensor. 100 95 71
yyDetection may become unstable due to the 150 140 105
lights if multiple sensors are placed nearby each 200 185 139
other. Take measures as described below. 250 230 172
yyUse the mutual interference prevention function. 300 275 206
yyDelay the timing of external trigger inputs.
yyUse the shield to avoid interference.
zz
IV-HG600MA
Installed distance
Checking the view and installed View H (mm) View V (mm)
WD (mm)
distance (IV‑HG series) 40 42 31
For IV-HG series, installed distance between the view 100 95 72
and target is different depending on the type of the 200 185 140
sensor head. Check the type of the sensor head to be 300 275 208
used and its view, and place it in the proper distance. 400 365 276
500 455 344
View H 600 550 412
Indicator light
View V
Installed distance WD
View V = View H x 0.75
(H : V = 4 : 3)

Mounting the Sensor
For Vision Sensor (IV-H series) Checking the view and installed
distance (IV-H series)
yyIV-H500CA
yyIV-H2000MA
yyIV-H150MA yyIV-H500MA
For IV-H Series, installed distance between the 2
view and object is different depending on the type

of the sensor. Check the type of the sensor to
Do not place the sensor in the environment
that exceeds the limit of sensor's resistance be used and its view, and place it in the proper
to the environment, or environment that distance.
propagates the vibration directly to the
View H
sensor. Those may cause a damage or
malfunction.
Indicator light View V

yyAt the time of installation, it is better to enable
the position or direction adjustment of the
sensor by installing the adjustment system at
the sensor mounting area. Installed distance
yyView and optical axis have individual differences. WD
Adjust the position by checking the actual image
View V = View H x 0.75
at the time of installation.
(H : V = 4 : 3)
yyPlace the sensor where no ambient light has
effect. Ambient light includes solar light, lights of
other devices, and photoelectric sensors. Also,
be careful when the light intensity of the ambient
light changes. Use the shield to protect when
the location cannot be changed. The sensor amplifier
indicator light is the
yyPlace the sensor where no object can block out
front surface of an
the internal light or the view of the sensor. image.
yyDetection may become unstable due to the
lights if multiple sensors are placed nearby each
other. Take measures as described below.
yyDelay the timing of external trigger inputs.
yyUse the shield to avoid interference.

Mounting the Sensor
zz
Standard range type (color/monochrome) Mounting the sensor head of the Ultra
600
Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series)
2
Installed distance WD (mm)
500
yyIV-HG500CA yyIV-HG500MA yyIV-HG150MA
yyIV-HG300CA yyIV-HG600MA
400
300
Mounting the sensor head
200
150
100 sensor head
50 yyScrew : M3 x 2
0
25 50 70 100 130 150 200 250 yyTightening torque : 0.3 to 0.6 N·m
210
View H (mm)
zz
Short range type
150

When screws are secured from the wall
100 yyScrew : M4 x 2
yyTightening torque : 0.7 to 1.5N·m
yyScrew hole on the sensor head: M4 female
50 (whose length of screw engagement should
be 2.5 to 3.5 mm)
0
10 12 20 30 36 40
View H (mm)
zz
Long range type
2500
2000
1500 Attaching the optional mounting

bracket
1000

When using the vertical mounting
500
bracket for IV-HG series (OP-87908)
300
Attach the bracket using the screws attached to
0
45 100 200 300 400 OP-87908.
View H (mm) yyTightening torque : 0.7 to 1.5N·m
The value of View H and V will be a half of the Mounting
value on the figures above when using the digital example
zooming function.

Mounting the Sensor

When using the transverse mounting Mounting the sensor amplifier of the Ultra
bracket for IV-HG series (OP-87909) Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series)
Attach the bracket using the screws attached to 2
OP-87909. Mounting the IV-HG10 (Main)

1 Adjust the position of the DIN mounting
Mounting adapter and the DIN rail by pulling down the
example stopper of the sensor amplifier IV-HG10 (Main),
and then push up the stopper to lock it.

When using the adjustable bracket for
IV‑HG series (OP-87910)
1 Attach the bracket using the screws

attached to OP-87910.
Mounting
example Stopper
Mounting the IV-HG15 (Expansion)

An expansion unit is used for attaching to the main unit.
One expansion unit can be added to one main unit.
When using the adjustable bracket for IV-HG
series (OP-87910), connect the convex part to yyFor adding an expansion unit, be sure to
the sensor head. mount it to the DIN rail.
yyWhen a sensor amplifier (Expansion) is to
be added, confirm that the power is turned
OFF. If the sensor amplifier is added with
the power ON, the device may be damaged.
Convex yyBe sure to push the sensor amplifier
part
(Expansion) into the main unit all the way.
If the sensor amplifier is connected at an
2 Attach and fix in place the bracket on the angle or is not push into the main unit
support pole side. firmly, the device may be damaged.
yyTightening torque : 5N·m
1 Remove the protection seal form the
Mounting sensor amplifier IV-HG10 (Main).
example
IV-HG10 (Main)
Protection seal

Mounting the Sensor
2 Mount the sensor amplifier IV-HG15 Mounting the attachment for IV-HG
(Expansion added) to the DIN rail. series
2 Attach it in the same way as
IV-HG10 (Main)” (Page 2-5).
“Mounting the
Using the dome attachment (IV-GD05/

3 Mount the expansion unit to the main unit IV-GD10)

until it clicks.
IV-HG10 (Main)
yyUse the dome attachment at a correct installation
distance. Failure to do so may lose the effect of
the dome attachment.
IV-HG15 yyAdjust the brightness with the dome attachment
(Expansion) mounted.
“Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance with
the dome attachment mounted.
“White Balance (for color type only)”
(Page 6-51)

Mounting the dome attachment
1 Mount the IV-HG series sensor head on
4 Attach the end units (OP-26751: 2 pack) the dome attachment for IV-HG series
with the front side of the sensor head
on both sides of the main and expansion
units mounted, and secure them with two connected to the attachment.
screws on each side.
Attach the sensor amplifier to the DIN rail

then set it on the sheet metal.
When the IV-GD05 is used When the IV-GD10 is used
Attach the sensor head so that the light-

receiving part of the sensor head fits into the
hole of the dome attachment for IV-HG series.

Mounting the Sensor
2 Fix the dome attachment for IV-HG series

Mounting examples
with attached mounting screws. Mounting screw (long)
yyTightening torque : 0.5N m (M4 x L10)
2

IV-HG series
(OP-87909)
Screws for
Mounting screw securing the
(short) sensor head
(M4 x L7) x 2 are tightened
on this side.
Use the attached mounting screws (M4 x L7)

for mounting the IV-HG series sensor head. To attach the adjustable bracket for IV-HG
yyIf the attached mounting screws (M4 x L10) series (OP-87910), connect the convex part to
or screws with no double-washer sems the IV-GD05/IV-GD10.
(M4 x L7) are used, the sensor head may be
damaged.
yyThe attached mounting screws (M4 x L10)
are used for securing the mounting bracket.
yyIf the attached mounting screws are not to
be used, use double-washer sems screws
(M4 x L7). Convex part
yyTighten the mounting screws on the one side

of the sensor head. If they are to be used on If the sensor head and dome attachment for
the opposite side, tighten them on the same IV-HG series are to be directly mounted to
side. sheet metal without using the transverse
mounting bracket for IV-HG series (OP‑87909),
yyThe mounting method for the IV-GD10 is
described here. The IV-GD05 can also be vertical mounting bracket for IV-HG series
mounted in the same way. (OP‑87908), or adjustable bracket for IV‑HG
series (OP‑87910), pay attention to the
following items:
The vertical mounting bracket for IV-HG series yyIf they are to be secured from the sheet metal
(OP-87908), transverse mounting bracket for side with screws, be sure to use M4 screws
IV‑HG series (OP-87909), or adjustable bracket (whose length of screw engagement should
for IV-HG series (OP-87910) can be used with the be 2.5 to 3.5 mm), and the tightening torque
IV-GD05/IV-GD10 mounted on the sensor head. should be 0.7 to 1.5 N·m.
To use the bracket, attach it on the other side of yyIf the screws are to be secured from the
the sensor head on which the mounting screws sensor head side, be sure to use the M3
(M4 x L7) were tightened in step 2. screws “double-washer sems screws”
To attach the bracket, use the two attached or “screws with spring washer and flat
mounting screws (M4 x L10). washer” should be used, and the tightening
torque should be 0.5 N·m. If screws larger
than M4 are used, the sensor head will be
damaged.

Mounting the Sensor

If the IV-GD05/IV-GD10 is used with the
(OP‑87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or
2 IV-HG300CA/IV-HG600MA, the view will be as
shown below.
spread lens attachment (OP-87902)
When the IV-HG300CA is used
Installed distance View View yyAdjust brightness with the polarization filter
WD (mm) H (mm) V (mm) attachment mounted.
0 24 31 “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
30 46 51
the polarization filter attachment mounted.
When the IV-HG600MA is used “White Balance (for color type only)”
Installed distance View View (Page 6-51)
WD (mm) H (mm) V (mm)
0 38 45

Mounting the polarizing
filter attachment for
50 73 78
IV‑HG500CA/500MA/150MA (OP‑87899),
polarizing filter attachment for
IV‑HG300CA (OP‑87900), or polarizing
filter attachment for IV-HG600MA
(OP‑87901)
1 Hook the groove on the sensor head

onto the hook on the polarizing filter
attachment, and push it in until you hear
the clicking sound.
Hook the groove
on the sensor head
onto the hook on the
attachment.
Push until you hear

the clicking sound.

Mounting the Sensor
2 Secure the polarizing filter attachment with Mounting the Vision Sensor
the attached screw. (IV-H series)
yyIV-H500CA yyIV-H150MA yyIV-H500MA
2
yyIV-H2000MA

Mounting the mounting adapter
Use the mounting adapter (accessory or OP-87460)
to mount the sensor.
The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in

Mounting the spread lens attachment
the default factory setting. Remove it from the sensor.
for IV‑HG150MA (OP-87902) (for the “Unmounting the sensor” (Page 2-10)
IV‑HG150MA)

Mounting on the wall
1 Mount the sensor head to the spread lens yyScrew : M3 x 4
attachment with correct orientation, as Use the commercially available screws which
shown below. have head thickness of 3 mm or lower.
yyTightening torque : 1.0 N·m or lower
2 Secure the spread lens attachment with the

Mounting from the jig side
attached screw. yyScrew : M4 x 4
yyTightening torque : 0.2 to 0.3N·m Use the commercially available screws.
For details on mounting hole dimensions, refer to

“Dimensions” (Page 8-8).

Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the sensor onto the mounting Unmounting the sensor

adapter
2 1 Dismount the screw.
1 Mount the sensor to the left and right
stopper on the mounting adapter.

Sensors cannot be mounted on the side with the
indicator light.
Indicator light
Push the sensor to the

stopper of the fixing screw
2 Pull out the stopper of the mounting
adapter and unmount the sensor.
Pull out the

stopper
Push until you hear the clicking sound from

the both side stoppers
2 Fix the mounting adapter and sensor

using the attached screws.
yyScrew : M3 x 1
Use the attached screws.
yyTightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 N·m
Remove the
protection sheet

Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the attachment for IV-H 2 Fix the dome attachment with attached
series dedicated screws.
yyScrew : Dedicated screw x 2
Use the attached dedicated screws.
2
Using the dome attachment (IV-D10) yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 N·m

The supported models are IV-H500CA/IV-H500MA/
IV-H150MA.
yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor.

yyUse the dome attachment at a correct
installation distance. Failure to do so may lose
the effect of the dome attachment.
yyAdjust the brightness with the dome attachment
mounted.
the dome attachment mounted.
“White Balance (for color type only)” (Page 6-51)

Installed distance of the dome

Mounting the dome attachment attachment
62 to 112 mm from the front face of the sensor
1 Mount the attachment by aligning the (0 to 50 mm from the front face of the dome attachment)
concave part of the dome attachment with
the mounting screw of the front cover of Sensor type
the sensor. yyStandard range type
yyShort range type
Installed distance
from the front face
of the sensor
Screw hole for
mounting the
attachment
62 to 112 mm
Front cover
mounting screw Concave part
(0 to 50 mm)
Concave part
Target

Mounting the Sensor
Using the polarizing filter attachment 2 Fix the polarizing filter attachment with
the attached dedicated screws.
(OP‑87436/OP-87437)
2 yyScrew : M2.5 x 2
Use the attached dedicated screws.
yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor. yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 N·m
yyThere are the polarized visible light filter

attachment (OP-87436) and the infrared
polarization filter attachment (OP-87437). Use
the correct polarization filter attachment in
accordance with the illuminant of the sensor light.
Failure to do so may lose the effect.
yyAdjust the brightness with the polarization filter
attachment mounted.
yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance with Remove the protection sheet
the polarization filter attachment mounted. (blue)
“White Balance (for color type only)” (Page 6-51)
1 Mount the attachment by aligning the

concave part of the polarizing filter
attachment with the mounting screw of
the front cover of the sensor.
Screw hole for

mounting the
attachment
Front cover
mounting screw
Concave part
Concave part

Mounting the Monitor
Mounting to a wall Mounting with the wall mounting

Use the wall mounting adapter (accessories or OP- adapter
87464). The monitor can be operated by the following 2
Hang it on the hook with the wall mounting adapter methods.

mounted to the monitor, or mount the monitor to the yyUnhang to pick up the monitor from the hook and
wall mounting adapter mounted on the wall. operate it.
yyOperate it while mounted on the wall.
Hanging on the hook
For operation take the monitor from the hook and 1 Mount the wall mounting adapter to the wall.
operate it while holding it in your hands. zz
Mounting by creating a screw hole in the wall
yyScrew : M3 x 2
1 Mount the monitor to the wall mounting Use commercially available screws.
adapter by aligning the stopper of the wall yyTightening torque : 0.27 to 0.33 N·m
mounting adapter to the groove on the
rear monitor.
Slide the monitor down all the way, and confirm
that the monitor is locked.
zz
Mounting by creating a plated through
hole on the panel
yyScrew : M3 x 2, Nut : M3 x 2
Use the attached screws and nuts.
Stopper
2 Hang the monitor on the hook.

2 Mount the monitor to the wall mounting Unmounting from the wall mounting
adapter by aligning the stopper of the wall
adapter
2 mounting adapter to the groove on the
rear monitor. Unlock the monitor from the wall mounting adapter
Slide the monitor down all the way, and confirm by pulling toward the unlock button. And slide up to
that the monitor is locked. unmount the monitor mounted to the adapter.
Unlock
Stopper

Mounting to a panel 3 Mount the monitor with the panel adapter

mounted to the control board from the
Operate the monitor by mounting it to the panel
side such as a control board.
rear side, and fix it with the screws.
yyMountable board thickness : 1 to 4 mm
2
Mount the panel adapter (OP-87465) to the monitor,
yyScrew : M3, 7 mm long, with 4 washers

and mount it to the panel.
Mounting to a panel
1 Connect the power cable and monitor

cable to the monitor.
2 Mount the panel adapter to the monitor

and fix it with the attached screws.
Strap holder
yyScrew : M3, 11 mm long, with 2 washers
Stylus can be hung from the strap holder using

the hanging string (accessory).
Panel cutting dimension

(Panel cutting square hole dimension)
111 +1
(Panel cutting square hole dimension)
-0
4-φ3.5
(Circular hole position for screw)
+1
-0
100
92
110
(Circular hole position for screw)

Mounting to the DIN rail 2 Adjust the position of the DIN mounting
adapter and the DIN rail by pulling down
Mount the DIN mounting adapter (OP-87466) to the
2 monitor, and mount it to the DIN rail.
the stopper of the adapter, and then push
up the stopper to lock it.
The monitor can be operated by the following methods.
yyPick up the monitor from the DIN mounting

adapter and operate it.
yyOperate it while mounted on the DIN rail.
Mounting using DIN mounting adapter
1 Mount the monitor to the DIN mounting Stopper

adapter.
Slide the monitor until the end of the stopper,
and confirm that the monitor is locked.
Unmounting from the DIN mounting
adapter
Unlock the monitor from the DIN mounting adapter
by pulling toward the unlock button. And slide up to
unmount the monitor mounted to the adapter.
Unlock
Stopper
zz
Fixing to the DIN mounting adapter
To fix the monitor to the DIN mounting adapter,
use the attached screws.
yyScrew : M3 x 2
Use the attached flat head screw.

Cables
Cables
Connecting the Ultra Compact Connecting the sensor head/amplifier

Vision Sensor (IV-HG series) cable for IV-HG series and sensor
amplifier 2
Connecting the sensor head/amplifier

cable for IV-HG series and sensor 1 Insert the cable into the sensor as shown
below.
head
Adjust the pins and
1 Insert the cable into the sensor as shown the pin connection
below.
Adjust the pins and the
pin connection
2 Turn the screw-on connector in the

clockwise direction to tighten it.
2 Turn the screw-on connector in the yyTightening torque : 0.4 to 0.8 N·m
yyTightening torque : 0.8N·m or less
To tighten the screw by hand, turn it until the

connector of the cable touches the sensor
head firmly. Then turn it more about by 5°
using a tool such as plyers.

Cables
Connecting the cable to the sensor

Connecting the I/O cable (OP-87906)
amplifier Connect the cable to the sensor amplifier as
2 shown below.
Align the connectors.

Connecting the
Ethernet cable
Connecting the
I/O cable for IV-HG
series

Connecting the Ethernet cable or
LAN cable
Connect the cable to the sensor amplifier as To disconnect the cable, hold the tabs on both
shown below. sides of the connector pushed in and pull it out.
To disconnect the cable, pull the cable while

holding the tab on the Ethernet cable pushed in.

Cables
zz
Terminal number and wiring color of the I/
O cable for IV-HG series (OP-87906) yyIndividually insulate the unused input-
Terminal Wiring
Assigning output cables.
yyFor input cables of this sensor, connect
2
Name default Description
No. color with non-contact output (transistor output/

value
SSR output). For contact output (relay
Set external output), incorrect input may be operated
trigger.
Ext. due to the contact bouncing.
A1 Brown IN1 Rising timing (↑)
Trigger ↑
or falling timing
(↓) can be set.
zz
Pin assignment (I/O cable for IV-HG series:
connector side)
A2 Red IN2 OFF Input assignable
A3 Orange IN3 OFF function
yyProgram bit0 to
A4 Yellow IN4 OFF bit4
A5 Green IN5 OFF yyClear Error
A10 B10
yyExt. Master Save
A6 Blue IN6 OFF yyOFF (not used)
A1 B1 B10 A10
A7 Purple Unused Unused
A8 Gray Unused Unused
Unused B1 A1
A9 White Unused Unused
A10 Black Unused Unused
Total Status Output
B1 Brown OUT1
(N.O.) assignable
BUSY function
B2 Red OUT2
(N.O.) yyTotal Status Pin No. Color Pin No. Color
Error yyTotal Status NG
B3 Orange OUT3 B10 Black A10 Black
(N.C.) yyRUN
yyBUSY B9 White A9 White
B4 Yellow OUT4 OFF yyError B8 Gray A8 Gray
yyPosition
B7 Purple A7 Purple
B5 Green OUT5 OFF Adjustment
yyStatus result of B6 Blue A6 Blue
B6 Blue OUT6 OFF each tool B5 Green A5 Green
B7 Purple OUT7 OFF (Tool 1 to 16) B4 Yellow A4 Yellow
yyLogical
B3 Orange A3 Orange
operation result
B8 Gray OUT8 OFF of each tool B2 Red A2 Red
(Logic 1 to 4) B1 Brown A1 Brown
yyOFF (not used)
B9 White Unused Unused
Unused
B10 Black Unused Unused
Cable specification : AWG28
The output assignment, N.O./N.C., and input line

assignment can be changed.

Cables
Pin assignment (I/O cable for IV-HG series:

zz Supplying power to the sensor
connector of the external device) amplifier
2 Pin No. Color The power terminal block is mounted on the bottom
B10 B10 Black of the Main Sensor Amplifier (IV-HG10).
yy24 V : Supplies DC24V

B9 White
yy0 V : Wire to 0 V of the power supply.
B8 Gray
yyFG : Ground
B7 Purple
B1
A10
B6 Blue Follow the instructions mentioned below to
B5 Green avoid damage caused by bad connections.
B4 Yellow yyThe nominal cross-sectional area of the
B3 Orange wire for connecting the power should be
A1
0.8 mm2 to 1.3 mm2 (AWG16 to 18).
B2 Red
yyLength of removing insulation from the wire
B1 Brown should be about 9 mm.
A10 Black yyThe stripped part of the wire should not be
A9 White soldered (pre-soldered).
yyInsert the wires to the power terminal block
A8 Gray
all the way.
A7 Purple yyConnect the wires directly to the power
A6 Blue terminal block. Do not use a crimp-type
A5 Green terminal.
A4 Yellow
A3 Orange 1 Insert the wire to B by pushing A in with a
screwdriver.
A2 Red
A1 Brown
2 When the wire is inserted into the end,

remove the screwdriver.
Pull the wire out slightly to confirm that it is
secured.

Cables

Connection diagram
zz
Selecting NPN output
When NPN is selected in the Polarity 2
24 V line of power terminal External device

block (DC24V)
Load
OUT1 to OUT8*
DC24V
IN1 to IN6*
0 V line of power terminal block (NPN)

(0 V)
FG of power terminal block
* For the terminal number and wiring color, refer

to “●Terminal number and wiring color of
the I/O cable for IV-HG series (OP-87906)”
(Page 2-19).
zz
Selecting PNP output
When PNP is selected in the Polarity
24 V line of power terminal External device
block (DC24V)
(PNP)
IN1 to IN6*
DC24V
OUT1 to OUT8*
0V line of power terminal block Load

(0 V)
FG of power terminal block
* For the terminal number and wiring color, refer

to “●Terminal number and wiring color of
the I/O cable for IV-HG series (OP-87906)”
(Page 2-19).

Cables
Connecting the Vision Sensor 3 Wire each cable according to its intended
(IV‑H series) purpose.
2 zz
Selecting NPN output
1 Adjust the pins of the connector for the When NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-13)
power I/O cable and pin connection of the External device

cable connector, and connect the cable to Brown (DC24V)
the sensor. Black/White/
Gray/Orange Load
(OUT) IN
Pink/Yellow/
Light Blue/Purple/ DC24V
Green/Red
(IN) OUT
Adjust the pins and the (NPN)

Blue (0V)
pin connection
Drain wire (FG)
yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) /

Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4)
yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) /
Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
2 Tighten the connector by turning the screw- Use it by assigning the optional function
on connector in the clockwise direction. to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.
Tightening torque of the screws needs to be 1.0 zz
Selecting PNP output
to 1.5 N·m. When PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-13)
External device
Brown (DC24V)
Pink/Yellow/
Light Blue/Purple/ (PNP)
Green/Red
(IN) OUT
Black/White/ DC24V
Gray/Orange
(OUT) IN
Load
Blue (0V)
Drain wire (FG)

When connecting the connector, insert it
without tipping and tighten it well. If the
tightening is weak, vibration can loosen yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) /
the connector and cause bad connections. Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4)
Also, the enclosure rating may not be yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
maintained with loose connection. Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) /
* Indication is retighten approximately Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
90° to 120° with tools such as pliers Use it by assigning the optional function
after tightening with hands. to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.

Cables
Wiring Assigning
Name Description
color default value
Brown DC24V - + side of power 2
- side of power

Blue 0V -
GND of input-output cable
Output assignable function
Black OUT1 Total Status (N.O.)
yyTotal Status
yyTot. StatusNG
White OUT2 BUSY (N.O.) yyRUN
yyBUSY
yyError
Gray OUT3 Error (N.O.) yyPos. Adj.
yyJudge result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 16)
yyLogical operation result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 4)
Orange OUT4 OFF
yyOFF (not used)
Set external trigger.
Pink IN1 External trigger ↑
Rising timing (↑) or falling timing (↓) can be set.
Yellow IN2 OFF
Input assignable function
Light Blue IN3 OFF
yyProgram bit0 to bit4
Purple IN4 OFF yyClear Error
Green IN5 OFF yyExt. Master Save
yyOFF (not used)
Red IN6 OFF
Drain FG - Insulated frame
Cable specification yyBrown/Blue/Black/White/Gray/Orange : AWG25
yyPink/Yellow/Light Blue/Purple/Green/Red : AWG28
yyWith braided shield cable (with drain cable)
yyThe output cable assignment can be changed.
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-138)
yyN.O./N.C. can be changed.
“Output Settings” (Page 6-36)
yyThe input cable assignment can be changed.
“Input Settings” (Page 6-34)
yyIndividually insulate the non-used input-output cables.

yyFor input cables of this sensor, connect with non-contact output (transistor output/SSR output).
For contact output (relay output), incorrect input may be operated due to the contact bouncing.

Cables
Specification of I/O circuit and current of the Output circuit

Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series)
2
When the NPN output is selected
When NPN is selected in the Polarity, the circuit
Input circuit
becomes open collector NPN output circuit.

No-voltage input (When the NPN yyMaximum rating : ‌26.4 V, 50 mA
(20 mA when the Expansion
output is selected)
(IV-HG15) is connected)
When NPN is selected in the Polarity, the circuit
yyRemaining voltage : 1.5 V or lower
becomes no-voltage input circuit. External
power supply is not necessary. DC24V
yyON voltage : 2 V or lower Brown

yyOFF current : 0.1 mA or lower
Load
Overcurrent protection circuit
yyON current : 2 mA (short circuit)
Main circuit
DC24V OUT1 - OUT8
+3.3V *
Main circuit
IN1 - IN6 0V
*
* Refer to “●Terminal number and wiring color
of the I/O cable for IV-HG series (OP-87906)”
0V (Page 2-19).
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1 to
OUT8
When the PNP output is selected
(Page 2-19). When PNP is selected in the Polarity, the circuit
Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 6
becomes open collector PNP output circuit.

Voltage input (When the PNP output is yyMaximum rating : ‌26.4 V, 50 mA
selected) (20 mA when the Expansion
When PNP is selected in the Polarity, the circuit (IV-HG15) is connected)
becomes voltage input circuit. yyRemaining voltage : 2 V or lower
yyInput maximum rating : 26.4 V DC24V
yyON voltage : 18 V or higher
yyON current : 2 mA (for 24 V)
DC24V
Main circuit
OUT1 - OUT8
*
Load
Main circuit
IN1 - IN6
0V
*

0V of the I/O cable for IV-HG series (OP-87906)”
(Page 2-19).
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1 to
* Refer to “●Terminal number and wiring color OUT8
(Page 2-19).

Cables
Specification of I/O circuit and current Output circuit

of the Vision Sensor (IV-H series)

When the NPN output is selected
When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page
2
Input circuit

3-13), the circuit becomes open collector NPN output

No-voltage input (When the NPN circuit.
output is selected) yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA
When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page yyRemaining voltage : 1.5 V or lower
DC24V
3-13), the circuit becomes no-voltage input circuit.
External power supply is not necessary. Brown
yyON voltage : 2 V or lower
Load
Main circuit
yyON current : 2 mA (short circuit) OUT1 - OUT4
DC24V
*
+3.3V Brown
Main circuit
0V
IN1 - IN6
Blue
*
* Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) /
Orange (OUT4)
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1
0V to OUT4
Blue
* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
When the PNP output is selected
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page
3-13), the circuit becomes open collector PNP output
circuit.

Voltage input (When the PNP output is
yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA
selected)
yyRemaining voltage : 2 V or lower
When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page DC24V
3-13), the circuit becomes voltage input circuit.
Brown
yyInput maximum rating : 26.4 V
yyON voltage : 18 V or higher
yyON current : 2 mA (for 24V)

Main circuit
yyOFF current : 0.2 mA or lower OUT1 - OUT4

DC24V
*
Brown
Load
0V
Main circuit
IN1 - IN6 Blue

* * Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) /
Orange (OUT4)
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1
0V to OUT4
Blue
* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)

Cables
Connecting the power cable of the 3 Wire to the power supply.

monitor
2
1 Align the arrow mark of the power cable
and the direction of the front monitor, and

connect the cable to the monitor.
Brown (DC24V)
DC24V
Blue (0V)
Monitor power cable
(2m/5m/10m)
Cable specification Brown/Blue : AWG24
Arrow mark
2 Turn the screw-on connector in the


Cables
When connecting with the Ultra When you cannot tighten the screw by hand
any more, use a tool such as pliers for further
Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series)
2
tightening. Tightening torque, retorque degree, and
and the monitor acceptable spaces between connectors are shown
below.

Connecting directly (1 unit) yyTightening torque : 0.8 to 1.0 N·m
yyRetightening degree : 5 to 10°
Connects the sensor amplifier (IV-HG10) and yySpaces between connectors (reference value):
monitor using an Ethernet cable. 2.2 mm
If the connector cable tightening is weak,

vibration may loosen the connector
and cause bad connections or cable
disconnections. Also, the enclosure rating
may not be maintained with loose connection.
Properly follow the procedures above and
tighten the connector completely.
Align the pins and the
pin connection
Check the spaces between the Ethernet cable
connector and the cable connector.
Spaces between
connectors
Sensor Head
Ethernet cable
OP-87907 (1 m)
OP-87457 (2 m)
OP-87458 (5 m)
OP-87459 (10 m)

Cables
Connecting via network (Direct Connection (2 units or more)/Network Connection)

The Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series) and Vision Sensor (IV-H series) can be connected
2 together on a network using an Ethernet switch as shown below.
Ethernet switch
LAN cable
OP-87950 (1 m)
OP-87951 (3 m)
OP-87952 (5 m)
OP-87953 (10 m)
Sensor head/amplifier cable Ethernet cable

for IV-HG series OP-87907 (1 m)
OP-87903 (2 m) OP-87457 (2 m)
OP-87904 (5 m) OP-87458 (5 m)
OP-87905 (10 m) OP-87459 (10 m)
OP-88042 (1 m: L type)
OP-88043 (2 m: L type)
OP-88044 (5 m: L type)
OP-88045 (10 m: L type)
Sensor
IV-H500CA
IV-H500MA
Sensor Head IV-H150MA
IV-HG500CA IV-H2000MA
IV-HG500MA
IV-HG150MA
IV-HG300CA
IV-HG600MA
*The monitor and Ethernet cable can be connected in the same way as “Connecting directly (1 unit)”
(Page 2-27).

Cables
Other connections
This section shows connection examples for when the IV-HG10 and IV-HG15 are to be connected.
yyIV-HG10 : Sensor amplifier for IV-HG series (Main) 2
yyIV-HG15 : Sensor amplifier for IV-HG series (Expansion)

yyIV-M30 : Intelligent Monitor
yyIV-H150/IV-H500/IV-H2000 : IV-H series sensor

Connection examples of the IV-HG series
IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV-
HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15
Ethernet cable Ethernet cable

LAN cable LAN cable LAN cable
IV-M30 IV-M30
Ethernet
switch
Ethernet cable
IV-M30 IV-M30
Up to 16 sensor amplifiers
(IV‑HG10/IV-HG15) can be
connected to a monitor (IV-M30).
IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV-
HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15
HG10 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10
LAN cable
LAN cable LAN cable LAN cable LAN cable
LAN cable LAN cable LAN cable
Ethernet Ethernet cable

switch
IV-M30
IV-M30
The IV-HG10 and IV-HG15 functions as an Ethernet switch.

Do not configure a network loop in the network of IV-HG10, IV-HG15, IV-M30 and Ethernet switch.
If a network loop is configured, there can be no communication with the monitor and IV-HG
series sensor. (The STATUS light of the sensor amplifier that cannot be communicated with is ON
(red).)
In this case, turn the power OFF, release the loop, and turn the power ON again.

Cables

Connection examples when connecting the IV-H series and IV‑HG series sensors
together
2
IV- IV- IV-H150
IV- IV-
IV-H500
HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 IV-H2000
LAN cable Ethernet cable

IV-M30 IV-H150 Ethernet

IV-H500 switch
IV-H2000 Ethernet cable
IV-H150 IV-H150
IV-H500 IV-H500
IV-H2000 IV-H2000
IV-M30
Do not confiugure the network loop shown below.
IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV-
HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15 HG10 HG15
LAN cable
LAN LAN cable LAN cable
LAN cable LAN cable LAN cable LAN cable
cable
Ethernet Ethernet LAN cable LAN cable

switch LAN cable switch Ethernet
switch
IV-M30 IV-M30 IV-M30

Cables
When connecting the Vision Sensor Connecting via network (Direct

(IV-H series) and the monitor connection (2 units or more)/Network
connection) 2
Connecting directly (1 unit) Connect each Ethernet cable to the monitor and

Connect the sensor and monitor using the monitor sensor.
cable. Connect the other side of the Ethernet cable to the
Ethernet switch.
Ethernet switch
Monitor cable for a sensor

with a built-in amplifier
(2 m/5 m/10 m/20 m)
Ethernet cable
(2m/5m/10m)
For details on connecting the monitor cable, refer to

“Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable”
(Page 2-32).
For details on connecting the Ethernet cable, refer

to “Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable”
(Page 2-32).
The sensor and monitor do not support PoE

(Power over Ethernet). Supply power using
the power cable.

Cables
Repeat the steps (1) and (2) and when you cannot
Connecting the monitor cable/
tighten the screw by hand any more, use a tool
Ethernet cable
2 This section describes the details on connecting the
such as pliers for further tightening. Tightening
torque, retorque degree, and acceptable spaces
monitor cable/Ethernet cable using the example of between connectors are shown below.
connecting the monitor cable to the sensor. yyMonitor cable for a sensor with a built-in
amplifier/Ethernet cable
1 Align the pin connection parts of the (OP-87450/OP-87451/OP-87452/OP-87453/
monitor cable/Ethernet cable connector
OP-87457/OP-87458/OP-87459)
with three pins of the cable connector,
Tightening torque : 0.8 to 1.0 N·m
and connect the cable to the sensor.
Retightening degree : 5 to 10°
Spaces between connectors (reference value)
For sensors : 0 mm
For monitors : 2.2 mm
If the connector cable tightening is weak,

vibration may loosen the connector and cause
Align the pins and bad connections or cable disconnections.
the pin connection Also, the enclosure rating may not be
maintained with loose connection.
Properly follow the procedures above and
tighten the connector completely.
Check the spaces between the monitor cable/

Ethernet cable and the cable connector.
* Same procedures for monitors. zz

For sensors
2 Tighten the connector by turning the Spaces between

screw-on connector in the clockwise connectors
direction. When connecting the connector,
insert it without inclination while pushing
zz
For monitors
in and tighten it well.

(2)
When the screw stops rotating by the
locking mechanism, further tighten it
while pushing.
(1)
Tighten the screw-on connector
Spaces between
connectors
* Same procedures for monitors.

3
This chapter explains the contents of the monitor
display and operation of the IV-H/IV-HG Series,
Basic Operation basic operation flow, and operation when turning on
the power for the first time.
It also explains procedures to restore the sensor
and monitor to the default factory settings and basic 3
operation of monitor.
Basic Operation
Overview of Screen and Operation...................3-2
Basic Operation Flow.........................................3-4
Operation when the Power is Turned on..........3-5
Setting to the Factory Default.........................3-15
Basic Operation for the Monitor......................3-17

Overview of Screen and Operation
This section explains monitor displays and operation.

For details of what can be set on each screen and its operation, see to the applicable references.
Run screen
Images and judges based on
3 the judgment condition.
“Starting an Operation”
(Page 5-2)
Basic Operation
Full-screen display/Zooming
Use the [Zoom] button to
enlarge the view of the monitor
“Switching the display
Switching ON/OFF of to the full-screen mode”
the menu display (Page 5-6)
“Enlarging the image
display” (Page 5-6)
Tool display
Select the display patterns
of tools from OFF / Window /
Process 1 / Process 2
“Selecting a display method
for tools” (Page 5-7)
A B
Statistics display
Displays statistical information
of status on the monitor.
“Displaying the statistical
Monitor Settings information” (Page 5-11)
Sets each function of the monitor.
“Setting the Advanced Monitor Information”
(Page 6-55)
Histogram display
Displays histogram of status
on the monitor.
“Displaying the
histogram” (Page 5-13)
Matching List
The matching list of each
setting tool is displayed on
monitor.
“Displaying Matching
List” (Page 5-15)

Program list
Checks or initializes
Sensor Setup Menu the program.
3
Sets condition to judge a target. “Things can be performed
“Displaying the Sensor Setup with the program functions”
Menu Screen” (Page 6-2) (Page 6-10)
Basic Operation
Settings Navigator
Sets the program to be used
for judgment.
“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator
(Setting the Judgment Condition)”
(Page 4-1)
A B
Limit Adjustment
Adjusts the judgment threshold.
“Adjusting Thresholds for
Judgment” (Page 5-17)
Sensor Advanced
Performs the sensor advanced settings.
“Setting the Extended Functions of
the Sensor” (Page 6-33)
Tool Auto Tuning
Automatically adjusts threshold of
tool and extraction conditions of
Color Area/Area tool in accordance
with OK/NG image.
“Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically
Adjusting the Judgment
Condition)” (Page 5-18)
Sensor Image History

Operates the sensor image history.
“Sensor Image History (Confirming the
Images whose Status Result is NG)”
A
(Page 6-16)
USB Memory
Sets the operation when using USB memory.
“Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
to a USB Memory” (Page 6-23)
B

Basic Operation Flow
Basic Operation Flow
Mounting, connecting, and wiring the sensor and monitor

Mount the sensor and monitor, and then connect and wire the cable.
“Chapter 2 Installation and Connection” (Page 2-1)
3
Turning on the power
Basic Operation
Turn on the power of the sensor and monitor, and then perform the initial startup setting.
“Operation when the Power is Turned on” (Page 3-5)
Settings Navigator
Create the program to be used for operation in [Settings Navigator] (Sensor Setup).
STEP 1: Setting of image optimization

Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for
defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target.
Set the trigger option, and adjust the brightness and imaging focus.
“1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)
STEP 2: Registration of a master image

Image the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the
reference of judgment.
“ 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference for Judgment)”
(Page 4-22)
STEP 3: Tool setting

Set the tool to judge a target.
Set the tool onto the master image and set the threshold for judgment. Up to 16
detection tools and 1 position adjustment tool in one program can be set.
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-30)
STEP 4: Output assignment

Assign the function to output to each output line.
Starting the operation/adjustment

Switch the settings screen to the run screen, and start the operation. If the setting is
inappropriate, adjust the thresholds and tool settings (Tool Auto Tuning).
“Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)

Operation when the Power is Turned on
Operation flow when the power is

turned on
(1) When the power of the monitor is turned on for
the first time, set the display language, date
Turn on the power and time, and the connection method with the
sensor. 3
(1) For the connection method with the sensor,
Basic Operation
there are Direct Connection (“1 unit” or “2 units
Initial start-up of the or more”) and Network Connection.
monitor
“Operation for initial startup of the monitor
yyDirect Connection
(1 unit) (Direct Connection (1 unit))” (Page 3-6)
yyDirect Connection “Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(2 units or more) (Direct Connection (2 units or more))”
yyNetwork Connection (Page 3-7)
(4) (5)
(2) (Network Connection)” (Page 3-9)
(2) When the sensor is turned on for the first time,
Initial start-up of
perform the Initial Sensor Setup (IV-HG series
the sensor
only) and set the polarity of the sensor.
(3) “Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(Direct Connection (1 unit))” (Page 3-6)
The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. Set the
(3)
Sensor settings menu Run Connecting... activation condition in Settings Navigator. After the
setting is completed, operation begins.
“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1)
(4) After the second time of starting the monitor
and sensor, the operation begins when the
power is turned on.
(5) When the connection is failed, the process
remains in the connecting screen.
“Remedy when the Monitor cannot be
Connected with the Sensor” (Page A-16)
The sensor can be independently operated.

Operation for initial startup of the 5 Turn on the power of the sensor.
monitor (Direct Connection (1 unit))
Turn on the power of the sensor before the monitor
1 Turn on the power of the monitor. is restarted by tapping the [OK] button in step 6.
The screen to select the language opens.
3 6 Tap the [OK] button.
2 Select the language to be displayed on
Basic Operation
the monitor and tap the [OK] button.
The monitor restarts and connects to the

sensor.
[English] is selected as the default setting.
If a language other than [English] is selected,
yyWhen the monitor is connected with the sensor
the Information screen opens. Tap the [OK]
button. The monitor will restart automatically. for the first time, perform the Initial Sensor Setup
and set the polarity of the sensor. For details,
3 Set the current date and time, and tap the refer to “Operation for initial startup of the
[OK] button. sensor” (Page 3-13).
yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor,
the run screen opens.
yyWhen the connection is unavailable with the

frozen connection screen, refer to “Remedy
when direct connection (1unit) is unavailable”
(Page A-16).
yyFor the direct connection (1 unit), the IP address
yyMove to the item to be set by the [←] or [→] is automatically set.
button and enter the numbers. yyIf the monitor is directly connected (1 unit) with
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of the sensor when the PROFINET function is
the selected item. being used, the PROFINET function will stop. To
4 Tap the [1 unit] button and tap the [OK] use the PROFINET function again, restart the
sensor.
button.
The Complete Configuration screen opens.

Operation for initial startup of the monitor 5 Turn on the power of the sensor.
(Direct Connection (2 units or more))
Turn on the power of the sensor before the
1 Turn on the power of the monitor. monitor is restarted by tapping the [OK] button
in step 6.
3
2 Select the language to be displayed on 6 Tap the [OK] button.
Basic Operation
Network setting screen opens.
[English] is selected as the default setting.
If a language other than [English] is selected, 7 Tap the [OK] button.
button. The monitor will restart automatically.
3 Set the current date and time, and tap the

[OK] button.
The monitor restarts.

After the restart, the sensor connection setup
screen opens.
yyMove the input cursor to the item to set by the Do not connect a device other than IV-H/
[←] or [→] button and enter the numbers. IV-HG series sensors, IV-M30, and a PC on
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of
a network.
the selected item.
4 Tap the [2 units or more] button and tap 8 Tap the [Search Sensor] button.
the [OK] button.
Searching the sensor begins.



for the first time, perform the Initial Sensor Setup
refer to “Operation for initial startup of the
sensor” (Page 3-13).
3 yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor,
the Run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen
Basic Operation
opens.
When the searching is finished, the searched
result will be displayed.
yyIf the IP address of the sensor has not been set,
it is automatically assigned.
Up to 16 sensors can be searched for. yyWhen the connection is unavailable with a
frozen connection screen, refer to “Remedy
9 Select a sensor to be connected and tap when direct connection (2 units or more) is
the [Connect] button. unavailable” (Page A-17).
yyFor direct connection (2 units or more), the IP
address is automatically set.
yyFor direct connection (2 units or more), the
sensor on which PROFINET has been set will
not be detected.
yyBy tapping the [LED Blinking] button, the

indicator light of the selected device operates
as described below. Use this function for
checking the sensor.
For the IV-HG series
yyThe indicator light on the sensor head
blinks alternately (green and red).
yyThe indicator light on the sensor amplifier
blinks (orange).
For the IV-H series
yyThe light on the sensor blinks (orange).
yyBy tapping the [Device Name Setting] button,
the screen for entering the device name will
open. For details, refer to “Device Name”
(Page 6-38).
yyBy tapping the [Search Again] button, the
search for a sensor will restart.

Operation for initial startup of 4 Select the [Network Connection] button

the monitor (Network Connection) and tap the [OK] button.
When connecting to a network, let engineers who

are knowledgeable about networks handle it. 3
Basic Operation
Setting the network address of the
monitor
1 Turn on the power of the monitor.
5 Tap the [OK] button.
2 Select the language to be displayed on
The Network Settings screen opens.
[English] is selected in the default setting. 6 Tap each [Edit] button of the IP address,
subnet mask, and default gateway.
If a language other than [English] is selected,
button. The monitor will restart automatically.
3 Set the current date and time, and tap the

[OK] button.
The screen to set each item opens.
At the initial startup or initialization of

the monitor, the monitor starts up with
192.168.10.1 as the IP address.
yyMove to the item to be set by the [←] or [→] If there is a device with the same IP address
on the network, change the IP address before
button and enter the numbers.
connecting the monitor to the network.
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of
the selected item.

7 Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Searching for a sensor to be connected
Default Gateway individually, and then tap
the [OK] button. Automatically searches for a sensor on the network
and connects with it.
IP address
3 yyThe search time is about 10 seconds.
yySearching range and retrievable number of units
are as follows.
Basic Operation
yySensor with no IP address (default) :

A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved within a
range that the BOOTP packet from the sensor
reaches (Page A-30).
The system returns to the network setup screen. yySensor with IP address :
A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on
8 Tap the [OK] button. the local network to which the monitor is
connected.
1 Turn on the power of the sensor.

2 Tap the [Search Sensor] button.

After restarted, the Sensor Connect screen
opens.
Searching for sensor begins.
There are two ways to set the sensor to be

connected. For details of procedures, refer to
each reference.
zz
When the sensor on the network is
searched result will be displayed.
“Searching for a sensor to be connected”
(Page 3-10) If no sensor is found, refer to “When the
connection cannot be established by searching
zz
When the sensor is specified by the IP
for the sensor” (Page A-19).
address
“Specifying sensor to be connected by IP
address” (Page 3-12)

zz
When a sensor with no IP address is found The confirmation dialog appears.
3
Empty
Basic Operation
Tap the [Yes] button to copy the network
zz
When a sensor with an IP address is found
settings of the monitor.
When copying is completed, the information
screen opens.
IP address
3 When multiple sensors are found, select

the sensor to be connected with the [<] or
[>] button. Tap the [OK] button.
The sensor network setup screen opens.
4 Connect to the sensor.
zz
When connecting to the sensor with no IP
address
Tap the [Connect] button.
Tap each [Edit] button of the IP address, subnet

mask, and default gateway, and set these items
individually.
The confirmation dialog appears. When the monitor's IP address is copied,

the sensor's and monitor's IP address will be
duplicated. Make sure to change the IP address.
IP address
Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the network setup screen

Specifying sensor to be connected by
for the sensor to be connected.
IP address
Used when the IP address of the sensor to be
connected is defined beforehand.
3 1 Turn on the power of the sensor.
Basic Operation
2 Tap the [Specify Sensor] button.


for the first time, perform the Initial Sensor Setup
refer to “Operation for initial startup of the
yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor, 3 Enter the IP address of the sensor to be
the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen connected and tap the [Connect] button.
opens.
zz
When connecting to the sensor with set IP
address
The run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu

screen opens.
If the monitor cannot connect with the sensor, refer

to “When the connection cannot be established
by specifying the sensor” (Page A-20).
The monitor connects to the selected sensor
and the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu
screen opens.

Operation for initial startup of 3 Select the Polarity of the sensor and tap
the sensor the [OK] button.
When the sensor in the default setting is to be

connected, perform the Initial Sensor Setup
(IV-HG series only) and select the polarity of the
sensor (NPN or PNP).
3
Basic Operation
After the polarity is selected, set up the sensor in
Settings Navigator.
For details on polarity, refer to “Specification
of I/O circuit and current of the Ultra Compact The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.
Vision Sensor (IV-HG series)” (Page 2-24) or
“Specification of I/O circuit and current of the 4 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button and set up
Vision Sensor (IV-H series)” (Page 2-25). the program.
1 Tap the [Go] button.
For details of the Settings Navigator, refer to

“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
The Initial Sensor Setup begins. After Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1).
initialization is completed, the initialization
completion screen opens.
The Polarity screen opens.

Operation for changing the sensor 3 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button.
head (IV‑HG series only)
If a sensor head connected to a sensor amplifier
is changed, initialization of the sensor head is
3 required.
Turn on the monitor and initialize the sensor
Basic Operation
amplifier following the instructions on the displayed

screen.
For details, refer to “Chapter 4 Settings
The information of the sensor head saved Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)”
in the sensor amplifier. Before initializing the (Page 4-1).
sensor amplifier, it is recommended to perform
[Batch Backup].
For details, refer to “Backing up in a batch”
(Page 6-24).
1 Tap the [Initialize Sensor] button.
Initializing the sensor begins. After initialization

is completed, the initialization completion screen
opens.
The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

Setting to the Factory Default
Initializing the sensor 3 Tap the [System] button and then the
[Initialize Sensor] button.
Initializes information set in the sensor and uses
factory default setting.
yyThe following settings will not be initialized. 3

yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP)
Basic Operation
(Page 6-37)
yyNetwork Settings (IP Address / Subnet Mask /
Default Gateway / Port number (TCP))
(Page 6-40)
yyTo initialize the registered programs individually, 4 Tap the [Go] button.
refer to “Initializing a program” (Page 6-15).
1 Set the menu display of the monitor to ON

and tap the [Sensor Setup] button.
The confirmation dialog appears.

Initialization begins. After initialization is completed,
the initialization completion screen opens.
2 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button.
The system returns to the Sensor Advanced

The Sensor Advanced screen opens. screen.

Initializing the monitor 4 Tap the [OK] button.

Initializes information set in the monitor and uses
factory default setting.
3 The following settings will not be initialized.

yyLanguage (Page 6-62)
Basic Operation
yyTime (Page 6-63)
1 Set the menu display of the monitor to ON Initialization begins. After initialization is completed,
and tap the [Monitor Settings] button. the initialization completion screen opens.
The Monitor Settings screen opens.
2 Tap the [System] button and then the The monitor restarts.
[Initialize Monitor] button. After restarting, set the display language, date
and time, and the connection method with the
sensor.
For the connection method with the sensor,
there are Direct Connection (“1 unit” or “2 units
or more”) and Network Connection.
(Direct Connection (1 unit))” (Page 3-6)
3 Tap the [Go] button. (Direct Connection (2 units or more))”
(Page 3-7)
(Network Connection)” (Page 3-9)

Basic Operation for the Monitor
Editing the value with the slider zz

Setting by the [+] / [-] button
By tapping the [+] / [-] button, the value of a
The value of a trigger interval and the threshold of
trigger interval increases or decreases (slider
each tool can be edited.
slides in accordance with the value changed).
This section explains how to edit the value with
the slider using an example of a trigger interval in
[Internal].
3
Basic Operation
1 In the Image Optimization settings of The value
the Settings Navigator, tap the [Internal] is updated
button in [Trigger Options]. according to the
The slider appears on the monitor. slider position
Tap the [+] / [-] button to slide the

slider
For the slider which sets both upper and lower

limit, select the slider to be set and tap the [+] /
[-] button to set it.
zz
Setting by inputting a value
2 Set the trigger interval. By tapping the ▼ button of the trigger interval,
the screen to input a value opens.
zz
Setting by the slider
Input the value of a trigger interval and tap the
Touch the slider, and then slide it to the right or
[OK] button.
left to set the trigger interval. According to the
slider position, the value of a trigger interval is
updated.
Tap the ▼ button
The value
is updated
according to the
slider position
Slide the slider to the right or left
Input the value

of a trigger
interval
yyBy tapping the button, the value can be

reset to 0.
yyBy tapping the button, the last number
can be deleted.

Editing the tool window zz

Changing the size of the tool window
By touching either side of the tool window,
The tool window displayed when the tool is set in
or will be displayed. The height or width of
the Settings Navigator can be edited to any size or
the tool window can be changed by touching
direction. and dragging it.
3 This section explains how to edit the tool window
using an example of [Outline] tool.
Basic Operation
1 In the tool setting of the Settings

Navigator, tap the [Add Tool] button and
tap the [Outline] button.
The tool window of the Outline tool will be By touching one of the corners of the tool
displayed at the center of the monitor. window, will be displayed. The size of the
tool window can be changed by touching and
dragging it.
Tool window
When the [¡ Circle] is selected in the Window

2 Set the tool window of the Outline tool. shape settings, the size of the circle can be
changed by touching and dragging the outline
zz
Selecting the shape of the tool window
of the circle.
On the screen to set the detection tool, the
screen to select the shape of the tool window
opens by tapping the [Window Shape ] button.
[¨ Rect] or [¡ Circle] can be selected.
¨ Rect ¡ Circle
zz
Changing the direction of the tool window
By touching and dragging the arrow mark on
the upper right of the tool window, the direction
of the tool window can be changed.
zz
Moving the tool window
By tapping inside the tool window, will be
displayed. Move the tool window by touching
and dragging it.
The operations when an image is enlarged by

the [Zoom] button are as follow.
yySlide the slider while tapping inside the tool
window to move the tool window.
yySlide the slider while tapping outside the tool
window to change the image display position.

Inputting characters 3 Edit the program name.

(1) (2) (3) (4)
The programs or tools to be displayed on the
monitor can be named arbitrary.
This section explains how to input characters using (5)
an example of [Program Name].
3
(6)
Basic Operation
According to the items to be set, the number of
characters, character types, and characters which
can be input are different.
(7) (8) (9)
1 On the Sensor Setup Menu screen, tap the (1) Program name
[Detail] button. Displays a program name being editing.
(2) [←] button
Moves a cursor position to the left.
(3) [→] button
Moves a cursor position to the right.
(4) [Delete] button
Deletes one character to the left of the cursor.
(5) Number of characters which can be input
2 Select the program to change the name Displays a number of characters that can be
and tap the [Edit] button.
input as a program name.
Select the
program
(6) Character button
Inputs an arbitrary character.
According to selection of the [Upper/Lower]
button, characters that can be input are different.
(7) [Upper/Lower] button
Switches a character to be input to uppercase /
lowercase.
(8) [Cancel] button
Cancels a character input setting and returns to
the Program details screen.
(9) [OK] button
Saves a character input setting and returns to
the Program details screen.
4 After the characters are entered, tap the

[OK] button.

Selecting the file in the USB memory 5 Select the file to be sent.
(1)
This section explains how to select the file in the USB
memory connected to the monitor using an example
of [Transfer Program Settings]. (2)
3 1 On the Sensor Setup Menu screen, tap the (3)

[USB Memory] button.
Basic Operation
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
(1) Folder display

Displays a tree of currently displayed folder.
(2) [Up One Folder]
By selecting the [Up One Folder] and tapping
2 Tap the [Transfer Program Settings] button. the [OK] button, you can go to the upper
hierarchy of currently displayed folder.
(3) File / Folder display
Displays a file and folder stored in the currently
displayed folder.
By selecting the folder and tapping the [OK]
button, you can go into the selected folder.
(4) [First] button
Moves to top page in the folder.
(5) [<<] button
3 Tap the [OK] button. Moves to previous page in the folder.
The folder and file in the USB memory are displayed.
(6) [>>] button
4 Select the folder that stores the data and Moves to next page in the folder.
tap the [OK] button. (7) [Last] button
Moves to last page in the folder.
Select (8) [Cancel] button

Cancels a setting and returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
(9) [OK] button
When the folder is selected, you can go into the
selected folder. When the file is selected, the
The folder and file stored in the selected folder selection of a file will be determined.
will be displayed.
6 After selecting a file, tap the [OK] button
and proceed to the next setting.

4
This chapter explains the functions and operations
of the [Settings Navigator].
Settings Navigator
Settings Navigator..............................................4-2
4
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator......4-3
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

1. Image Optimization
(Clearly Image a Target).....................................4-6
2. Master Registration
(Registering an Image as a Reference
for Judgment)...................................................4-22
3. Tool Settings
(Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)...4-30
4. Output Assignment
(Setting Details of Outputting
to Output Line)................................................4-138
Display Method of
Extended Functions Menus...........................4-144

Settings Navigator
Settings Navigator
In the Settings Navigator, the setting items of the program required for judging the target with the sensor
are set in each step. While sequentially following the steps with navigation buttons, perform the setting
using the menu buttons in accordance with the Settings Navigator guide.
Navigation
button
Settings
4 Navigator guide
Menu button
Flow in the Settings Navigator
STEP 1. Image Optimization settings

Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for
defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target. Set the trigger
option, adjust the brightness and imaging focus.
“1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)
STEP 2. Registration of a master image

Image the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the
reference of judgment.
“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference for Judgment)”
(Page 4-22)
STEP 3. Tool settings

Set the tool to judge a target. Set the tool onto the master image and set the
threshold for judgment. Up to 16 detection tools and 1 position adjustment
tool in one program can be set.
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-30)
STEP 4. Output assignment

Assign the function to output to each output line.
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)”
(Page 4-138)

Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator
Starting the Settings Navigator 6 Perform the following operation.

zz
When the program which has not been set
1 Turn on the power of the sensor and in step 5 is selected
monitor. Tap the [Start] button.
When the sensor is in the following condition,

the Sensor Setup Menu will be displayed.
Proceed to step 5.
yyWhen the power is turned on for the first time
4
yyIf all programs are not being set

yyIf the sensor is being setting up
yyChanging the sensor head (IV-HG series only)
The Settings Navigator guide screen opens.
2 Tap the [Menu] button. Tap the [OK] button and start setting [1. Image
Optimization].
“1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a
Target)” (Page 4-6)
zz
When the program which has been set in
step 5 is selected
Tap the [Start] button. Or tap the shortcut button
for each step.
The menu bar appears.
3 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button.

Shortcut button
The Settings Navigator guide screen of the

selected step opens.
Tap the [OK] button and start the setting.
The confirmation dialog appears. “1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a
4 Tap the [OK] button. Target)” (Page 4-6)
“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-22)
5 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button. “3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for
Targets)” (Page 4-30)
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of
Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-138)
For details of the “Navi Guide”, refer to

“Displaying the Settings Navigator guide”
(Page 4-5).
The startup screen of the Settings Navigator opens.

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

This section explains each setting screen to be displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow.
For details of the contents that can set on each setting screen and its operation, refer to the applicable
references.
A
1. Image Optimization
4 A
“1. Image Optimization
(Clearly Image a Target)”
(Page 4-6)
“2. Master Registration
(Registering an Image as a
Reference for Judgment)”
(Page 4-22)
3. Tool Settings
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the
Judgment Method for Targets)”
(Page 4-30)
“4. Output Assignment
(Setting Details of Outputting
to Output Line)” (Page 4-138)
* If the IV-H series is used, up to
4 outputs are available.

Displaying the Settings Navigator guide 3 Tap the [Yes] button.

The settings in the Settings Navigator will be
zz
When the “Navi Guide” is ON saved and the system returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
yyThe step guide appears only the first time
when moving to each step.
yyThe extended functions guide appears only yyBy tapping the [No] button, the confirmation
the first time when displaying the Extended dialog to cancel the settings appears. By
tapping the [Yes] button, the screen closes
Functions menu.
yyTo display the step guide and extended
without saving the settings.
yyBy tapping the [Cancel] button, the system 4
functions guide again, finish and then start the returns to the Settings Navigator screen.

Settings Navigator again.
Finishing without completing the step

You can display the function guide by tapping
the button on the upper right of the screen 1 Tap the [Save] button at the upper right of
when operating the corresponding functions. the screen.
zz
When the “Navi Guide” is OFF
The step guide / extended functions guide /
function guide are not displayed
Finishing the Settings Navigator

This section explains the procedure for finishing the
Settings Navigator.
zz
When the required settings are completed
Finishing by completing all steps The confirmation dialog to save appears.
1 Set all steps in the Settings Navigator. zz

When the required settings are not
completed
2 Tap the [Complete] button at the lower The confirmation dialog to finish appears.
right of the [Output Assignment] screen. yyBy tapping the [Yes] button, the confirmation
dialog to save appears.
yyBy tapping the [No] button, the system returns
to the Settings Navigator screen.
The required settings have not been completed

yet. Even if the [OK] button is tapped, the
proper operation cannot be performed.
When the program setting is changed,

2 Tap the [Yes] button.
The settings in the Settings Navigator will be
the confirmation dialog to save appears. saved and the system returns to the Sensor
* If the IV-H series is used, up to 4 outputs are Setup Menu screen.
available.
yyBy tapping the [No] button, the confirmation
dialog to cancel the settings appears. By
tapping the [Yes] button, the screen closes
without saving the settings.
yyBy tapping the [Cancel] button, the system
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.

1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)
Setting the Image Optimization

In this section, set the Image Optimization for taking an image of a target. Adjust the image for defining
differences in high and low-quality-targets.
zz
Trigger Options
A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the
Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can
image a target at any timing and can image continuously.
4 “Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)
“Checking the view and installed distance (IV‑HG series)” (Page 2-2)
“Checking the view and installed distance (IV-H series)” (Page 2-3)
zz
Auto Brightness Adjustment
The sensor images a target by receiving the reflected light of the built-in light exposed to a target using
the CMOS image sensor.
In the Auto Brightness Adjustment, a target can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by
automatically adjusting the light intensity and shutter speed according to the shape and surface
condition (color, shininess, material).
zz
Focus Adjustment
Adjusts the focus of lens. Adjusts for clearly imaging the shape of a target.
Auto focus can adjust the focusing position automatically.
“Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13)

Main screen for the Image Optimization

This section explains the main screen for the Image Optimization.
(1) (3)
(4)
(5)
(2) (6)

(7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
(1) [Back] button (7) Extended functions display button

The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu Displays the extended functions menu for the
screen. Image Optimization.
(2) Image taken by the sensor “Extended functions for the Image Optimization”
Displays an image taken by the sensor. (Page 4-16)
The image type to be displayed differs depending (8) [Trigger Options] button
on the settings screen. Performs the settings for the Trigger Options.
(3) [Save] button “Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)
Saves the settings and returns to the Sensor (9) [Auto Brightness Adjustment] button
Setup Menu screen. Automatically adjusts brightness.
(4) [Image Type] display “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
Displays the image type. (10) [Focus Adjustment] button
yy .................Displays an image taken by Automatically adjusts focus.
the currently imaging sensor. “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13)
(5) [Trig] button (11) [Next] button
If [External] is selected for [Trigger Options] or Proceeds to "2. Master Registration".
[Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to “2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as
[Yes], the [Trig] button will be displayed. a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-22)
The [Trig] and [Pause] button switches by each
time the button is tapped.
yy[Trig]..................Images by temporarily inputting
the internal trigger. Tap this
button when the position is to be
defined while a target is being
imaged in a state where the
external trigger cannot be input.
yy[Pause]..............Finishes the imaging with
internal trigger.
(6) [Zoom] button
Switches to full-screen display and the image of
the sensor can be zoomed.
“Switching the display to the full-screen mode”
(Page 5-6)

Setting the Trigger Options

A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the
Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can
image a target at any timing, and can image continuously.
Settings for the Trigger Options
4 Items Description Setting range

Default
value
yyInternal
Starts imaging continuously within
the time interval specified in the
trigger interval setting.
If [Internal Trigger Control with IN1
Input] is set to [Yes], the external
input can control the internal trigger.
Trigger Select the type of the timing to
yyExternal Internal
(Trigger type) start imaging.
Starts imaging with the external
trigger synchronized with the
target's motion from a photoelectric
sensor or PLC installed outside.
The time (trigger delay) between
inputting the trigger until imaging
starts can be set.
Set when the [Internal] is
selected in the trigger type
Trigger interval setting. 1 to 10000 ms 50 ms
Set an interval (cycle) to
automatically start imaging.
Set when the [External] is
selected in the trigger type
setting.
Used when the output timing
of the sensor for the trigger
Trigger Delay occurrence and the imaging 0 to 1000 ms 0 ms
timing of this device cannot be
synchronized.
This device starts imaging after
the time set in the trigger delay
of the trigger input passes.

zz
Internal trigger
Trigger interval Trigger interval

(1)
Internal trigger
(2)
Imaging/
internal processing 4
(3)

Status output
(1) The trigger will be input automatically according to the trigger interval settings.
(2) Performs the internal processing after the imaging.
(3) Outputs the status result.
zz
If [Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes]
IN1 (1) Trigger interval Trigger interval
Internal Trigger
(2)
Imaging/
internal processing
(3)
Status output
(1) The trigger will be input within the period of “Internal trigger interval + 1ms” after IN1 is input (the
trigger is input while IN1 is input). Thereafter the trigger will be input according to the trigger interval
settings.
(2) Performs the internal processing after imaging.

zz
External trigger
Trigger delay
(1)
External trigger
(2)
4 Imaging/
internal processing
(3)
Status output
(1) Start imaging by inputting the trigger at an arbitrary timing.

When the trigger delay interval is set, the imaging start time will be delayed in the specified period.
(2) Performs the internal processing after imaging.

Setting the Trigger Options 5 Set the trigger interval or trigger delay.
zz
When the [Internal] is selected in step 4
1 Start the Settings Navigator. Set the trigger interval within the range of 1 to
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3) 10000 ms.
2 Display the main screen for the Image If the internal trigger time is shorter than the
Optimization. processing time (Page 5-44), a trigger error
“Settings Navigator screen and operation flow”
(Page 4-4)
occurs.
“Internal trigger” (Page 7-3)
4
“Error Messages” (Page A-10)
3 Tap the [Trigger Options] button.

The screen to set the Trigger Options opens. zz
When the [External] is selected in step 4
Set the trigger delay within the range of 1 to
4 Select the trigger type. 1000 ms.
Select the [Internal] or [External] button.
The setting of the trigger interval and trigger

delay can be changed by using the slider or
inputting the value.
“Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-17)
6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.
The system returns to the main screen for the
Image Optimization.

Auto Brightness Adjustment 4 Tap the [OK] button.

In the Auto Brightness Adjustment, the target
Image Optimization.
can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by
automatically adjusting a light intensity, an exposure
time and an imaging mode according to the shape yyThe brightness of an image can be adjusted
and surface condition (color, shininess, material). manually.
“Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-19)
4 1 Start the Settings Navigator. yyDuring the auto brightness adjustment, the
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3) sensor automatically images a target by
inputting the internal trigger regardless of the
2 Display the main screen for the Image Trigger Options settings.
Optimization.
yyDo not move a target during the auto brightness
“Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” adjustment. The focus may not be adjusted
(Page 4-4) correctly.
3 Tap the [Auto Brightness Adjustment]

button.
After the adjustment is completed, the

“Brightness adjustment completed.” message
appears.

Focus Adjustment 1 Start the Settings Navigator.

“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
Adjusts the focusing position for clearly imaging the
shape of a target. 2 Display the main screen for the Image
Optimization.
yyPlace a target at the appropriate position.
(Page 4-4)
yyDo not move a target during the focus adjustment.
The focus may not be adjusted correctly.
3 Tap the [Focus Adjustment] button. 4

When the [Auto Focus Adj Pos] (Page 6-52) is
set to [Common], the following dialog appears.
The guide screen for the Focus Adjustment opens.
The focusing position is adjusted automatically.

5 Adjust the focusing position as needed. 6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
button.
zz
When the focusing position is to be
adjusted automatically again The system returns to the main screen for the
Image Optimization.
When the [Auto] button is tapped, the focusing
When the [Cancel] button is tapped, the focus
position is adjusted automatically again.
will be reset to the previous position.
4 yyDuring the auto adjustment, the sensor

automatically images a target by inputting the
internal trigger regardless of the Trigger Options
settings (Page 4-8). Also, when the continuous

lighting (Page 4-19) is set, the sensor images
with the flash lighting.
zz
When the focusing position is to be yyThe auto adjustment searches the positions that
adjusted manually can be focused over the entire area regardless
of the imaging area settings (Page 4-18).
Adjust the focus by the slider.
For details of settings by using the slider, refer to

“Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-17).
zz
When multiple focusing positions exist
When there are multiple positions that can be
focused, the sensor adjusts to the closest position
to the sensor. The options of the position that can
be focused will be indicated with ( ) mark.
To change the focusing position to the optional
position, tap the [Next Pos] or the options ( ) of
the focusing position.

MEMO

Extended functions for the Image Optimization

Adjust the Image Optimization in the extended functions menu.
Items of extended functions for the Image Optimization
Default
Items Description Setting range
value
4 Sets the imaging area (image

yyEntire
Sets the field of view of the imaging area
size of the sensor). When the for the sensor to the entire area.
Imaging Area imaging area is reduced, the yyPartial Entire

shutter speed and judging Edit a tool window and set an arbitrary area
process become faster. in the sensor's field of view as an imaging
area.
IV-H500CA 1 to 100
IV-H500MA 1 to 120
IV-H150MA 1 to 120
Bright IV-H2000MA 1 to 100

Adjusts the brightness of an IV-HG500CA 1 to 105 20
image manually. IV-HG500MA 1 to 130
IV-HG150MA 1 to 115
IV-HG300CA 1 to 115
Advanced
Brightness IV-HG600MA 1 to 125
Adjustment yyNormal
This mode is the basic imaging mode. The
target can be imaged with less noise.
yyHDR
Imaging Mode Select to image a target such as a metal
Selects imaging mode for that reflects light and has high contrast. Normal
sensor. yyHighGain
Select to shorten the exposure time and
when the imaging environment is in a dark
place. Lowers imaging quality due to high
gain.
yyOFF
Turns OFF the built-in light.
yyFlash
The built-in light lights within the exposure
Selects lighting mode for built-in when imaging.
Lighting Flash
light. yyDC (Except for the IV-HG300CA/
IV-HG600MA)
The built-in light lights continuously
regardless of specified exposure time when
imaging a target.

Default
value
If it is difficult to extract the edge
(outline) of different colors,
select a filter for a color or a OFF/Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/
Color Filters OFF
complementary color to be Yellow
detected.
4
(Color type only)
Zoom OFF/Zoom Mag: x2/ Zoom
Digital Zoom Sets the digital zoom.
Zoom Mag: x4 (IV-HG series only) OFF

Specify an area in the sensor's Specify an arbitrary area.
Zoom Screen
field of view as the zooming To move the zoom area to the center of the
Area center
area. screen, tap the [Screen Center] button.
Emphasize the edge (outline) of
Filter ON/OFF OFF
the image.

Imaging Area
For details of editing the tool window, refer to
1 Display extended functions menu for the “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-18).
Image Optimization.
“Display Method of Extended Functions Menus” 4 After the setting is completed,
tap the [OK] button.
(Page 4-144)
2 Tap the [Imaging Area] button. Image Optimization.
4
When an imaging area is specified, the area
outside the specified area will be displayed in

black.
The screen to set the imaging area opens.
3 Select type of imaging area.
Outside of specified area
If [Partial] is selected, edit the imaging area.
Imaging area
yyIf the tool has been set, a rectangular area

containing tool windows of all tools which have
been set will be displayed as [Actv Range].
The imaging area cannot be set smaller than
the active range. To narrow down the imaging
area, change the placement of the tool
windows before adjusting the imaging area.
yySet an area including the center of the field of
the view when trapezoidal correction (Page
6-48) is to be performed. A region that cannot
be exposed is created in the exposure area.

Advanced Brightness Adjustment Lighting
1 Display extended functions menu for the 1 Display extended functions menu for the
Image Optimization. Image Optimization.
“Display Method of Extended Functions Menus” “Display Method of Extended Functions Menus”
(Page 4-144)
(Page 4-144)
2 Tap the [Advanced Brightness Adjustment]
button. 2 Tap the [Lighting] button. 4

The screen to adjust brightness opens.
3 Select the lighting mode from
3 Set brightness and an imaging mode. [OFF]/[Flash]/[Continuous].
According to the brightness and imaging mode,
the exposure time will be calculated automatically.
Exposure time
4 After the setting is completed,

yyFor the details of settings with the slider or The system returns to the main screen for the
by inputting a value, refer to “Editing the Image Optimization.
value with the slider” (Page 3-17).
yyBy tapping the [Auto] button, a light intensity,
an exposure time and an imaging mode can yyIf the lighting mode is changed, re-register
be adjusted automatically. the master image and re-set the tool.
Otherwise a correct judgment may not be
4 After the setting is completed, possible.
tap the [OK] button. yyWhen [DC] has been selected, the light goes
The system returns to the main screen for the off for approximately 0.3 ms with the IV-H
Image Optimization. series or 0.2 ms with the IV-HG series right
before imaging.
When the master image is registered and yyWhen the IV-HG300CA/IV-HG600MA is
settings other than Trigger Options and used, [DC] cannot be selected.
imaging area are changed, the confirmation
message that recommends you to re-register
the master image appears. Tap the [OK]
button and re-register the master image.

Color Filters (color type only) Digital Zoom
Color filter is disabled for the Color Area tool. 1 Display extended functions menu for the
Image Optimization.
“Display Method of Extended Functions Menus”
1 Display extended functions menu for the (Page 4-144)
Image Optimization.
4
“Display Method of Extended Functions Menus” 2 Tap the [Digital Zoom] button.
(Page 4-144)
2 Tap the [Color Filters] button.

3 Sets the magnification of digital zoom.

The image changes to monochrome. In the
Selectable magnifications are as follows:
example in the figure above, the red and blue
yyIV-H series: OFF/x2
outlines become unclear.
yyIV-HG series: OFF/x2/x4
3 Select the color to apply the color filter.
Select the filter for the color or the complementary
color to be detected. Select red here.
The color filter corresponding to the selected

color will be applied. The red color becomes
brighter and the outline with the blue color
becomes clear.
Clarified outline
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Image Optimization.

4 Set the zoom area and filter as needed. zz

Filter
zz
Zoom area The edge of the image (outline) displayed with
digital zoom can be emphasized. Tap the [Filter]
The zoom area for digital zoom is specified.
button.
Tap the [Zoom Area] button.

If [Edge Emphasis] is set to [ON], an image with
The zoom area can be moved. Specify the area
the outline emphasized will be displayed.
to be zoomed.
Zoom area
To move the zoom area to the center of the 5 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
screen, tap the [Screen Center] button. button.
If the zoom area is moved, the imaging area Image Optimization.
and tool window are moved together. It is
recommended to re-register the master image
and re-set the tool.

2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference for Judgment)
(Registering an Image as a Reference for Judgment)
Registers a master image to be a reference for judgment.
Main screen for the Master Registration

This section explains the main screen for the master image registration.
(1) (3)
(4)
4 (2) (5)
(6) (7) (8)
(1) [Back] button (6) Extended functions display button

Returns to the settings screen for the Image Displays extended functions menu for the
Optimization. master image registration.
“1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)” For details, refer to “Extended functions for
(Page 4-6) the Master Registration” (Page 4-24).
(2) Master image (7) [Register Live Image as Master] button
Displays a master image. If no master image is Registers an image taken by the sensor as a
registered, [No Master Image] will be displayed. master image.
(3) [Save] button For details, refer to “Registering the master
image” (Page 4-23).
Saves the settings and returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen. (8) [Next] button
(4) [Image Type] display Proceeds to "3. Tool settings".
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment
Displays an image type.
Method for Targets)” (Page 4-30)
yy .................Displays a master image (still
image).
yy .................Displays an image taken by
the sensor which is currently
imaging.
yy .................Displays an image in the
Sensor Image History.
yy .................Displays an image in USB
memory.
yy .................Indicates that the monitor is in
the Test mode.
(5) [Zoom] button
Switches the display in full-screen mode and
makes it possible to enlarge an image on the
monitor.
For details, refer to “Switching the display to
the full-screen mode” (Page 5-6).

Registering the master image 7 Tap the [OK] button.

1 Start the Settings Navigator.
2 Display the main screen for the Master

Registration.
(Page 4-4) 4
The master image will be registered and returns
3 Place the high-quality-target as reference

to the main screen for the Master Registration.
of judgment on the imaging position.
4 Tap the [Register Live Image as Master] The disabling outline settings (Page 4-43, Page 4-72)
button.
will be initialized. Set the disabling outline settings
again as needed.
Switches to the [LIVE] screen.
5 Image the target.

If [External] is selected for [Trigger Options] or
[Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to
[Yes], input the external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the
button (Page 4-7) to image the target by
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging
by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the
button.
6 Check the image displayed on the monitor

and tap the [Register] button.
The confirmation dialog for the Master Registration

appears.

Extended functions for the Master Master image registration from the
Registration image history in the sensor
Registers an image of the image history in the
Items of extended functions for the memory of the sensor as a master image.
Master Registration “Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images
whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-16)
zz
Select Img From Image History
4 Registers an image of the image history in the 1 Display the extended functions menu for
memory of the sensor as a master image. the Master Registration.
To perform the master image registration from (Page 4-144)

the image history in the sensor, the image to
be registered as a master image in the image 2 Tap the [Select Img From Image History]
button.
history must be saved.
“Sensor Image History (Confirming the
Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-16)
zz
Select Img From USB Memory
Registers the image in USB memory as a master
image.
yySave the image to be registered as a master

image to the USB memory in advance. The [Sensor Image History] screen opens.
yyThe files which can be registered as a
master image are batch backup files (*.iva) 3 Select the image to be registered as
and image capture files (*.ivp). a master image and tap the [Register]
“Saving the Sensor Settings and Images button.
to a USB Memory” (Page 6-23)
zz
Brightness Correction
Select the image
By setting a reference of brightness to the master
image, effects of changing the brightness can be
reduced.
yyThe brightness correction can be set when

the master image is registered.
yyBrightness correction is disabled for the
Color Area tool. For details of how to operate the screen,
refer to “Loading and confirming the saved
images” (Page 6-17).
The selected screen opens on the monitor.


and tap the [Register] button.

If the imaging area of the loaded image is

different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an
area that has not been imaged is registered,
the area will be displayed in black.

The new master image will be registered and
returns to the main screen for the Master
Registration.

Registering from the image in the USB 5 Select the image to be registered as
a master image and tap the [Register]
memory
button.
Select the batch backup file (*.iva) or image capture
file (*.ivp) stored in USB memory, and register as a
master image.
Select the

When using a batch backup file (*.iva) image
4 “Backing up in a batch” (Page 6-24)
1 Connect the USB memory which stores

the batch backup files (*.iva) to the USB

port.
“ Installing the USB memory” (Page 6-23) For details of how to operate the screen,
refer to “Loading and confirming the saved
2 Display the extended functions menu for images” (Page 6-17).
the master image registration.
“Display Method of Extended Functions Menus” The selected image will be magnified.
(Page 4-144)
3 Tap the [Select Img From USB Memory] and tap the [Register] button.
button.

The data in USB memory will be displayed.
If the imaging area of the loaded image is
4 Select the file to be registered as a master different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an
image and tap the [OK] button. area that has not been imaged is registered,

Select the file
For details of selecting the files in the USB

memory, refer to “Selecting the file in the
USB memory” (Page 3-20). The new master image will be registered and
The image of selected file will be displayed. returns to the main screen for the master image
registration.

When using an image capture file (*.ivp) 5 Check the image displayed on the monitor

“Saving the image history individually” (Page 6-27) and tap the [Register] button.
1 Connect the USB memory which stores

the image capture files (*.ivp) to the USB
port.
“Installing the USB memory” (Page 6-23)
2 Display the extended functions menu for 4

the master image registration.

“Display Method of Extended Functions Menus” The confirmation dialog appears.
(Page 4-144)
3 Tap the [Select Img From USB Memory] If the imaging area of the loaded image is
different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an
button.
area that has not been imaged is registered,
The data in USB memory will be displayed.
4 Select the file to be registered as a master

image and tap the [OK] button.
The new master image will be registered and
returns to the main screen for the master image
registration.
Select the file

USB memory” (Page 3-20).
The selected image will be magnified.

Brightness correction 5 Set the tool window to be a reference of

brightness correction and tap the [OK]
button.
Brightness correction is disabled for the Color
Area tool.
1 Display the extended functions menu for

the Master Registration.
4 “Display Method of Extended Functions Menus”
Tool window to
be a reference
(Page 4-144) of brightness
collection
2 Tap the [Brightness Correction] button.
For the region to be a reference of brightness
correction, specify the following.
yyA region with average medium brightness.
A region with strong shininess and reflection
and a region which is too dark may not be
corrected properly.
yyA region with a constant imaging status
which does not change such as device parts
The information screen opens (color type only). other than the target’s .
3 Tap the [OK] button. For details of editing the tool window, refer to
The settings screen for the Brightness Correction
opens. “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-18).
In the case of color operation type, the image
will be displayed in monochrome. 6 Tap the [Test] button.
4 Tap the [Select Region] button.
If the brightness in the specified region is

changed using the masking shield, check that
The screen to set a reference of the brightness the brightness of the entire image is corrected.
correction opens.

7 Tap the [Before Corr]/[After Corr] button

and check the operation status before
brightness correction and status after
brightness correction.

8 Tap the [Back] button.
The system returns to the settings screen for
the Brightness Correction.

button.
Image Optimization.
yyWhen brightness correction is not to be used,

tap the [Delete] button on the screen in step 4.
yyBrightness correction corrects the brightness of
the entire image to make the average brightness
in the tool window to be a reference of brightness
correction the same as the brightness of the
master image.

3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)
In this section, set the tool to judge whether a target Types of tools
is high-quality-target or low-quality-target in the
master image.
Basic Tools
The aspects of a target registered as a master
image are set as a high-quality-target. During an zz
Outline tool
operation, the sensor judges whether it is a high- A detection tool to calculate the matching rate for
quality-target or low-quality-target by judging the the target to be examined based on the outline
differences in the registered high-quality-target and information of a registered high-quality-target.
4 a target to be examined.
Up to 16 detection tools in one program and up to
Judges whether a target is a high or low-quality-
product by setting the threshold to the matching
rate.
1 position adjustment tool can be set. Those tools “Outline tool” (Page 4-40)
can judge a target at the same time.
Tool settings
Master image Outline extraction processing
Processing and judgment during an operation

Internal processing <Judge is OK>
Searches a target which has the outline of same shapes

as an outline of a high-quality-target.
Outline can be detected even if a target is rotated.
Example when the result was NG

No same shapes exist Different shape
(Detection of existence) (Shape detection)
Different direction
(Detection of direction)
The matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100.

100 indicates that an outline is completely matched.
The matching rate decreases in accordance with
the number of non-matched parts.

zz
Color Area/Area tool zz
EdgePixels tool
A tool to calculate the matching rate in the area A tool to calculate the matching rate in the
(number of pixels) of a target to be examined in number of edge pixels of a target to be
comparison to the area (number of pixels) of a examined in comparison to the number of edge
registered high-quality-target (100%). This judges pixels of a registered high-quality-target (100%).
whether a target is a high or low-quality-product
This judges whether a target is a high or low-
by setting the threshold for the matching rate.
quality-product by setting the threshold for the
If the sensor is a color type, the tool will be Color
Area tool. The system judges by the area with an matching rate.
arbitrary specified color. It differs from Outline tool, and the target shape 4
If the sensor is a monochrome type, the tool will is not considered.

be the Area tool. The system judges by the area “EdgePixels tool” (Page 4-60)
with an arbitrary specified brightness. Tool settings
“Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-48)
Master image Edge pixels extract
Tool settings
Color extraction process
(Color type)
Brightness extraction process
Master image (Monochrome type)


Compares the edge pixels of a target by defining

edge pixels of a high-quality-target as 100%.
Example when the judgment was NG
Number of edge Number of edge
Compares the area of a target as defining an pixels is high pixels is low
area of high-quality-target to 100 %.
Area is narrow Area is wide
yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100

(default).
100 indicates that edge pixels are completely
matched.
yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100 (default). The matching rate decreases as the edge
100 indicates that an area is completely
pixels of a target drop off.
matched. The matching rate decreases as
yyThe setting for the display range and
the area of a target narrows.
threshold for the matching rate can be
changed to 0 to 200 or 0 to 999. Also, a
threshold for matching rate can be changed to
target can be judged by setting an upper
0-200 or 0-999. Also, a target can be judged
limit for the threshold.
by setting an upper limit for the threshold.
“Upper Limit” (Page 4-66)
“Setting the upper limit” (Page 4-54)

zz
Position Adjustment tool
A tool to correct the differences in position yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is being
(position gap) of a target to be examined by used, the processing time will be longer.
searching the outline information of a registered yyIn the case of the Outline tool, the search range
high-quality-target. The position adjustment is position will be adjusted. The outline of a target
used with other detection tools. is searched in adjusted search range and the
“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-69) searched outline will be judged.
yyIf the position adjustment fails, the result of
4 Tool settings
Master image
position adjustment is NG. In this case, the
total status result is NG. The individually set
detection tool will not be judged. Failure of
position adjustment can be checked with

position adjustment output. Review the position
adjustment settings and position determining
accuracy for a target.
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of
Tool window Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-138)
Position adjustment window yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is added, the
following settings for the detection tools have
Processing during an operation been set will be changed.
Position adjustment process - Outline tool : ‌When the search region is
the entire range, the value
will be initialized to the default
value in which the position
adjustment is enabled.
- Color Area/ : ‌When the window shape is
Tool window Area tool the entire range, the value
Position adjustment window will be initialized to the default
Search area of the tool window
- EdgePixels : ‌When the window shape is
tool the entire range, the value
will be initialized to the default
yyOnly one Position Adjustment tool can be set in
one program. By setting the position adjustment,
the position adjustment will be applied to all
detection tools.


Advanced Tools zz
Diameter tool
A tool to calculate the matching rate in
zz
Width tool
the diameter of a target to be examined in
A tool to calculate the matching rate in the width
comparison to the diameter of a registered high-
of a target to be examined in comparison to the
quality-target (100%). This judges whether a
width of a registered high-quality-target (100%).
target is a high or low-quality-product by setting
This judges whether a target is a high or low-
the threshold for the matching rate.
quality-product by setting the threshold for the
“Diameter tool” (Page 4-86)
matching rate.
“Width tool” (Page 4-76) Tool settings 4
Diameter extraction

Tool settings Master image processing
Width (height)
Master image extraction processing

Compares the diameter of a target by defining

Find the width of a target from both directions. the diameter of a high-quality-target as 100%.
Compares the width of a target by defining the Example when the judgment was NG
width of a high-quality-target as 100%. Diameter is small Diameter is big

Width (height) is short Width (height) is long
yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 200

(default).
100 indicates that the diameter is completely
yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 200 matched.
(default). The matching rate decreases as the
100 indicates that the width is completely
diameter of a target decreases.
matched.
The matching rate decreases as the width of
a target shortens.
changed to 0 to 100 or 0 to 999. If it changes
to 0 to 100, set the threshold only for the
lower limit.
changed to 0 to 100 or 0 to 999. If it changes
to 0 to 100, set the threshold only for the
lower limit.

zz
Edge tool zz
Pitch tool
A tool to calculate the matching rate in the
A tool to count and judge the number of edges
distance between pitches of a target to be
for a registered high-quality-target (Bright/Dark examined in comparison to the average value
changes). It is judged within the set region. This of the distance between pitches of a registered
judges whether a target is a high or low-quality- high-quality-target (100%). This judges whether
product by setting the threshold for the number a target is a high or low-quality-product by
setting the threshold for the matching rate.
of edges. “Pitch tool” (Page 4-105)
“Edge tool” (Page 4-96)
4 Tool settings
Tool settings
Extract distance
Master image Master image between pitches
Tool window
Processing and judgment during an operation Processing and judgment during an operation
Compares the distance between pitches of a target

Search the target edge from one direction. by defining the average value of the distance
Rotate the tool window to set the direction to be between pitches of a high-quality-target as 100%.
examined. Example when the judgment was NG
Example when the judgment was NG Number of pitches is Distance between
different pitches is different
No edge Number of edges is high
yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 200 (default).

yyMaximum value of the matching rate is The average value of all the distances
adjusted automatically. between pitches is 100.
The matching rate is indicated in the number Among all of the distances between pitches,
of edges. 0 indicates that there is no edge in the one which deviates the most from average
the window. value is displayed to show the matching rate.
yyUp to 50 edges can be counted. 51 edges or yyBoth maximum and minimum values of
the distances between all the pitches are
more cannot be counted. displayed in status gauge.
yyThe setting for the display range and yyWhen the number of pitches is different from the
threshold for the matching rate can be number for master image, the matching rate is 0.
changed to 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 0 to 20 or 0 to 50. yyThe maximum number of detectable pitches
Also, a target can be judged by setting an is 31 when the measurement mode is [Pin
upper limit for the threshold. Pitch], and 32 when the measurement mode is
[Pin Width]. More pitches cannot be detected.
“Upper Limit” (Page 4-101) yyThe display range of matching rate and the
setting range of threshold can be changed to
0 to 999.

zz
OCR tool
This is a tool used to determine whether the text
and date of the object to be examined match
the registered high-quality text and date.
“OCR Tool” (Page 4-115)
Tool settings Master text extraction

(character reading)
4
Master date extraction
Master image (date reading)
EXP. date EXP. date

01.10.20xx 01.10.20xx
0 1 . 1 0 . 2 0 x x

EXP. date EXP. date

01.10.20xx 01.10.20xx
0 1 . 1 0 . 2 0 x x
The text and date on the object are read and

compared to the text and date on the high-
quality-target.

Character/date is Character/date is
wrong incomplete
EXP. date EXP. date

02.10.20xx 0 .10.20xx
yyThe matching rate is indicated as 0 or 100.

If all the text and date match, 100 is
displayed. If either the text or date does not
match, or the number of letters does not
match, 0 is displayed.
yyIf the shade contrast function is enabled,
the matching rate may vary depending on
the color shading, even if the text and date
match. The lighter the printing is for the text
and date, the lower the matching rate will be.

zz
Hi-Sp.Adj tool
A tool to correct the differences in position yyWhen the Hi-Sp.Adj tool is being used, the
(position gap) of a target to be examined by processing time will be longer.
searching the edge feature of a registered high- yyIn the case of outline tool, the high-speed
quality-target. position will adjust the search range. The
The Hi-Sp.Adj tool is used with other detection outline of a target is searched in adjusted
tools. Compared with the normal position search range and the searched outline will
adjustment tool, the adjustment process with be judged.
4 high-speed is available. yyIf the Hi-Sp.Adj fails, the result of Hi-Sp.Adj
is NG. In this case, the total status result
Select either 1-Axis Adjustment which corrects
is NG. The individually set detection tool
X axis position, or 2-Axis Adjustment which

will not be judged. Failure of Hi-Sp.Adj can
corrects both directions of X axis and Y axis and
be checked with Hi-Sp.Adj output. Review
its angle.
the Hi-Sp.Adj settings and the position
“ Hi-Sp.Adj tool” (Page 4-127)
determining accuracy for a target.
Tool settings “‌ 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details
Master image of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page
4-138)
yyWhen the Hi-Sp.Adj tool is added, the
following settings for the detection tools
which have been set will be changed.
- Outline tool :‌When the search region is
the entire range, the value
Tool window
will be initialized to the
Position adjustment window default value in which the
Processing during an operation Hi‑Sp.Adj is enabled.
Position adjustment -Color Area/ :‌When the window shape is
process Area tool the entire range, the value
will be initialized to the
default value in which the
Hi‑Sp.Adj is enabled.
-EdgePixels :‌When the window shape is
tool the entire range, the value
Tool window will be initialized to the
Position adjustment window default value in which the
Hi‑Sp.Adj is enabled.
yyOnly one Hi-Sp.Adj tool can be set in one
program. If the Hi-Sp.Adj is set, the Hi-Sp.
Adj will be applied to all detection tools.

MEMO

Main screen for the Tool Settings

This section explains the main screen for the Tool settings.
(1) (4)
(2) (5)
(6)
(3)
(7)
4
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
(1) [Back] button (7) [View] button

Returns to the Master Registration screen. Displays a menu to select the display pattern of
“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image tools.
as a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-22) “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7)
(2) [Tool Name] button (8) Extended functions display button
Displays a name of the selected tool on the Displays the extended functions menu for the
monitor. From the pull-down menu, the selected Tool Settings.
tool can be switched. “Extended functions for the Tool settings”
(3) Master image (Page 4-75)
Displays the master image and tool window. If (9) [Add Tool] button
a search region is set, the tool window which Adds tools.
indicate the search region (light blue) will be “Adding a tool” (Page 4-39)
displayed. (10) [Edit Tool] button
By tapping the tool window, the selected tool Edits settings for the selected tool.
can be switched. “Editing a tool” (Page 4-39)
(4) [Save] button (11) [Delete Tool] button
Saves the settings. Deletes the selected tool.
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5) “Deleting a tool” (Page 4-39)
(5) [Image Type] display (12) [Next] button
Displays an image type. Proceeds to the Output Assignment settings.
yy .................Displays a master image (still “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of
image). Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-138)
yy .................Indicates that the monitor is in
the Test mode.
yy .................Displays an image taken by
the sensor which is currently
imaging.
(6) [Zoom] button
Switches to the full-screen display and makes it
possible to enlarge an image on the monitor.
For details, refer to “Switching the display to
the full-screen mode” (Page 5-6).

Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool Editing a tool
Adding a tool 1 Select a tool to edit the settings.

1 Tap the [Add Tool] button.
4
2 Tap the tool to be added.

2 Tap the [Edit Tool] button.
3 Edit setting items for each tool.

“Outline tool” (Page 4-40)
By tapping the button, the help screen for “EdgePixels tool” (Page 4-60)
tools appears. “Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-69)
“Width tool” (Page 4-76)
3 Set setting items for each tool. “Diameter tool” (Page 4-86)
“Pitch tool” (Page 4-105)
“EdgePixels tool” (Page 4-60)
“Hi-Sp.Adj tool” (Page 4-127)
“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-69)
“Width tool” (Page 4-76)
“Diameter tool” (Page 4-86)
Deleting a tool
1 Select a tool to be deleted.
2 Tap the [Delete Tool] button.

The selected tool will be deleted and returns to
the main screen for the Tool settings.

Outline tool
Setting items for the Outline tool
Items Description Setting range Default value

yy¨ Rect
Specifies with the rectangular window.
Window Shape
4 Selects the window shape to

An arbitrary size, position, and angle
can be specified with stylus.
specify an area of the target ¨ Rect
yy¡ Circle
to be detected.
Specifies with the circular window.
Edit Window
An arbitrary size and position can be

specified with stylus.
yyEntire Entire
Search Region
Specifies an area to search the

Specifies the entire imaging area as a (Without position
outline of a target. By specifying adjustment)
search region.
the smaller area as a search
yyPartial Partial
region, the processing time will
Specifies a search region to an arbitrary (With position
be shortened.
size in the imaging area. adjustment)
yyUndo
The previous operation can be cancelled.
Remove Outline
Judges by disabling an You can undo back to 5 operations before.

unnecessary outline which yyClear
interrupts the stabilized Initializes all the disabling processes. Not specified
detection. Specify by tracing yyEraser Width
the extracted outline with stylus. Selects the eraser width (light/medium/
Fine Tune Outline
heavy) of the pen when specifying an

unnecessary outline.
yyHigh
Extracts an outline of the image with
low contrast. Used when an outline you
wish to detect cannot be extracted.
Sensitivity
The extraction sensitivity of

yyNorm
an outline can be selected Norm*1
Extracts the standard outline.
according to the target.
yyLow
Reduces the extracted volume of an
outline. Reduces the extracted volume of
an outline that is not necessary to detect.
Adjusts a threshold (matching
rate*2) used in the OK/NG
judgment. During threshold
Limit adjustment, the system turns
0 to 100 70
Adjustment to the Test mode so that the
thresholds can be adjusted to
the applicable value during an
operation.
*1 If digital zoom set to [Zoom Mag: x4] on the IV-HG300CA/IV-HG600MA, the default value is [High].
*2 The matching rate of 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched.
Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of non-matched parts.

Setting the Outline tool 4 Select a tool window shape.

1 Tap the [Add Tool] button and tap the
[Outline] button.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-39)
The main screen for the Outline tool settings opens.
2 Tap the [Edit Window] button. 4

¨ Rect ¡ Circle

The system returns to the screen to set the
[Window Shape] and [Search Region].
Once the tool window is tapped, you can
proceed to step 6.
6 Set the position, size, and angle of the
tool window in accordance with the target.
3 Tap the [Window Shape] button.
Set the tool
window
“Editing the tool window” (Page 3-18).
7 Set a search region as needed.

“Setting a search region” (Page 4-43)

button.
Outline tool settings.
9 Adjust the outline as needed.

“Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-43)
“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-44)

10 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button. 12 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection
by checking the matching rate.
<Setting example>
If the matching rate of the high-quality-target
is higher than 90 and if the matching rate of
the low-quality-target is lower than 40, set the
threshold to 65 which is an intermediate value
between 40 and 90.
4
The sensor turns to the Test mode.
11 Image a high-quality-target and a low-

quality-target.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the Matching rate Threshold
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging A target is detected as OK if the matching rate
by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the is greater than the threshold, and detected
button. as NG if the matching rate is lower than the
threshold.
“Selecting a display method for tools”
(Page 5-7)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment”
(Page 5-17)
“Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and
Position Adjustment Tool” (Page A-6).

button.

Tool settings.


Setting a search region
Settings for disabling outlines
1 Tap the [Search Region] button. 1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.

The Settings Navigator guide opens.
2 Tap the [Partial] button. Tap the [OK] button.
2 Specify an outline which detection is not

needed by tracing it with stylus.
The specified outline changes from green to yellow.
3 Set a tool window indicates the search region.

The outline that the
outline extraction has
disabled (yellow)
Search region
yyThe eraser width (light/medium/heavy) of the

pen when tracing an outline can be switched
via [Eraser Width].
The search region cannot be rotated. yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 5 times.
button. The system returns to the main screen for the
The system returns to the screen to set [Window Outline tool settings.
Shape] and [Search Region].


Setting a sensitivity
1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.
The outline
4 cannot be
extracted

2 Select the extraction sensitivity of an outline.

button.
Extracted
outline


Extended functions for the Outline tool

Default
value
Sets a range of the rotating direction to search
an outline of the target.
The system judges NG if an angle of the
target exceeds its rotation range even if the
Rotation
target is the same shape.
yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too wide,
4
0 to ± 180° (Unit: ± 1°) ± 20°
Range the acceptable range of variations of angles

when a target is placed can be increased.
yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too
narrow, the processing time can be shorten.
yyThis can be used for judging the direction of
the target by limiting the rotation range.
yyON
The tool window will search
with the range ± few degrees
Select whether or not to allow the margin for wider than the setting value of
Margin ON
the limited angle set in Rotation Range. rotation range.
yyOFF
The tool window will search only
within the set rotation range.
yyHigh Accuracy
Differences in outlines can be
detected with a high degree of
accuracy.
Search The detection mode of the Outline tool can be yyHigh Speed High
Algorithm selected according to the target. Outlines can be judged faster than Accuracy
in high accuracy mode.
There may be an influence from
the background or unnecessary
outlines other than the target.
An arbitrary name such as the name of a
target can be set in tools. Tool names can be Up to 8 characters in one byte
Tool Name (None)
checked on the run screen. English characters can be set.


Rotation Range 5 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
button.
1 Display the extended functions menu of The system returns to the main screen for the
the Outline tool. Outline tool settings.
“‌ Display Method of Extended Functions
Menus” (Page 4-144)
Search Algorithm
2 Tap the [Rotation Range] button. 1 Display the extended functions menu of
4 the Outline tool.
2 Tap the [Search Algorithm] button.
3 Set a rotation range of the Outline tool.
3 Select the type of search algorithm (High

Speed/High Accuracy).
4 Set a margin of the rotation range.

button.
yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is not

yySelect [ON] when detection is not stable stable because of a small difference in the
because of the influence of the rotation angle matching rate of a high and low-quality-target.
of the target. The tool window will search
yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is
with the range ± few degrees wider than
not stable because of the influence of an
the setting value of rotation range. (The tool
unnecessary outline other than the target such
window will search ± few degrees even if the
rotation range is set to 0°) as the background.
yySelect [OFF] when you would like to detect yySelect [High Speed] to shorten the processing
the target in accordance with the set rotation time.
angle of the target.


Tool Name
1 Display the extended functions menu of

the Outline tool.
2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.

4

3 Input an arbitrary name.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-19)

button.
The tool name which has been set will be displayed.
If the display language (Page 6-62) is changed,

characters might be garbled.

Color Area/Area tool
Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool

Default
value
yy¨ Rect
4 An arbitrary size, position, and angle
yy¡ Circle
Select the window shape to
Window Shape specify an area of the target ¨ Rect
to be extracted.
yyEntire
The entire area (imaging area) of
an image displayed in the monitor
becomes the extraction target.
Edit Window
Adds a rectangular/circular yy¨ Rect

Add Mask mask region in the tool Specifies a rectangular mask region
window frame. or a mask cutting region. An arbitrary
Inside the mask region size, position, and angle can be
Mask is excluded from an area specified with stylus.
Shape extraction target. yy¡ Circle
Mask
Specifies a circular mask region or ¨ Rect

Adds a rectangular/circular a mask cutting region. An arbitrary
Cut mask cutting region in the mask size and position can be specified
region. with stylus.
Inside the mask cutting
yySetting counts
Clip region, the mask is disabled
Adding or cutting the mask can be
Shape and it becomes the target of
set up to 20 times.
the area extraction.
yyExtract Area [+]
Expands a range of the color to be
extracted and expands an extraction
area.
yyExtract Area [-]
Contracts a range of the color to be
Tap a color to be extracted extracted and narrows an extraction
Color Extraction
on the master image and set area. (No extraction)
(For color type)
an extraction range.
yyUndo
The previous operation can be
cancelled.
yyClear
Cancels the selection of the tapped
color.
The color range to be
to Live Image extracted can be set on the - -
Live image of the target.

Default
value
yyExtraction Area
Sets the upper and the lower limit
of brightness in a range within 0 to
255 with the tapped brightness as a
Tap brightness to be extracted reference.
Brightness Extraction
on the master image and set yyUndo (No extraction)
(For monochrome type)
the extraction range. The previous operation can be
cancelled. 4
yyClear

Cancels the selection of the tapped
brightness.
A brightness range to be
to Live Image extracted can be set on the - -
Live image of the target.
Adjusts a threshold
(matching rate*) used in the
OK/NG judgment. During the
thresholds adjustment, the 0 to 100 (when the upper limit setting
Limit Adjustment 50
system switches to the Test is OFF)
mode so that a threshold can
be adjusted to an applicable
value during an operation.
Sets the upper limit of the
threshold. yyEnable
Upper Set when the OK/NG Activates the upper limit setting.
Disable
Limit judgment is desired if the yyDisable
target area is larger than the Deactivates the upper limit setting.
Upper Limit
OK area.
yy0-200
When the upper limit of Sets the upper and the lower limit of
the threshold is ON, select a threshold in a range within 0 to 200.
the threshold scale in
Scale yy0-999 0-200
accordance with the range
of the matching rate required Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
for the judgment. threshold in a range within 0 to 999.
The slider movement unit is 5.
* The matching rate is 100 when an area matches perfectly. This becomes smaller with a narrower area
and larger with a wider area. If the matching rate exceeds the upper limit of the threshold adjusting
range, it will be saturated to the upper limit of the threshold adjusting range.

Setting the Color Area/Area tool 4 Select a tool window shape.

[ColorArea] button (color type) or [Area]
button (monochrome type).
The main screen for the Color Area/Area tool
4 settings opens.
2 Tap the [Edit Window] button. ¨ Rect ¡ Circle

When [Entire] is selected, the tool window will

be hidden.

Once the tool window is tapped, you can [Window Shape] and [Mask].
proceed to step 6.
6 Set the position, size, and angle of tool
window in accordance with a target.
3 Tap the [Window Shape] button.
Set the tool
window
7 Perform the mask setting as needed.

Inside the mask region is excluded from the
area extraction target.
“Mask settings” (Page 4-53)

Color Area/Area tool settings.

9 Set the area to be the target to extract. zz

For monochrome type
Tap the [Brightness Extraction] button.
zz
For color type
Tap the [Color Extraction] button.

The screen to select brightness to be extracted
opens.
The screen to select a color to be extracted opens.
Tap the brightness to be the reference of
Tap the color to be the reference of judgment
judgment for the color area.
for the color area.
The tapped brightness will be extracted.

The tapped color will be extracted.
yyIf the areas of brightness that have not been
yyIf the areas of color that have not been extracted extracted are tapped repeatedly, the extraction
are tapped repeatedly, the extraction range can
range can be added.
be added.
yyAdjust the slider, and the range of the brightness
yyTap the [+] / [-] button of the extraction range, to be extracted can be expanded/reduced.
and the range of color to be extracted can be
expanded/reduced.
yyFor details of settings by using the slider, refer to

“Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-17).
yyBy tapping the [to Live Image] button, the
yyBy tapping the [to Live Image] button, the
range of the color to be extracted can be set
range of the brightness to be extracted can
with the Live Image of the target.
be set with the Live image of the target.
yyWhen the color extraction is to be performed
yyWhen the brightness extraction is to be performed
again, tap the [Clear] button and then tap the
again, tap the [Clear] button and then tap the color
color to be the reference of judgment again.
to be the reference for judgment again.
After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
Color Area tool settings.
Area tool settings.

10 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button. 13 Set the upper limit as needed.
“Setting the upper limit” (Page 4-54)

button.

The sensor turns to Test mode.
11 Image a high-quality-target and a low-

quality-target.
button (Page 4-7) to image the target by The system returns to the main screen for tool
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging settings.
button.
12 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection

<Setting example>
the low-quality-target is lower than 40, set the
threshold to 65 which is an intermediate value
between 40 and 90.
Matching rate Threshold
A target is detected as OK if the matching rate

is greater than the threshold, and detected
as NG if the matching rate is lower than the
threshold.
“Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
5-17)


Mask settings 5 Set the position, size, and angle of the
mask shape in accordance with the target.
1 Tap the [Mask] button
Set mask shape

2 Tap the [Add Mask] button. “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-18).

button.
The system returns to the screen to set a mask
region.
7 Tap the [Cut Mask] button to cut a mask

region.
3 Tap the [Mask Shape] button.
8 Tap the [Clip Shape] button.

4 Select the mask shape and tap the [OK]
button.

9 Select the cutting shape and tap the [OK]

Setting the upper limit
button.
1 Tap the [Upper Limit] button.
4
10 Set the position, size, and angle of the

cutting shape in accordance with the target. 2 Tap the [Enable] button for the upper limit
threshold and select the scale.
Set clip shape
“Editing the tool window” (Page 3-18). Select the scale in accordance with a range of
the matching rate required for judgment.
11 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] 3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
button.
button.
The slider to set the upper limit and the lower
mask region.
limit of the threshold will be displayed.
12 Repeat steps 2 to 11 as needed and set
the mask region.

button.
Area not be
masked
Masked area



Matching rate Threshold (upper limit)
Threshold (lower limit)
Judged OK when the matching rate is within

threshold range, and NG when it is outside the
range.
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 5-17)

button.

Extended functions of the Color Area/Area tool
Default
value
yyH (hue)
0° to 359°
(both starting point
yyColor type
4
Advanced Color and ending point)
Extraction Specifies a color to be extracted as HSB -
yyS (saturation)
(For color type) (H: Hue, S: Saturation, B: Brightness).
0 to 255
Advanced Brightness
yyB (Brightness)
Extraction
0 to 255
(For monochrome type)
yyMonochrome type
Specifies brightness value to be 0 to 255 -
extracted.
A color/brightness range to be extracted
to Live Image - -
can be set on the Live image of the target.
An arbitrary name such as name of a
Up to 8 characters
target can be set to tools. Tool names can
Tool Name in one byte English (None)
be checked on the run screen.
characters can be set.
yyDisable
Matches the area
extracted from the
master image as the
criteria of a rate of
100%.
yyEnable: Large
Select a condition which the matching rate Matches 1/10th of
Fixed Reference Area Disable
of the Color Area/Area is 100%. the total sensor view
as the criteria of a
rate of 100%.
yyEnable: Small
Matches 1/100th of
the total sensor view
as the criteria of a
rate of 100%.


Advanced Color Extraction/Advanced
Brightness Extraction yyAdjust the value by slider while confirming
the color histogram.
1 Display the extended functions menu of The value specified by slider which is within
the range will be specified.
the Color Area/Area tool.
(Page 4-144)
2 Tap the [Advanced Color Extraction] 4

button.

For monochrome type, tap the [Advanced
Brightness Extraction] button.
yyVertical axis indicates pixel.

Among the pixels of each color to be
extracted, the maximum one becomes the
maximum value of the vertical axis.
yyThe range and extraction rules in the color
extraction detailed settings are shown as
follow.
yyH: ‌Set the upper limit and lower limit for the
3 Specify a color or brightness of the range of 0 to 359.
extraction target. - ‌Lower limit ≤ Upper limit
The extraction range of a color is
zz
For color type
from the lower limit to the upper limit.
- ‌Lower limit > Upper limit
The extraction range of a color is
from 0 to the upper limit, and from the
lower limit to 359.
yyS: ‌Set the upper limit and lower limit for the
range of 0 to 255.
The extraction range of a color is from
the lower limit to the upper limit.
yyV: ‌Set the upper limit and lower limit for the
range of 0 to 255.
The extraction range of a color is from
the lower limit to the upper limit.
yyWhen the [to Live Image] button is tapped,
the range of the color to be extracted can be
set on the Live image of the target.

zz
For monochrome type
Tool Name

(Page 4-144)

4
yyAdjust the value by slider while confirming

the monochrome histogram.
The value specified by slider which is within
the range will be specified.
yyThe vertical axis indicates pixel.

Among the extracted pixels of each
brightness, the one that has the most pixels
becomes the maximum value of vertical axis.
yyThe range and extraction rules in the
extraction detailed settings are shown as “Inputting characters” (Page 3-19).
follow.
V: ‌Set the upper limit and lower limit for the 4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
range of 0 to 255. button.
The extraction range of the brightness is The system returns to the main screen for the
from the lower limit to the upper limit. Color Area/Area tool settings.
yyWhen the [to Live Image] button is tapped, The tool name which has been set will be displayed.
the range of brightness to be extracted can
be set on the Live image of the target.

button.



Fixed Reference Area 5 Extract the color/brightness range to be judged.
zz
Extract from the Live image
Select [Enable] if the color/brightness to be judged Tap the [Color Extraction]/[Brightness Extraction]
in the master image cannot be detected. button.
By tapping the [to Live Image] button, extract the color/
brightness range to be judged from “LIVE” image.
The Color Area/Area tools with the fixed reference
area set as [Enable] are excluded from a Tool
Auto Tuning target. 4

“Display Method of Extended Functions
2 Tap the [Fixed Reference Area] button. The color/brightness range to be extracted
can be specified by using [Advanced Color
Extraction]/[Advanced Brightness Extraction].
zz
Extract from the master image, and then
move the tool window
Tap the [Edit Window] button and move the tool
window.
By tapping the [Color Extraction]/[Brightness
Extraction] button, extract the color/brightness
range to be judged.
The Settings Navigator guide opens. Tap the [Edit Window] button again, and move
Tap the [OK] button. the tool window to the position where the color/
brightness is to be judged.
3 Perform the “Fixed Reference Area”.
Extract
the color/
brightness
Move


EdgePixels tool
Setting items for the EdgePixels tool
Default
value
yy¨ Rect
4 Specifies with the rectangular window.
An arbitrary size, position, and angle

yy¡ Circle
Specifies the window shape to
Window Specifies with the circular window.
specify an area of the target to □ Rect
Shape An arbitrary size and position can be
be detected.
yyEntire
The entire area (imaging area) of
an image which is displayed in the
Edit Window
monitor becomes the extraction area.

Add Mask Adds a rectangular/circular yy¨ Rect
mask region in the tool window Specifies a rectangular mask region
frame. or a mask cutting region. An arbitrary
Mask Area inside the mask region is size, position, and angle can be
Shape excluded from the edge pixels specified with stylus.
extraction target. yy¡ Circle
Mask
Cut Mask Adds a rectangular/circular Specifies a circular mask region or a □ Rect

cutting region in the mask mask cutting region. An arbitrary size
region. and position can be specified with
Cut Inside the mask cutting region, stylus.
Shape the mask is disabled and it yySetting counts
becomes the target for the edge Adding or cutting the mask can be set
pixels extraction. up to 20 times.
yyMid Sens
Extracts the edge pixels on a basic
Set the extraction sensitivity for level.
Mid
Edge Sens Adjust edge pixels in accordance with yyHi Sens Sens
a target. Increase the extracted volume of edge
pixels. Used when the edge pixels you
wish to detect cannot be extracted.
Live Image edge pixels can be adjusted on -- --
the Live image of the target.

Default
value
rate*) used in the OK/NG
adjustment, the system turns 0 to 100
Limit Adjust 50
to the Test mode so that the (when the upper limit setting is OFF)
thresholds can be adjusted to
the applicable value during an 4
operation.

Sets an upper limit for the
threshold. yyEnable
Upper Sets if the OK/NG judgment is Activates the upper limit setting.
Disable
Limit desired when the target edge yyDisable
pixels are larger than the OK Deactivates the upper limit setting.
Upper Limit
edge pixels.
yy0-200
When the upper limit of the Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
threshold is ON, select the threshold in a range within 0 to 200.
Scale threshold scale in accordance yy0-999 0-200
with the range of the matching Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
rate required for the judgment. threshold in a range within 0 to 999.
* ‌The matching rate is 100 when the edge pixels match perfectly. This becomes smaller with a lower
number of edge pixels and larger with a higher number of edge pixels. If the matching rate exceeds the
upper limit of the threshold adjusting range, it will be saturated to the upper limit of the threshold adjusting
range.

Setting the EdgePixels tool 4 Select a tool window shape.

[EdgePixels] button.
The main screen for the EdgePixels tool opens.
4 2 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

□ Rect ○Circle
When [Entire] is selected, the tool window will

be hidden.
Once the tool window is tapped, you can 5 Tap the [OK] button.
proceed to step 3. The system returns to the screen to set the
[Window Shape] and [Mask].
3 Tap the [Window Shape] button. 6 Set the position, size, and angle of tool
Set the tool

window
“Editing the tool window” (Page 3-18)

Inside the mask region is excluded from an
edge pixels extraction target.
“Mask” (Page 4-64)

EdgePixels tool settings.

9 Adjust the edge sensitivity as needed. 12 Adjust the threshold for anomaly
“Edge Sens Adjust” (Page 4-65) detection by checking the matching rate.
<Setting example>
10 Tap the [Limit Adjust] button. If the matching rate of the high-quality-target
the low-quality-target is lower than 40, set
the threshold to 65 of the value intermediate
between 40 and 90.
4

11 Take an image of a high-quality-target and

low-quality-target.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the A target is detected as OK if the matching rate
button (Page 4-7) to take an image is greater than the threshold, and detected
as NG if the matching rate is lower than the
of the target by inputting an internal trigger
threshold.
temporarily. Imaging by inputting an internal
trigger finishes with the button. (Page 5-7)
(Page 5-17)
13 Set the upper limit as needed.


button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool

settings.


Mask 5 Set the position, size, and angle of the
mask shape in accordance with the target.
1 Tap the [Mask] button.
Set mask shape
4
2 Tap the [Add Mask] button. “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-18)

button.
region.
7 Tap the [Cut Mask] button to cut a mask

region.
8 Tap the [Cut Shape] button.

button.

9 Select the cutting shape and tap the [OK]

Edge Sens Adjust
button.
1 Tap the [Edge Sens Adjust] button.

10 Set the position, size, and angle of the The Settings Navigator guide opens.
cutting shape in accordance with the
target.
2 Select the extraction sensitivity of the
edge pixels.
Set clip shape
11 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] When the [Live Image] button is tapped, the
button. extraction sensitivity of the edge pixels can be
The system returns to the screen to set a mask adjusted with the target Live image.
region.
12 Repeat steps 2 to 11 as needed and set button.
the mask region. The system returns to the main screen for the
button.
Area not be
masked
Area masked


Upper Limit 4 Adjust the threshold for anomaly
detection by checking the matching rate.
4
2 Tap the [Enable] button for the upper limit Threshold (lower limit)
threshold and select the scale.

Judged OK when the matching rate is within a
range.
(Page 5-7)
(Page 5-17)
Select the scale in accordance with a range of

the matching rate required for judgment.
button.
3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] The system returns to the main screen for the
button.
The slider setting the upper limit and the lower
limit of the threshold will be displayed.

Extended functions for the EdgePixels tool
Default
value
yyBased on Master
Matches the number of pixels
of an edge extracted from the
Fixed Ref.
Select a condition which the
matching rate of the EdgePixels
master image as the criteria of a
rate of 100%. Based on 4
Area Master
tool is 100%. yyFixed Ref.

Sets 1/20th of number of pixels
in sensor's FOV range as the
standard of 100% matching level.
An arbitrary name such as the
name of a target can be set in tools.
Tool names can be checked on the Up to 8 characters in one byte
Tool name (None)
run screen. English characters can be set.
“Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting”
(Page 5-1)


Fixed Ref. Area
Tool Name
Select [Fixed Ref.] if the edge to be judged in the 1 Display the extended functions menu of
the EdgePixels tool.
master image cannot be extracted.
the EdgePixels tool.
4 “Display Method of Extended Functions
2 Tap the [Fixed Ref. Area] button.

3 Perform the “Fixed Reference Area”.

yyWhen the number of pixels of an edge The tool name which has been set will be
extracted from master image is matched as displayed.
the standard of 100% matching level, select
[Based on Master].
yyWhen 1/20th of number of pixels in sensor's
FOV range as the standard of 100%
matching level, select [Fixed Ref.].
Number of edge pixels
for 1/20 of sensor FOV
= Matching rate 100
View size
4 Tap the [OK] button. characters might be garbled.


Position Adjustment tool
Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool
Items Description Setting range Default value

yy¨ Rect
Specifies with the rectangular window. An
Window Shape
Select a shape of the window

to specify the range of a target
arbitrary size, position, and angle can be
4
¨ Rect
to be position adjustment yy¡ Circle

Edit Window
reference.
Specifies an area to search yyEntire
Search Region
a target to be a reference Specifies the entire imaging area as a

of position adjustment. By search region.
Entire
specifying the narrower area as yyPartial
a search region, the processing Specifies a search region to an arbitrary
time will be shortened. size in the imaging area.
yyUndo
The previous operation can be cancelled.
Remove Outline
Unnecessary outlines which You can undo back to 5 operations before.

obstruct the steady position yyClear
adjustments can be disabled. Initializes all the disabling processes. Not specified
Specifies by tracing the yyEraser Width
extracted outline with stylus. Selects the eraser width (light/medium/
Fine Tune Outline
heavy) of the pen when specifying an

unnecessary outline.
yyHigh
Extracts an outline of the image with low
contrast. Used when an outline you wish
to detect cannot be extracted.
Sensitivity

yyNorm
an outline can be selected Norm*1
Extracts the standard outline.
according to the target.
yyLow
Reduces the extracted volume of an
outline. Reduces the extracted volume of
an outline that is not necessary to detect.
rate*2) which judges whether
the position adjustment is
succeeded or failed. During
Limit
threshold adjustment, the 0 to 100 70
Adjustment
system switches to the Test
mode so that the threshold can
be adjusted to an applicable
value during an operation.
*1 If digital zoom is set to [Zoom Mag: x4] on the IV-HG300CA/IV-HG600MA, the default value is [High].
*2 The matching rate of 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched.
The matching rate decreases with more non-matching parts.
Setting the Position Adjustment tool 4 Select a tool window shape.

1 Tap the [Add Tool] button and then the
[Pos.Adj.] button.
The main screen for the Position Adjustment tool
settings opens.
4 2 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

¨ Rect ¡ Circle

[Window Shape] and [Search Region].
proceed to step 6.
3 Tap the [Window Shape] button. Set the tool

window
Set the position and size of tool window as

large as possible by selecting the part that is
dissimilar in shape.
“Stabilizing the position adjustment” (Page 5-39)
7 Set a search region as needed.


button.
Position Adjustment tool settings.

9 Adjust the outline as needed. 12 Adjust a threshold to judge whether or not

“Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-72) the position adjustment is succeeded by
“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-73) checking the matching rate.
10 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.


yyIf there are many variations of target shapes
11 Image the target. that a tool window has been set to, set the
threshold to a lower matching rate.
[Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to yyA target is detected as OK if the matching
rate is greater than the threshold, and
detected as NG if the matching rate is lower
than the threshold.
yy “Selecting a display method for tools”
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging (Page 5-7)
by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the yy “Editing the value with the slider” (Page
button. 3-17)
yy “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment”
(Page 5-17)

button.

settings.


Setting a search region
Settings for disabling outlines
1 Tap the [Search Region] button. 1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.
4

2 Tap the [Partial] button. Tap the [OK] button.
2 Specify the unnecessary outline in basic

shapes of position adjustment by tracing
it with stylus.
The specified outline changes from green to
yellow.
3 Set the tool window indicates a search

region.
The outline that the

outline extraction
Search region has disabled
(yellow)
yyThe eraser width (light/medium/heavy) of the

The search region cannot be rotated. pen when tracing an outline can be switched
“Editing the tool window” (Page 3-18). via [Eraser Width].
yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 5 times.
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] 3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
button. button.
The system returns to the screen to set [Window The system returns to the main screen for the
Shape] and [Search Region]. Position Adjustment tool settings.


Setting a sensitivity
1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.
The outline
cannot be
4
extracted

2 Select the extraction sensitivity of an

outline.

button.
Extracted
outline


Extended functions for the Position Adjustment tool

Default
value
Sets a range to adjust the position to the rotating direction.
The status result of position adjustment is NG without adjusting
Rotation the position if an angle of a target exceeds its rotation range. 0 to ±180°
yyIf the setting of rotation range is too wide, the acceptable range ±20°
Range of variation in angles when a target is placed can be set wider. (Unit: ±1°)
4 yyIf the setting of rotation range is too narrow, the
processing time can be shorten.
yyON
The tool window will
search with the range
± few degrees wider
Select whether or not to allow the margin for the limited than the setting value
Margin ON
angle set in Rotation Range. of rotation range.
yyOFF
The tool window will
search only within the
set rotation range.

Rotation Range
1 Display the extended functions menu for 4 Set a margin of the rotation range.
the Position Adjustment tool.
(Page 4-144)
2 Tap the [Rotation Range] button.
yySelect [ON] when the position adjustment

is not stable because of the influence of the
rotation angle of the target.
The tool window will search with the range ±
3 Set the rotation range of the Position few degrees wider than the setting value of
rotation range.
Adjustment tool. (The tool window will search ± few degrees
even if the rotation range is set to 0°.)
yySelect [OFF] when you would like to detect
the target in accordance with the set rotation
angle of the target.

button.

Extended functions for the Tool settings
Items of extended functions for the Tool settings
Default
value
Copies a tool which has been set, and pastes it to the
Copy Tool same position. - - 4
This is for outline tool and color area/area tool.

Copy Tool
1 Select the copy source tool. 4 Tap the [OK] button.

Select the copy
source tool.
2 Display the extended functions menu for The copied tool window with the selected status
will be displayed in the copy source tool window.
the Tool settings.
Name of copied tool
“ Display Method of Extended Functions
3 Tap the [Copy Tool] button.
Copied tool
The tool number which has not been set

will be automatically assigned to the copy
destination tool number.
If 16 tools are set, tools cannot be copied.
5 Tap the [Edit Tool] button and set the copied

tool.
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment
Method for Targets)” (Page 4-30)

Width tool
Setting items for the Width tool

Default
value
Specifies the window to specify an
Edit Window An arbitrary size, position, and angle --
4 area of the target to be detected.
Mask Adds a rectangular mask region in Specifies a rectangular mask region.
the tool window frame. An arbitrary size can be specified with

Add Area inside the mask region is stylus. (None)
Mask excluded from an width detection yyClear
target. Unmask the one that has been set.
Automatically adjust the sensitivity
Edge Sens Auto which detects the edge that
-- --
Adj. becomes the standard position of
width extract.
Manually adjust the sensitivity which
Man. Adj. detects the edge that becomes the 1 to 100 50
standard position of width extract.
Live The edge sensitivity can be adjusted
-- --
Image on the Live image of the target.
Adjusts a threshold (matching rate*) Lower
used in the OK/NG judgment. During limit:
threshold adjustment, the system 0-200 80
Limit Adjust
turns to the Test mode so that the (when upper limit is enabled) Upper
thresholds can be adjusted to the limit:
applicable value during an operation. 120
Sets an upper limit for the threshold. yyEnable
Upper Set when the OK/NG judgment is Activates the upper limit setting.
Enable
Limit desired when the target width is yyDisable
longer than the OK width. Deactivates the upper limit setting.
yy0-200
Upper Limit
Sets the upper and the lower limit

When the upper limit of the threshold of a threshold in a range within 0 to
is ON, select the threshold scale 200.
Scale in accordance with the range of yy0-999 0-200
the matching rate required for the Sets the upper and the lower limit
judgment. of a threshold in a range within 0 to
999.
* ‌The matching rate of 100 indicates that the width is completely matched. This becomes smaller with a
narrower width and larger with a wider width. If the matching rate exceeds the upper limit of the threshold
adjusting range, it will be saturated to the upper limit of the threshold adjusting range.

Setting the Width tool 5 Perform the mask setting as needed.

1 Tap the [Add Tool] button, [Advanced width detection target.

Tools] tab and [Width] button sequentially.
Displays the Width tool direction selection
The system returns to the main screen for Width
screen. tool settings.
2 Tap the [Horizontal Dir.]/[Vertical Dir.] 7 Perform the Edge Sensitivity Auto-Adjust
4
button. as needed.

“Edge Sens Auto Adj.” (Page 4-79)
8 Tap the [Limit Adjust] button.
The main screen for Width tool settings opens.
3 Tap the [Edit Window] button.


low-quality-target.
button (Page 4-7) to take an image
Once the tool window is tapped, you can of the target by inputting an internal trigger
proceed to step 4. temporarily. Imaging by inputting an internal
trigger finishes with the button.
Set the tool

window

10 Adjust the threshold for anomaly

Mask
4

2 Tap the [Add Mask] button.
range.
(Page 5-7)
(Page 5-17)
3 Set the position and size of a mask in
11 Set the upper limit as needed. accordance with the target.
12 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] Set mask shape
button.
tool settings.

yyOnly one mask can be set.
yyThe mask settings can be adjusted more
than once.
yy “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-18)

settings.


Edge Sens Auto Adj.
button.
Returns to the settings screen for “Edit window”. 1 Tap the [Edge Sens Auto Adj.] button.
Area not be
masked
Area masked 4

The edge sensitivity will be adjusted
automatically in accordance with the target.
The edges which become the options for width

detection are displayed in yellow color.
The distance between green edges is defined
as matching rate 100 of the Width tool.
If the distance between edges is changed,
tap the green edge and adjust its position. the
yellow edges can be selected as the target
edges to change.

tool settings.
“Edge Sens Man. Adj.” (Page 4-83)


Upper Limit zz
When upper limit is disabled
Tap the [Disable] button of the upper limit, and
1 Tap the [Upper Limit] button. tap the [OK] button.
Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by
checking the matching rate.
<Setting example>
4 the low-quality-target is lower than 40, set
between 40 and 90.
2 Set the upper limit.
zz
When changing the setting scale
A target is detected as OK if the matching rate
Tap [0-999] for the setting scale, and tap the [OK] is greater than the threshold, and detected
Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by threshold.
checking the matching rate. “Selecting a display method for tools”
(Page 5-7)
Judged OK when the matching rate is within a “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-17)
threshold range, and NG when it is outside the “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment”
range. (Page 5-17)
(Page 5-7)
(Page 5-17)

Extended functions for the Width tool
Default
value
yyNear Mast.
Detects the width which is close
to the one registered in the
master image, and extracts its
width. 4
Select a method to extract the Near
Width Extract yyOutside

target width. Mast.
Extracts width from outside in
tool window.
yyInside
Extracts width from center in tool
window.
Edge Sens Man.
detects the edge that becomes the 1 to 100 50
Adj.
standard position of width extract.
The edge sensitivity can be
Live Image adjusted on the Live image of the -- --
target.
which detects the edge that
Auto Adj. -- --
becomes the standard position of
width extract.
Setting scaling. yyEnable
Set when length is being used for Enable scaling.
Scaling Disable
anomaly detection instead of the yyDisable
matching rate. Disable scaling.
Scaling
When scaling is enabled, input the

0.05 to 9999
Display Value value after scaling in relation to 100.0
(Maximum input digits: 4)
matching rate (*) 100.
When scaling is enabled, copy the
Copy Setting -- --
scaling settings that have been set.
An arbitrary name such as the
name of a target can be set in tools.
Tool names can be checked on the Up to 8 characters in one byte
Tool name (None)
run screen. English characters can be set.
“ Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting”
(Page 5-1)
* ‌The matching rate of 100 indicates that the width is completely matched. This becomes smaller with a
narrower width and larger with a wider width.


Width Extract 3 Select a width mode.
the Width Tool.
2 Tap the [Width Extract] button.

4
yyWhen extracting the width which is close to

the one registered in master image, select
[Near Mast.].
Performance during
Master image an operation

Width to be measured
yyWhen extracting the width by searching
from the outside of tool window to its center,
select [Outside].
Performance during
yyWhen extracting the width by searching
from the center of tool window to its outside,
select [Inside].
Performance during

tool settings.


Edge Sens Man. Adj.
The edge intensity threshold indicates the ratio
1 Display the extended functions menu for of edge recognition taking the edge intensity
the Width Tool. maximum value (where the contrasting density
“ Display Method of Extended Functions is greatest) as 100%.
2 Tap the [Edge Sens Man. Adj.] button.

4

Edge detection
Projection direction
wave
+255
The Settings Navigator guide opens. 0

Tap the [OK] button. Edge intensity
wave Threshold for edge sensitivity (%)
3 Adjust the threshold value for edge +255 100%
sensitivity which extracts a width by 100% in-between
checking the edge intensity profile being 0 0%
(Illustration for edge
displayed. intensity wave)
Threshold for edge sensitivity 50% (2 edges to be detected)
Edge intensity
profile
50%

Sensitivity threshold
Sensitivity limit can be adjusted by touching 30%

the red line.
yyTap the [Live Image] button to adjust

threshold value for edge intensity with the
target Live image.
yyTap the [Auto Adj.] button to adjust the
threshold for edge sensitivity automatically in
accordance with the target.

tool settings.


Scaling 4 Set scaling.
zz
When the scaling settings are changed
1 Display the extended functions menu for Tap the [Edit] button.
the Width Tool.
2 Tap the [Scaling] button.

4
Enter a display value and tap the [OK] button.

The scaling display value can be input by 0.05 mm.

3 Tap the [Enable] button.
yyIf scaling is enabled, the display range and

the setting scale (x2 or x10) of the threshold
adjustment will be automatically adjusted.
yyIf the scaling is enabled, the threshold can
be input by 0.1 mm.

zz
When copying scaling settings
Tool Name
Tap the [Copy Setting] button.
the Width Tool.

4

Select the copy source tool.
Tap the [Copy] button.

Tap the [OK] button. 4 Tap the [OK] button.
Tap the [Close] button. The system returns to the main screen for Width
tool settings.
The tool name which has been set will be
If the scaling value of the copy source is
displayed.
changed, copy the scaling settings again.

tool settings.


Diameter tool
Setting items for the Diameter tool

Default
value
Edit Window An arbitrary size and position can be --
area of the target to be detected.
4 specified with stylus.
Mask Specifies a circular mask region.
Adds a circular mask region in the
An arbitrary size can be specified with

center of tool window.
Add Inside the mask region is excluded stylus. (None)
Mask from a diameter detection target. yyClear
Unmask the one that has been set.
yyHi Sens
Makes it easier to extract the diameter
of an image with low contrast and low
roundness. Used when a diameter you
Selects sensitivity for diameter wish to detect cannot be extracted.
Diameter Extract.
Mid
Exe. Sens extraction in accordance with the yyMidSens
Sens
target. Extracts the standard diameter.
yyLowSens
Reduces the extracted volume of a
diameter. Used when diameters more
than wanted in adjustment are extracted.
Can be changed when there are
Select
multi circles with the extracted -- --
Diam.
diameter.
Adjusts a threshold (matching rate*) Lower
used in the OK/NG judgment. During limit:
threshold adjustment, the system 0-200 90
Limit Adjust
turns to the Test mode so that the (when upper limit is enabled) Upper
thresholds can be adjusted to the limit:
applicable value during an operation. 110
Sets an upper limit for the yyEnable
threshold. Activates the upper limit setting.
Upper
Set if the OK/NG judgment is Enable
Limit yyDisable
desired when a target diameter is
longer than the OK diameter. Deactivates the upper limit setting.
Upper Limit
yy0-200
When the upper limit of the Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
threshold is ON, select the threshold in a range within 0 to 200.
Scale threshold scale in accordance with yy0-999 0-200
the range of the matching rate Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
required for the judgment. threshold in a range within 0 to 999.
* ‌The matching rate of 100 indicates that the diameter is completely matched. It is a value proportional to
the diameter taking 100 as the standard. If the matching rate exceeds the upper limit of the threshold
adjusting range, it will be saturated to the upper limit of the threshold adjusting range.

Setting the Diameter tool 6 Perform the diameter extract as needed.

“Diameter Extract.” (Page 4-89)
1 Tap the [Add Tool] button, [Advanced 7 Tap the [Limit Adjust] button.
Tools] tab and [Diameter] button
sequentially.
The main screen for Diameter tool settings
opens.
4


low-quality-target.
Once the tool window is tapped, you can button (“Chapter Main screen for the
proceed to step 3. Image Optimization” (Page 4-7)) to take an
image of the target by inputting an internal
3 Set the position and size tool window in trigger temporarily. Imaging by inputting an
accordance with a target. internal trigger finishes with the button.
Place the rectangular which indicates the center
of tool window inside the target. 9 Adjust the threshold for anomaly
Set the tool
window
Center of tool
window

Detects circles from the center of tool window
towards outside.
4 Perform the mask setting as needed. threshold range, and NG when it is outside the
range.
diameter detection target.
(Page 5-7)
5 Tap the [OK] button. “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment”
(Page 5-17)
The system returns to the main screen for
Diameter tool settings.

Mask
button.


settings.
3 Set the mask diameter in accordance with

the target.
Set mask shape
yyOnly one mask can be set.

yyThe mask settings can be adjusted more
than once.
yy “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-18)


Diameter Extract.
button.
Returns to the settings screen for “Edit window”. 1 Tap the [Diameter Extract.] button.
Area not be
masked
Area masked
4

2 Select an extraction sensitivity of a

diameter.
3 Tap the [◄]/[►] button of “Select Diam.”,

and select the circle with the diameter to
be extracted.
The circle for diameter extraction is displayed

in green color.
You can also tap the yellow candidate circle to
select the circle for diameter extraction.



Upper Limit zz
checking the matching rate.
<Setting example>
4 the low-quality-target is lower than 40, set
between 40 and 90.
zz
When changing the setting scale A target is detected as OK if the matching rate
Tap [0-999] for the setting scale, and tap the [OK] is greater than the threshold, and detected
Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by threshold.
checking the matching rate. “Selecting a display method for tools”
(Page 5-7)
Judged OK when the matching rate is within a “Editing the value with the slider” (Page 3-17)
threshold range, and NG when it is outside the “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment”
range. (Page 5-17)
(Page 5-7)
(Page 5-17)

Extended functions for the Diameter tool
Default
value
yySet Φ
Extracts the circle whose
diameter is close to the one
Select a method to extract the target

specified inside the tool window.
yyMax Specified
4
Diam Mode
diameter. Extracts the largest circle inside diameter

the tool window.
yyMin
Advanced Diam.Ext.
Extracts the smallest circle

inside the tool window.
yyMaster Dir.
Detects edges in same bright/
dark direction as master image.
yyBoth
Detects bright->dark and dark-
Bright/Dark Select a direction which detects a >bright edges. Master
Direction target edge. yyBright -> Dark Dir.
Detects edges change from
bright part to dark part.
yyDark -> Bright
dark part to bright part.
Scaling Disable
Scaling

0.05 to 9999
Copy Setting -- --
An arbitrary name such as the name
of a target can be set in tools. Tool
names can be checked on the run Up to 8 characters in one byte
Tool name (None)
screen. English characters can be set.
“‌ Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting”
(Page 5-1)
* ‌The matching rate of 100 indicates that the diameter is completely matched. It is a value proportional to
the diameter taking 100 as the standard.


Advanced Diam.Ext. 3 Select a diameter mode.
the Diameter Tool.
2 Tap the [Advanced Diam.Ext.] button.

4
yyIf the circle whose diameter is close to the

one specified inside the tool window, select
[Set Φ].
Performance during

Diameter to be detected
yyWhen extracting the largest circle inside the
tool window, select [Max].
Performance during
yyWhen extracting the smallest circle inside
the tool window, select [Min].
Performance during

4 Select bright/dark direction.

Scaling

Diameter tool.

4

Detects circles from the center of tool window
towards outside.
yyWhen detecting edges in same bright/dark

direction as master image, select [Master
Dir.]. 3 Tap the [Enable] button.
yyWhen detecting both bright->dark and dark-
>bright edges, select [Both].
yyWhen detecting edges change from bright
part to dark part, select [Bright -> Dark].
yyWhen detecting edges change from dark
part to bright part, select [Dark -> Bright].
Bright -> Dark Dark -> Bright

Tool window Tool window
be input by 0.1 mm.

4 Set scaling. zz
zz
When the scaling settings are changed Tap the [Copy Setting] button.
Tap the [Edit] button.
4


Tap the [Close] button.




Tool Name

Diameter tool.

4


displayed.


Edge tool
Setting items for Edge tool
Default
value
4 Edit Window
An arbitrary size, position, and angle --
Mask Specifies a rectangular mask region.

stylus.
Adds a rectangular mask region in yyClear
the tool window frame. Unmask the one that has been set.
Add Area inside the mask region is yyUndo (None)
Mask excluded from an edge detection The previous operation can be
target. cancelled.
yySetting counts
Adding the mask can be set to up to
30 times.
Edge Sens Auto Automatically adjust the sensitivity
-- --
Adj. which detects the edge.
Manually adjust the sensitivity
Man. Adj. 1 to 100 50
which detects the edge.
Live
adjusted on the Live image of the -- --
Image
target.

Default
value
rate*1) used in the OK/NG
0-2
Limit Adjust adjustment, the system turns to the *2
(When setting scale is 0 to 2)
Test mode so that the thresholds
can be adjusted to the applicable
value during an operation. 4
Sets an upper limit for the

threshold. yyEnable
Upper Sets if the OK/NG judgment is Activates the upper limit setting.
Enable
Limit desired when the number of target yyDisable
edges is larger than that of the OK Deactivates the upper limit setting.
ones.
yy0-2
Sets the upper and the lower limit of
a threshold in a range within 0 to 2.
Upper Limit
yy0-5
When the upper limit of the a threshold in a range within 0 to 5.
threshold is ON, select the yy0-10
Scale threshold scale in accordance with Sets the upper and the lower limit of *2
the range of the matching rate a threshold in a range within 0 to 10.
required for the judgment. yy0-20
yy0-50
*1 The matching rate is the number of edges.
*2 Automatically adjust according to the number of edges on the registered master image.

Setting the Edge tool 4 Set the position, size, and angle of tool
1 Tap the [Add Tool] button, [Advanced

Tools] tab and [Edge] button sequentially. Set the tool
window
Displays the Edge tool direction selection
screen.
4 2 Tap the [Horizontal Dir.]/[Vertical Dir.]

button.

edge detection target.

For [Horizontal Dir.], the edges are detected The system returns to the main screen for the
from the left to the right side of the the tool Edge tool settings.
window; for [Vertical Dir.], the edges are
detected from the top to the bottom. 7 Perform the Edge Sensitivity Auto-Adjust
as needed.
The main screen for Edge tool settings opens. “Edge Sens Auto Adj.” (Page 4-100)
3 Tap the [Edit Window] button. 8 Tap the [Limit Adjust] button.

proceed to step 4. 9 Take an image of a high-quality-target and
low-quality-target.
button (“Chapter Main screen for the
Image Optimization” (Page 4-7)) to take an
image of the target by inputting an internal
trigger temporarily. Imaging by inputting an
internal trigger finishes with the button.

10 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection Mask

by checking the number of edges.
<Setting example> 1 Tap the [Mask] button.
If the number of high-quality-target edges is 8,
and if the number of low-quality-target edges is
other than 8, set it to 8.

Number of edges Threshold (upper limit)
Judged OK when the number of edges is

within a threshold range, and NG when it is
outside the range.
(Page 5-7)
3 Set the position and size of a mask in
(Page 5-17)
Set mask shape


button.
Edge tool settings.
button.
region.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 as needed and set the

mask region.

settings.


Edge Sens Auto Adj.
button.
1 Tap the [Edge Sens Auto Adj.] button.
Area not be
masked
Area masked
4
Returns to the settings screen for “Edit window”.


Edge tool settings.
“ Edge Sens Man. Adj.” (Page 4-103)


Upper Limit zz
checking the number of edges.

Number of edges Threshold

bigger than the threshold value, and NG when
it is smaller.
(Page 5-7)
zz
When changing the setting scale “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment”
Select the setting scale and tap the [OK] button. (Page 5-17)
checking the number of edges.

within a threshold range, and NG when it is
outside the range.
(Page 5-7)
(Page 5-17)

Extended functions of the Edge tool
Default
value
yyBoth
Detects bright->dark and
dark->bright edges.
4 Edge Detection
Select bright/dark direction which detects
yyBright -> Dark
Detects edges change from Both
a target edge.
yyDark -> Bright

Edge Sens Man. Manually adjust the sensitivity which
1 to 100 50
Adj. detects the edge.
The edge sensitivity can be adjusted on
Live Image -- --
the Live image of the target.
Automatically adjust the sensitivity which
Auto Adj. -- --
detects the edge.
An arbitrary name such as the name of
a target can be set in tools. Tool names
Up to 8 characters in one byte
Tool name can be checked on the run screen. (None)
English characters can be set.
“‌ Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page
5-1)


Edge Detection 4 Tap the [OK] button.
1 Display the extended functions menu of Edge tool settings.
the Edge tool.

Edge Sens Man. Adj.
2 Tap the [Edge Detection] button. 1 Display the extended functions menu of
the Edge tool.
4



3 Adjust the threshold value for edge
sensitivity which extracts edges by
checking the edge intensity profile being
displayed.
Edge intensity
profile
For [Horizontal Dir.], the edges are detected

from the left to the right side of the the tool
window; for [Vertical Dir.], the edges are
detected from the top to the bottom.
yyWhen detecting both bright -> dark and dark Sensitivity limit can be adjusted by touching
-> bright edges, select [Both]. the red line.
yyWhen detecting edges change from dark
part to bright part, select [Dark -> Bright].


Tool Name
of edge recognition taking the edge intensity 1 Display the extended functions menu of
maximum value (where the contrasting density the Edge tool.
is greatest) as 100%. “ Display Method of Extended Functions

4
Edge detection
wave
+255
Edge intensity
0
+255 100%
100% in-between
0 0%
intensity wave)
50% “Inputting characters” (Page 3-19)

Edge tool settings.
displayed.
30%

target Live image.
accordance with the target. If the display language (Page 6-62) is changed,
Edge tool settings.

Pitch tool
Setting items for the Pitch tool
Default
value
4
Edit Window An arbitrary size, position, and angle --

Mask Specifies a rectangular mask region.
stylus.
Adds a rectangular mask region in yyClear
the tool window frame. Unmask the one that has been set.
Add Area inside the mask region is yyUndo (None)
Mask excluded from a pitch detection The previous operation can be
target. cancelled.
yySetting counts
Adding the mask can be set to up to
30 times.
Edge Sens Auto which detects the edge that
-- --
Adj. becomes the standard position for
pitch extraction.
which detects the edge that
Man. Adj. 1 to 100 50
becomes the standard position for
pitch extraction.
Live
adjusted on the Live image of the -- --
Image
target.
rate*) used in the OK/NG Lower
judgment. During threshold limit:
adjustment, the system turns 80
Limit Adjust 0-200
to the Test mode so that the Upper
thresholds can be adjusted to limit:
the applicable value during an 120
operation.
yy0-200
Upper Limit
Select a scale of the threshold a threshold in a range within 0 to 200.

in accordance with the range
Scale yy0-999 0-200
of matching rate required for
judgment. Sets the upper and the lower limit of
* ‌The matching rate of 100 indicates that the average value of all pitches is completely matched. The value
which deviates the most from average value among all pitches becomes the matching rate. When the
number of pitches is different from the number for master image, the matching rate is 0.

Setting the Pitch tool 5 Perform the mask setting as needed.

Inside the mask region is excluded from a pitch
1 Tap the [Add Tool] button, [Advanced detection target.

Tools] tab and [Pitch] button sequentially.
Displays the Pitch tool direction selection
The system returns to the main screen for Pitch
screen. tool settings.
4 2 Tap the [Horizontal Dir.]/[Vertical Dir.] 7 Perform the Edge Sensitivity Auto-Adjust
button. as needed.
8 Tap the [Limit Adjust] button.
The main screen for Pitch tool settings opens.


low-quality-target.
Once the tool window is tapped, you can of the target by inputting an internal trigger
proceed to step 4. temporarily. Imaging by inputting an internal
Set the tool

window


Mask
Current number of pitches/ 1 Tap the [Mask] button.
number of registered pitches in master image
Threshold
(lower limit)
Threshold
(upper limit) 4

Matching rate Status gauge 2 Tap the [Add Mask] button.
MAX matching rate (Upper)
MIN matching rate (Lower)

range.
(Page 5-7)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” 3 Set the position and size of a mask in
(Page 5-17) accordance with the target.

Set mask shape
button.
tool settings.
13 Tap the [OK] button. “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-18)

button.
region.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 as needed and set the

mask region.
settings.


Edge Sens Auto Adj.
button.
Area not be
masked
Area masked
4
Returns to the settings screen for “Edit window”.


tool settings.


Upper Limit

2 Change the setting scale and tap the [OK]
button.


range.
(Page 5-7)
(Page 5-17)

Extended functions of the Pitch tool
Default
value
yyBright
Extracts pitches between bright
Bright/Dark Select a method to extract the target regions.
Bright
4 Mode pitch. yyDark
Extracts pitches between dark
regions.
Pitch Extract.
yyPin Pitch
Measures the center pitch
Select a measuring method for the between pins.
Meas. Mode Pin Pitch
pitch extracted from a target.
yyPin Width
Measure the width of each pin.
yyNarrowON
Narrow Pitch Enables the narrow pitch mode. Narrow
Set when pitch width is narrow.
Mode yyNarrowOFF OFF
Disables the narrow pitch mode.
Edge Sens Man.
detects the edge that becomes the 1 to 100 50
Adj.
standard position for pitch extraction.
The edge sensitivity can be adjusted
Live Image -- --
on the Live image of the target.
which detects the edge that becomes
Auto Adj. -- --
the standard position for pitch
extraction.
Scaling Disable
Scaling

0.05 to 9999
Copy Setting -- --
An arbitrary name such as the name of
a target can be set in tools. Tool names
Up to 8 characters in one byte
Tool name can be checked on the run screen. (None)
English characters can be set.
“‌ Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting”
(Page 5-1)
* ‌The matching rate of 100 indicates that the average value of all pitches is completely matched. The value
which deviates the most from average value among all pitches becomes the matching rate. When the
number of pitches is different from the number for master image, the matching rate is 0.


Pitch Extract. 4 Select a measurement mode.
the Pitch Tool.
2 Tap the [Pitch Extract.] button.

4

yyExample of [Pin Pitch]
Number of pitches 2
The Settings Navigator guide opens. yyExample of [Pin Width]

3 Select Bright/Dark mode. Number of pitches 3
5 Set the narrow pitch mode as needed.
yyWhen extracting pitches between bright

regions, select [Bright].
Number of pitches 1
If [NarrowON] is selected, pitches can be
extracted even when the pitch width is narrow.
yyWhen extracting pitches between dark
regions, select [Dark]. 6 Tap the [OK] button.
tool settings.
Number of pitches 2


Edge Sens Man. Adj.
1 Display the extended functions menu for of edge recognition taking the edge intensity
the Pitch Tool. maximum value (where the contrasting density
“ Display Method of Extended Functions is greatest) as 100%.

4
Edge detection
wave
+255
3 Adjust the threshold value for edge Edge intensity

0
sensitivity which extracts pitches by wave Threshold for edge sensitivity (%)
checking the edge intensity profile being +255 100%
displayed. 100% in-between
0 0%
intensity wave)
Edge intensity
profile
50%

Sensitivity limit can be adjusted by touching
the red line.
30%

target Live image.

tool settings.


Scaling 4 Set scaling.
zz
When the scaling settings are changed
1 Display the extended functions menu for Tap the [Edit] button.
the Pitch Tool.

4


3 Tap the [Enable] button.

be input by 0.1 mm.

zz
Tool Name
Tap the [Copy Setting] button.
the Pitch Tool.

4

Tap the [OK] button. 4 Tap the [OK] button.
Tap the [Close] button. The system returns to the main screen for Pitch
tool settings.
5 Tap the [OK] button. The tool name which has been set will be
The confirmation dialog appears. displayed.
tool settings.



OCR Tool
Setting items for the OCR tool
The characters that can be recognized by the OCR tool are as follows.
Numbers 0123456789
Letters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ (capital letters only) 4
Symbols . / - : ( ) # * (8 symbols)

Default
value
Add Mask yy¨ Rect
Adds a rectangular/circular
Specifies a rectangular mask
mask region in the tool
region or a mask cutting region.
window frame. Area inside the
Mask Shape An arbitrary size, position, and
mask region is excluded from
angle can be specified with stylus.
Edit Window
an OCR examination target.

yy¡ Circle
Mask Specifies a circular mask Rect
Cut Mask Adds a rectangular/circular region or a mask cutting region.
cutting region in the mask region. An arbitrary size and position
Inside the mask cutting can be specified with stylus.
Clip Shape region, the mask is disabled yySetting counts
and it becomes the target of Adding or cutting the mask
the OCR extraction. can be set up to 20 times.
Character Reads the printed text. -- --
yyEnable
Letter Select whether to read Reads letters.
Enable
reading letters. yyDisable
Does not read letters.
yyEnable
Char. Number Select whether to read Reads numbers.
Enable
settings reading numbers. yyDisable
Does not read numbers.
Reading settings
yyEnable
Symbol Select whether to read Reads symbols.
Enable
reading symbols. yyDisable
Does not read symbols.
Reads the printed text and
Date extracts the read part as the -- --
date.
yyYYMMDD
yyDDMMYY
Date Date Selects the date format for
yyMMDDYY YYMMDD
settings format the object to be read.
yyYYMM
yyMMYY

Default
value
When the Reading Settings are
applied, up to 16 alphanumeric
Master text Edits the master text. -
Status characters can be set based on
conditions the read master text.
(When the yyEnable
Reading Performs OK/NG judgment
4 Settings
are set to Judge char. num.
Judges whether the number
of letters on the object
on the number of letters.
yyDisable Disable
[Character].) only matches the number of
Performs OK/NG judgment on

letters in the master text.
whether the character string is the
same as that of the master text.
When the Reading Settings are
applied, up to 16 alphanumeric
Master Date Edits the master date. -
characters can be set based
on the read master date.
yyEnable
Enable date and time
Sets the master date to the
synchronization.
Calendar Sync current date and time on the Disable
yyDisable
monitor.
Disable date and time
synchronization.
Status Sets the number of days for

conditions Offset the master date to be offset
0 to 9999 0
(When the (Day) against the current date and
Reading time on the monitor.
Settings Sets the time error for both dates
are set to Allowable
to be judged as OK both before 0 to 99 0
[Date].) error (min)
and after the date changes.
Sync settings
yyON
0 in 10s Sets a leading zero when
Sets a leading zero.
pos of mm/ the month and/or day in the OFF
yyOFF
dd master date is a single digit.
Does not set a leading zero.
yyEnable
Enables the output of a
Turns the error output
Sync error synchronization error.
function ON when date and Enable
output yyDisable
time synchronization fails.
Disables the output of a
synchronization error.
Switches to Test Run mode to
check of the OK/NG judgment
status. Fixes the threshold - -
(matching rate) used in the OK/
NG judgment.
Test run Adjusts the threshold
(matching rate) used in the
OK/NG judgment when
1 to 100 50
shade contrast function for
character recognition is set
to [Enable].

Setting the OCR tool 7 Set the status conditions as necessary.

“Setting the status conditions” (Page 4-121)
1 Tap the [Add Tool] button > [Extra 2] tab > 8 Tap the [Test run] button.
[OCR] button.
The main settings screen for the OCR tool opens.
2 Tap the [Edit Window] button. 4

The sensor changes to Test mode.

proceed to step 3.
3 Set the position, size, and angle of the tool

window in accordance with the target text.
If the character string to be judged matches
Select the target text with the tool window. the master text, it is judged to be OK and NG
if it does not.
Set the tool

window 9 Tap the [OK] button.
OCR tool settings.

settings.

The area inside of the mask region is excluded
from character recognition.

The character string that you selected to be the
master is read and the system returns to the
main screen for the OCR tool settings.
6 Configure the reading settings.

“Reading settings” (Page 4-119)


Mask 5 Set the position, size, and angle of the mask
shape in accordance with the target text.
1 Tap the [Mask] button
Set the mask

shape
4
2 Tap the [Add Mask] button. “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-18)

button.
region.
7 Tap the [Cut Mask] button to cut a mask region.
8 Tap the [Cut Shape] button.

button.
9 Select the cut shape and tap the [OK]

button.

10 Set the position, size, and angle of the cut

Reading settings
shape in accordance with the target text.
zz
To read text
Set cut shape 1 Tap the [Reading Settings] button.

11 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] 2 Check that the reading target is set to
[Character] and tap the [Char. settings]
button.
button.
Area to be
masked
Area not to be
masked

region. 3 Set whether to read letters, numbers, and/
or symbols.
12 Repeat steps 2 to 11 as needed to set the
mask region.

button.

button.
The reading settings screen reappears.

5 Tap the [OK] button and read the character 3 Set the date format for the reading target.
string that you want to set as the master
text.
4
Set the date format to the same as that of the

The character string that you selected to be the reading target.
master is read and the system returns to the Dates that differ from the set date format will
main screen for the OCR tool settings. not be read.
zz
To read the date 4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
button.
1 Tap the [Reading Settings] button. The reading settings screen reappears.
5 Tap the [OK] button and read the date that

you want to set as the master text.
2 Tap [Date].
The date that you selected to be the master is
read and the system returns to the main screen
for the OCR tool settings.
Check that the reading target is set to [Date]

and tap the [Date settings] button.


Setting the status conditions 3 Set [Judging number of characters only] if
necessary.
zz
To read text
If you want to judge if the number of characters
1 Tap [Status Conditions]. matches the master text, set [Judge char. num.
only] to [Enable].

2 Edit [Master text] if necessary. 4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
button.
OCR tool settings.
Configure this setting if you want to judge

text other than the text read with [Master
Registration].
You can set arbitrary characters (all letters,
numbers, and symbols) not included in the
specified letters, numbers, and symbols.
yy?:Judges all letters, numbers, and symbols
as OK.
yy$:Judges all letters as OK.
yy%:Judges all numbers as OK.
yy@:Judges all symbols as OK.
[Arbitrary characters] usage example

yyMaster text: AB$DE
ABCDE: OK
ABFDE: OK
AB5DE: NG
yyMaster text: AB?DE
ABCDE: OK
ABFDE: OK
AB5DE: OK

zz
To read the date 3 Set [Calendar sync] as necessary.
1 Tap [Status Conditions]. The master date will synchronize with the
monitor date and time.
Set this item to link the reading target date to
the date and time.
4 Enable this function to add sensor date

information.
If this setting is disabled, the date and time will
not be synchronized, even if the date and time

2 Edit the master date if necessary. synchronization is set.
“Adding Date and Time information to
the sensor(function for adding sensor date
information)” (Page 6-20)
Select [Enable] for Calendar sync, and tap the
[Setting] button for [Sync settings].
Configure this setting if you want to change

the master date for the master image.
Even if you change the date, the master date
is updated without having to read the object
again. Set the [Sync settings] and tap the [OK] button.
Make sure that the format of the edited master
date is the same as [Date format] set in
[Reading settings].
If the master date format order for the [Reading
Settings] date format could not be interpreted,
the display format will be unknown and the
master date will not be set correctly.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-19) [Offset (Date)]

Offsets the master date with the desired number
of days from the current date on the monitor.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the screen to
set the number of days opens.
Set the desired number of days and tap the [OK]
button.

[Allowable error (min)] [0 in 10s pos of mm/dd]

Sets the time error (allowable error) in minutes Sets whether to add [0] when the month and/or
for both dates to be judged as OK both before day in the target date is a single digit.
and after the date changes. Sets the date in accordance with the date
Allowable error (min) format of the target date.
[Sync error output]
To output an error if date and time
synchronization fails, tap the [Enable] button.
4
Day before Master Date Day after When this item is set to [Enable], the following

Master Date Master Date occurs if date and time synchronization fails.
Current master date set using yyThe master date on the top left of the screen
calendar sync changes to [Sync error].
Range judged as OK yyThe error output function turns ON.
If the current master date is set within the yyThe indicator light of the sensor blinks in red.
yyThe error condition will continue until the
[Allowable error (min)] range by calendar
error is cleared.
synchronization, the day before or after the
master date can be included in the range to be
judged as OK. 4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
Set this item if the date may change after the button.
date is printed and before it is checked. The system returns to the main screen for the
OCR tool settings.
Example with the allowable error set to 5
minutes
Allowable error (5 mins)
C A
B
C A
23:55 0:05 23:55 0:05
December 14 December 15 December 16
(A) If the current master date is between 0:00
and 0:05 using calendar synchronization,
the day before and the day of the master
date will be judged as OK.
(B) If the current master date is between 0:06
only the day of the master date will be
judged as OK.
(C) If the current master date is between 23:55
the day of the master date and the next
day will be judged as OK.

Extended functions for the OCR tool
Default
value
yyEnable
Evaluates the darkness of the text and
Shade Enables [Shade Contrast].
date read. If the ink for text and date is Disable
Contrast yyDisable
light, the matching rate will decrease.
4 Disables [Shade Contrast].
yyHigh Speed
Judges the text and date at
The detection mode of the OCR tool high speed. High

OCR Algorithm
can be selected. yyHigh Accuracy Speed
Judges the text and date
with high accuracy.
An arbitrary name such as name of a
Up to eight one-byte
target can be set to tools. Tool names
Tool name alphanumeric characters can (None)
can be checked on the run screen.
be set.
“‌ 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)

Setting shade contrast
1 Display the extended functions menu for 3 Tap the [Enable] button.
the OCR tool.
(Page 4-144)
2 Tap the [Shade Contrast] button.
If you enable shade contrast, you can adjust

the threshold of anomaly detection (matching
rate) on the test check screen.
“Test run (when shade contrast is set to
[Enable])” (Page 4-125)

OCR tool settings.

Test run (when shade contrast is set to [Enable])

zz Setting the OCR algorithm
1 Tap [Test run]. 1 Display the extended functions menu for
the OCR tool.
(Page 4-144)
2 Tap the [OCR Algorithm] button.

4

2 High-quality text and date that are clearly

printed and low-quality text and date that
are not clearly printed are captured.
[Yes], input the external trigger. 3 Select the type of OCR algorithm (High
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the Speed/High Accuracy).
of the target by inputting an internal trigger
temporarily. Imaging by inputting an internal

<Setting example>
If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is
higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the low-
quality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to
65, the value intermediate between 40 and 90. yyIf the reading target text or date cannot be
correctly recognized, select [High Accuracy].
yySelect [High Speed] to shorten the
Master text/
Text read
processing time.

button.
The character string that you selected to be the
master is read and the system returns to the
Match Threshold main screen for the OCR tool settings.

threshold range, and NG when it is outside the range.

OCR tool settings.

Tool Name

the OCR tool.
(Page 4-144)

4
3 Input an arbitrary character.

button.
OCR tool settings.
displayed.


Hi-Sp.Adj tool
Setting items for the Hi-Sp.Adj tool
Default
value
Specifies with the rectangular
Edit Window
Specifies the window to specify
an area of the target to be
window.
-- 4
An arbitrary size and position
detected.

yyScan Direction: Left
Detects edges from the left
side of window to the right side.
yyScan Direction: Right
Detects edges from the right
side of window to the left side. Scan
Select a direction which detects a
Scan Direction Direction:
target edge. yyScan Direction: Top Left
(1-Ax. Adj tool)
Detects edges from the top of

window to the bottom.
yyScan Direction: Bottom
Detects edges from the bottom
of window to the top.
-- --
Man. Adj. 1 to 100 50
target.
Changes to the Test mode and
Test check that the position adjustment -- --
has been performed.

Default
value
window.
Edit Window an area of the target to be --
detected.
yyScan Direction: Left
Set Axis: X (2-Ax. Adj tool)
4 Select a direction which detects a

Detects edges from the left
side of window to the right side.
Scan
target edge. yyScan Direction: Right
Left
Detects edges from the right
side of window to the left side.
-- --
Man. Adj. 1 to 100 50
target.
window.
Edit Window an area of the target to be --
detected.
yyScan Direction: Top
Set Axis: Y (2-Ax. Adj tool)
Detects edges from the top of

Scan
Select a direction which detects a window to the bottom.
target edge. yyScan Direction: Bottom
Top
Detects edges from the bottom
of window to the top.
-- --
Man. Adj. 1 to 100 50
target.
Common (2-Ax. Adj tool) yyEnable
Selects when performing the
Set Angle Enables the angle correction.
position correction of rotating Disable
yyDisable
Angle Correction direction. Disables the angle correction.
Changes to the Test mode and
Test check that the position adjustment -- --
has been performed.

Setting the Hi-Sp.Adj tool 3 Set the tool window.

zz
1-Ax. Adj tool
1 Tap the [Add Tool] button, [Advanced Tap the [Edit Window] button.
Tools] tab and [Hi-Sp.Adj] button
sequentially.
2 Display the correction direction selection 4

screen of the Hi-Sp.Adj tool.
Tap the [1-Ax. Adj]/[2-Ax. Adj] button.

proceed to the following steps.
Set the position and size of tool window in

accordance with a target.
zz
1-Ax. Adj tool Set the tool
window
Displays the direction selection screen of the
1-Ax. Adj tool.
Tap the [Horizontal Dir.]/[Vertical Dir.] button.
The main screen for the Hi-Sp.Adj tool settings

opens.

Select a scan direction as needed. zz

2-Ax. Adj tool
Proceed to the following steps for both X axis

and Y axis.
Tap the [Set Axis: X] or [Set Axis: Y].button, and
tap the [Edit window] button.
4
yy“Scan Direction: Left”: Detects edges from

the left side of window to the right side.
Tool window Once the tool window is tapped, you can

yy“Scan Direction: Right”: Detects edges from proceed to the following steps.
the right side of window to the left side.
Set the position and size of tool window in
accordance with a target.
Set the tool
window
Tool window
yy“Scan Direction: Top”: Detects edges from
the top of window to the bottom.
Tool window
yy“Scan Direction: Bottom”: Detects edges “Editing the tool window” (Page 3-18)
from the bottom of window to the top.
Tool window

Hi-Sp.Adj tool settings.

Select a scan direction as needed. 4 Perform the Edge Sensitivity Auto-Adjust

as needed.
5 For 2-Ax. Adj tool, set the angle

correction.
Tap the [Common] button, then.the [Set Angle]
button.
4

yy“Scan Direction: Left”: Detects edges from
the left side of window to the right side.
Tool window Set the angle correction.

yy“Scan Direction: Right”: Detects edges from
the right side of window to the left side.
Tool window
yy“Scan Direction: Top”: Detects edges from
the top of window to the bottom.
yyWhen angle correction (± 30°) is performed,

select [Enable].
yyWhen angle correction is not performed,
Tool window select [Disable].
yy“Scan Direction: Bottom”: Detects edges
from the bottom of window to the top. Tap the [OK] button.
Tool window


6 Perform a test. zz
2-Ax. Adj tool
zz
1-Ax. Adj tool Tap the [Common] button, then.the [Test] button.
Tap the [Test] button.
4

The sensor turns to Test mode. Position correction is performed, and make sure
that an edge has been detected.
Position correction is performed, and make sure
that an edge has been detected.

settings.


Edge Sens Auto Adj.

For 2-Ax. Adj tool, first select an axis to set.



Extended functions for the Hi-Sp.Adj tool
Default
value
yyMaster Dir.
4 yyBoth
Detects bright -> dark and dark
Select bright/dark direction which -> bright edges. Master
Edge Detect
detects a target edge. yyBright -> Dark Dir.
(1-Ax. Adj tool)

yyDark -> Bright
Edge Sens Manually adjust the sensitivity which
1 to 100 50
Man. Adj. detects the edge.
Live Image -- --
Auto Adj. -- --

Default
value
yyMaster Dir.
yyBoth
Edge Detect
Select bright/dark direction which -> bright edges. Master 4
Set Axis: X (2-Ax. Adj tool)


yyDark -> Bright
1 to 100 50

Live Image -- --

Auto Adj. -- --
yyMaster Dir.
yyBoth
Select bright/dark direction which -> bright edges. Master
Set Axis: Y (2-Ax. Adj tool)
Edge Detect
yyDark -> Bright
1 to 100 50
Live Image -- --
Auto Adj. -- --


Edge Detect 4 Tap the [OK] button.
1 Display the extended functions menu for Hi-Sp.Adj tool settings.
the Hi-Sp.Adj tool.

Edge Sens Man. Adj.
2 Tap the [Edge Detect] button. 1 Display the extended functions menu for
the Hi-Sp.Adj tool.
4 “ Display Method of Extended Functions
For 2-Ax. Adj tool, first select an axis to set. Menus” (Page 4-144)

For 2-Ax. Adj tool, first select an axis to set.


3 Adjust the threshold value for edge
sensitivity which extracts edges by
checking the edge intensity profile being
displayed.
Edge intensity
profile
yyWhen detecting edges in same bright/dark

direction as master image, select [Master
Dir.].
yyWhen detecting both bright -> dark and dark
-> bright edges, select [Both]. Sensitivity threshold
yyWhen detecting edges change from dark Sensitivity limit can be adjusted by touching
part to bright part, select [Dark -> Bright]. the red line.


of edge recognition taking the edge intensity
maximum value (where the contrasting density
is greatest) as 100%.

Edge detection
wave
+255
0
Edge intensity
+255 100%
100% in-between
0 0%
intensity wave)
50%
30%

target Live image.


4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)
(Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)
Set the output items to be assigned to the output (5) Extended functions display button
line. Displays the extended functions menu for the
“‌ Connecting the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Output Assignment.
(IV-HG series)” (Page 2-17) “Display Method of Extended Functions
“‌ Connecting the Vision Sensor (IV‑H series)” Menus” (Page 4-144)
(Page 2-22)
“‌ Chapter 7 Controlling with Input/Output Line” Setting range of the Output
(Page 7-1) Assignment
4
Main screen for the Output Setting
Description
Assignment
range
Do not output.
zz
When the IV-HG series is used OFF
Output function will be constantly OFF.
(1) When the total status result of the
tools which have been set was OK,
the output function turns ON.
Total Status
(2) The condition of the total status can
be selected from [All Tools OK] /
[Any Tool OK] / [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
(3) Tot. When the total status result was
(4)
StatusNG NG, the output function turns ON.
When the sensor is running with no
(5) RUN system error occurred, the output
zz
When the IV-H series is used function turns ON.
(1) The output function turns ON when
the system is in a state that cannot
input additional trigger; such as
BUSY
during imaging, judging processing,
(2) switching programs, and registering
external master images.
The output function turns ON
(3) when an error has occurred; such
(4) as system error, memory readout
Error
error for startup, external master
(5) registration error, trigger error (when
(1) [Back] button the trigger settings are enabled).
Returns to the Tool settings screen. When position adjustment processing
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Pos. Adj. is finished normally, the output function
Method for Targets)” (Page 4-30) turns ON.
When the status result of specified
(2) Output assignment button
tool is OK, the output function turns
Assigns the output item to each output line. Tool 01 to 16
ON. Status results can be output for
(3) [ON]/[OFF] button for the trigger error output each tool.
Select whether to enable/disable the output When the status result of specified logic
Logic 1 to 4
when the trigger error occurred. is OK, the output function turns ON.
“Error Messages” (Page A-10)
(4) [Complete] button
Finishes the Settings Navigator.
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5)


Default value Setting the Output Assignment
OUT1 :Total Status (N.O.)
OUT2
OUT3
:BUSY (N.O.)
:Error (N.C.) 1 Tap the item name of output line to
OUT4 :OFF perform output assignment and select the
OUT5* :OFF output item.
OUT6* :OFF
OUT7* :OFF
OUT8* :OFF
Trigger Error : Off 4
* When the IV-HG series sensor is used.

yyN.O./N.C. can be changed.
yyThe input cable assignment can be changed.
2 Finish the Settings Navigator.
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5)

Extended functions for the Output Assignment
Extended functions items for the Output Assignment
Default
value
yyUnused
4 The selected items are not used in
a logical formula.
Assigns the logical operation yyUsed
results of each detection tool to When the status results of the

Logic Settings the output function. selected items were OK, the total Unused
Up to 4 items, Logic 1 to 4, can status output function turns ON.
be defined. yyUsed (Inverse)
When the status results of the
selected items were NG, the total
status output function turns ON.
yyAND
Calculates the logical multiply
Selects the logical operation (AND) of all selected items.
Logic AND
method of logics. yyOR
Calculates the logical sum (OR) of
all selected items.
yyAll Tools OK
When all of the status results of the
detection tools was OK, the total
status output function turns ON.
Selects a condition for the total yyAny Tools OK
Total Status status result. The total status When any of the status results of
All Tools OK
Conditions result is displayed in accordance the detection tools was OK, the total
with the selected condition. status output function turns ON.
yyLogic 1 to 4
When the status result of the set
logic was OK, the total status
output function turns ON.


Logic Settings 5 Select items to be integrated into the logic.
the Output Assignment.
“Display Method of Extended Functions
2 Tap the [Logic Settings] button.

4

Red checks are displayed at the items which
"Used" is selected.
Blue checks are displayed at the items which
"Used (Inverst)" is selected.
3 Tap the number which the logic judgement The status result of the logic is calculated from
condition is to be defined. OK/NG of all of the items which [Used] or [Used
(Inverse)] has been set.
zz
Logic : AND
Tool A
Tool B Logic 1 to 4
Tool C
(Inverse)
Image of logic output when the Logic

is [AND]
When an undefined detection tool has been Tool A Tool B Tool C Logic
defined to a logic, [An undefined tool is selected.]
is displayed on the right side of the logic number. OK OK OK NG
NG OK OK NG
4 Select the logical operation method of the logic. OK NG OK NG
NG NG OK NG
OK OK NG OK
NG OK NG NG
OK NG NG NG
NG NG NG NG
yyWhen [AND] has been selected, the logic

output is the logical multiply (AND) of the
status results of each selected item.
yyWhen [OR] has been selected, the logic
output is the logical sum (OR) of the status
results of each selected item.

zz
Logic : OR 6 When the setting is completed, tap the
[OK] button.
Tool A
The system returns to the Logic Settings screen.
Tool B Logic 1 to 4
Tool C
(Inverse)
7 Tap the [Close] button.
Image of logic output when the Logic Outline tool settings.
is [OR]
4 Tool A Tool B Tool C Logic

OK OK OK OK
NG OK OK OK
OK NG OK OK
NG NG OK NG
OK OK NG OK
NG OK NG OK
OK NG NG OK
NG NG NG OK
yySelect either [Unused]/[Used]/[Used

(Inverse)] for each item (Position Adjustment/
Tool 01 to Tool 16/Logic 1 to Logic 4).
yyWhen the status results of the [Used] items
were OK, the status output function for items
in the logic turns ON.
yyWhen the status results of the [Used
(Inverse)] items were NG, the status output
function for items in the logic turns ON.
yyTo define a logic which has been set to
another logic, use the logic number which
is greater than the logic number which has
been set.
For example, use either of Logic 2 to Logic 4
in case of defining Logic 1 to another logic.
When the program number has been changed

and you went to [Run] from [Program] after
the power ON, the judgement is not done if no
trigger input. The judgement output of each
tool is OFF.


Total Status Conditions zz
Any Tools OK
When any of the detection tools was OK, the
1 Display the extended functions menu for total status output function turns ON.
the Output Assignment. OK
“Display Method of Extended Functions Tool A
NG
OK
Tool B
2 Tap the [Total Status Conditions] button. NG
Total OK
Status NG
4

Image of total status output when the total
status condition is [Any Tools OK]
For [Any Tools OK], the status result of the

position adjustment is not included in the total
status conditions.
3 Select a total status condition.
zz
Logic 1 to 4
When the status result of the defined logic was
OK, the total status output function turns ON.
Logic OK
1 to 4 NG
Total OK
Status NG
The total status result is displayed in Image of total status output when the total
status condition is [Logic 1 to 4]
accordance with the selected condition.
zz
All Tools OK
When all of the detection tools were OK, the yyWhen the position adjustment failed, the
total status output function turns ON. status result of each tool is NG.
OK yyIf the Area/Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/
Tool A
NG Pitch/OCR tool window is protruded from
the imaging area when position adjustment
OK
Tool B succeeded, the tool cannot be judged and
NG
the status result is NG.
Total OK
Status NG
4 When the setting is completed, tap the
Image of total status output when the total [OK] button.
status condition is [All Tools OK] The system returns to the main screen for the

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus
Display Method of Extended Functions Menus
In each setting for Settings Navigator, the extended

functions menu will be displayed by tapping the < >
extended functions display button at the lower left on
the screen.
This section explains how to display the extended
functions menu using an example of the Image
Optimization screen.
For details of extended functions menu, refer to
4 details in each step.
1 Start the Settings Navigator.

2 Display the main screen for the Image

Optimization.
“ Settings Navigator screen and operation flow”
(Page 4-4)
3 Tap the < > extended functions display

button at the lower left of the window.
The extended functions menu will be displayed.
Tap the arbitrary button and set the extended

functions menu.
The extended functions menu will be hidden

by tapping the < > button.

5
This chapter explains the procedures for starting
the operation, the names and functions of each part
Operating/Adjusting and the adjustment procedures to fully utilize the
judgment ability of the IV-H/IV-HG Series.
Starting an Operation.........................................5-2
Overview of the Operation Screen....................5-3
Names and Functions of the 5
Operation Screen...............................................5-4
Operating/Adjusting
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment...............5-17
Tool Auto Tuning ( Automatically
Adjusting the Judgment Condition)...............5-18
Stabilizing the Judgment Process..................5-34
Shortening the Processing Time....................5-44

Starting an Operation
Starting an Operation
Starts an operation in accordance with the program created with the Settings Navigator.
The sensor can be independently operated.
Turning on the power and starting Exiting the sensor settings and
an operation starting an operation
1 Turn on the power of the sensor and monitor. 1 Exit the settings of the sensor, such as
Settings Navigator.
2 Confirm that the operation screen opens. “ Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5)
5 The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.
2 Tap the [RUN] button.

Operating/Adjusting
If the image or status result does not update,

refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-7).
The run screen opens and the operation starts.
When the power of the monitor is turned on for If the image or status result does not update,
the first time, the initial settings screen opens. refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-7).
“Operation when the Power is Turned on”
(Page 3-5)

Overview of the Operation Screen
Overview of the Operation Screen
Start screen
Menu OFF (Page 5-4)
Menu ON (Page 5-4)

5
Zoom/Full-screen mode
Operating/Adjusting
(Page 5-6)
Hides the title and menu button, and displays
the entire image.
Changes the display magnification of an
image.
Display setting screen

Selects the [Tool View] and [Analysis] menu,
and set the information to display on the
monitor.
Matching List Statistics display screen Histogram display screen Selecting the
(Page 5-15) (Page 5-11) (Page 5-13) display method
of the tool.
The matching list of each setting Displays the statistical Displays the histogram of the (Page 5-7)
tool is displayed on monitor. information of the status result. status result.

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
In the operation screen, the displayed items will be different depending on the ON/OFF of the menus.
Menu Screen
zz
Menu OFF
(8) (9)
(5) Search region
If the search region of the selected tool is being
(1) set to partial, the search region will be displayed
(2) with a light blue frame. If the position adjustment
(10)
(11) is being set, the search region after the position
(3) adjustment will be displayed.
(6) [Menu] button
(4)
Switches to the display in Menu ON mode.
5 (5) When the touch panel is locked, the will
be displayed.
Operating/Adjusting
“Touch Screen Lock” (Page 6-61)

(6) (7) [OFF] button
Switches to the display in Menu OFF mode.
zz
Menu ON
(8) (9) (8) Status gauge
(1) Displays status results (OK/NG) of the tool
(2) selected on the monitor, a line indicating the
(10)
(11) threshold, and a value of the matching rate.
(3)
(12) When the status gauge is tapped, the operation
(13) turns to Threshold Adjustment mode (Page 5-17).
(4)
(14) Judge is OK (green) Judge is NG (red)
(5)
(19)
(7) (20)
(21)
Threshold Matching rate
(15) (16) (17) (18)
(1) Title yyBoth maximum and minimum values of

the distances between all the pitches are
Displays the device name (Page 6-38), program
displayed in status gauge of the Pitch tool.
number (Page 6-2), and program name of the
Among all of the distances between pitches,
sensor (Page 6-14). the one which deviates the most from average
(2) Tool Name value is displayed to show the matching rate.
Displays the tool number and tool name of the yyThreshold is not displayed in High-Speed
tool selected on the monitor (Page 4-38). Position Adjustment tool.
The selected tool can also be switched. yyIf the scaling function is used with the Width/
Diameter/Pitch tool, the scaling unit is displayed.
(3) Brightness correction region yy “Displaying and outputting the status
When the brightness correction is being set, the result” (Page A-4).
brightness correction region will be displayed (IV-HG Series only)
with a blue frame. yyThreshold is not displayed in status gauge
of OCR tool. When all character/date is
(4) Tool window completely matching, the matching rate is
Displays the tool region which has been set with indicated with 100. When any of character/date
green frame when the status result is OK, and is not matching, the matching rate is indicated
displays with red frame when the status result is with 0.
NG. yyIf [Shade Contrast] of OCR tool is set to
The tool selected by tapping the region can also [Enable], threshold is displayed. The value
of the matching rate links with the shade
be switched.
contrast of character/date.

(9) OK/NG display (17) [USB Memory] button

Displays the total status result. Displays the USB Memory screen.
The total status conditions can be selected “Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to
from [All Tools OK]/[Any Tool OK]/[Logic 1] to a USB Memory” (Page 6-23)
[Logic 4]. (18) [Sensor Setup] button
yyIf the total status result is OK, OK will be Stops the running mode to display the Sensor
displayed. Setup Menu screen.
yyIf the total status result is NG, NG will be If the password lock has been set to the sensor,
displayed.
will be displayed.
yyWhen [NG Hold Function] is set to [ON] and
total status result is NG, is displayed and “Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen”
the screen is held. (Page 6-2)
“Password Lock” (Page 6-39)
5
(10) Processing time
Operating/Adjusting
Displays the time from receiving an external (19) [NG] button
trigger or an internal trigger to output the status When the function of “List of NG Sensor
result. In the case of the One-Shot output (Page Occurrences” is used and the sensor is
6-36), the ON-Delay Time is not included. registered on the list, the [NG] button will be
(11) Condition Display displayed.
Displays the Condition of the monitor. The number of NG occurrences on the sensor
......... Indicates “Running”. registered is displayed.
......... Indicates “Test mode”. The status
(20) [HOLD CLR] button
result will not be output.
If the screen is held after detecting an NG when
(12) [Trig] button
the “NG Hold Function” activated, this button
[Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to releases the held screen.
[Yes], the [Trig] button will be displayed. A trigger is (21) [Chnge Connected Snsr] button
issued by each tap on a button. This button is used When [Direct Connection (2 units or more)] or
when the external trigger cannot be input.
[Network Connection] is selected, the [Chnge
The button can be set to be displayed or hidden.
“Display Settings” (Page 6-60) Connected Snsr] button will be displayed.
Detects the connected sensor and changes the
(13) [Zoom] button
sensor to connect to.
Switches the display in full-screen mode and makes
it possible to enlarge the images on the monitor.
“Switching the display to the full-screen mode”
(Page 5-6) When [OFF] is selected in the display method of
the tool (Page 5-7), the tool name, search region,
(14) [View] button tool window, and status gauge will be hidden.
Displays the menu to select display methods for
the tools and analysis screen.
(Page 5-7)
(15) [Monitor Settings] button
Displays the Monitor Settings screen.
“Setting the Advanced Monitor Information”
(Page 6-55)
(16) [Sensor Image History] button
Displays the Sensor Image History screen.
“Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images

Switching the display to the full- Enlarging the image display

screen mode In the full-screen mode, the display magnification of
When the [Zoom] button displayed in the Menu ON images can be changed.
screen is tapped, the title and menus displayed on
the monitor become hidden and the display will be 1 Switch the display to the full-screen mode.
switched to the full-screen mode. “Switching the display to the full-screen
mode” (Page 5-6)
1 Tap the [Zoom] button. 2 Change the magnification ratio to the desired
ratio by tapping the or button.
5 If the [Zoom] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu]
button at the lower left corner of the screen.
Operating/Adjusting
Move button
yyThe selectable ratios are 1.0x/1.5x/2.0x/3.0x.

Switches to the full-screen mode. yyThe display is enlarged each time you tap on
the [+] button.
yyThe display is reduced each time you tap on
the [-] button.
yyIn the enlarged display, the enlarged area
currently displayed is indicated at the left of
the [Back] button.
Enlarged area currently
displayed
Entire image
yyIf the [Back] button is tapped while the
image is enlarged, the screen returns to the
Menu ON screen maintaining the current
magnification ratio.
3 Adjust the display position of the enlarged

image as needed.
yyYou can change the display position of the

enlarged image by tapping the move button or
swiping the image on the monitor.
yyIf you tap the [+] or [-] button after changing
the display position, the image will be
enlarged/reduced with reference to the
center of the image displayed on the monitor.
4 After the setting is completed, tap the

[Back] button.

Selecting the tool whose Selecting a display method for tools

information to be displayed When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON
There are two methods for selecting the tool, whose screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are
information you wish to display; (1) selecting the tool displayed.
from the pull-down menu and (2) tapping the tool
window on the monitor If one of the display methods for [Tool View] is selected
and the [OK] button is tapped, the display on the

Selecting the tool from the pull-down menu
monitor changes in accordance with the selected
1 Select the tool whose information you display method.
wish to display from the pull-down menu
by tapping the tool name.
1 Tap the [View] button.
5
Select the tool If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu]
Operating/Adjusting
button at the lower left corner of the monitor.
Information of the selected tool will be displayed.
Information of
the selected tool The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are
displayed.
Selected tool 2 Tap the display method for [Tool View] in

accordance with the intended purpose.

Selecting the tool by tapping it on the monitor
1 Tap the tool window of the tool whose
information you wish to display.
Selected tool
For details of the display methods for [Tool View],

refer to “Display methods for tools” (Page 5-8).
Tap the tool
Information of the tapped tool will be displayed.

button.
The display method for tools changes in
accordance with the selected menu.
Information of
the tapped tool
tapped tool

Display methods for tools zz

Process 1
Depending on the type of the sensor (color or

monochrome type), selectable display methods are
Outside the tool
different.
window

For color type Inside the tool
window
zz
OFF
Compared to when the [Window] is selected,
5 the following are different. The rest are the

same.
Operating/Adjusting
Selected tool
yyOutline/EdgePixels/Width/Diameter/Edge/
Pitch tool
The tool windows and search regions of all tools Displays inside the tool window in
become hidden. The tool name and the status monochrome, and outside of the tool window
gauge will also be hidden. in color. Indicates the recognized outline/edge
zz
Window with a series of points in green (OK) or red
(NG).
If the brightness correction has been set, the
inside the tool window is displayed with the
corrected brightness.
yyColor Area tool
Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or
red (NG).
yyOCR tool
Selected tool Displays the recognized text and date on a
yyDisplays the frame of tool window with a green (OK) or red (NG) window.
thick line. If the mask region is set in the
Color Area/Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/
Pitch/OCR tool, the region where the tool
window and mask region are combined will be
displayed.
yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light
blue.
Non selected tools
yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a
thin line.
yyThe search region and the mask region will
not be displayed.
Common
When the result of position adjustment and the
status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be
displayed in green. If one of the status results is
NG, the tool will be displayed in red.
Displays the brightness correction window in blue.

zz
Process 2
For monochrome type
zz
OFF
Outside the
search region
Inside the
search region
Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected,

the following are different. The rest are the
same.
The tool windows and search regions of all tools 5
become hidden. The tool name and the status
Operating/Adjusting
Selected tool gauge will also be hidden.
yyOutline tool
Displays inside the tool window and search
zz
Window
region in monochrome, and outside of the

search region in color.
If the brightness correction has been set,
inside the search region is displayed with the
corrected brightness.
yyColor Area tool
Displays inside the tool window in
monochrome. The extracted region is Selected tool
displayed in the color of the target. yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a
yyEdgePixels/Width/Diameter/Edge/Pitch tool thick line. If the mask region is set in the Area/
Displays both inside and outside the tool Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/Pitch/OCR
window in monochrome. tool, the region where the tool window and
yyOCR tool mask region are combined will be displayed.
Displays the recognized text and date on a yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light
green (OK) or red (NG) window. blue.
Non selected tools
yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a
thin line.
yyThe search region and the mask region will
not be displayed.
Common
When the result of position adjustment and the
status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be
displayed in green. If one of the status results is
NG, the tool will be displayed in red.
Displays the brightness correction window in
blue.

zz
Process zz
Process 1
Outside the tool

window
Inside the tool
window
This is selectable for the Area tool and for the This is selectable for the Outline/Edge Pixel/
5 Outline/Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/Pitch/ Width/Diameter/Edge/Pitch/OCR tool in which

[Brightness Correction] has been set.
OCR tool in which [Brightness Correction] has
Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the
not been set.
Operating/Adjusting
following are different. The rest are the same.

Compared to when the [Window] is selected,
Selected tool
same. Pitch tool
Selected tool Indicates the recognized outline/edge with a
series of points in green (OK) or red (NG).
Displays inside the tool window with the
Pitch tool corrected brightness and outside the tool
Indicates the recognized outline/edge with a window with the brightness before correction.
series of points in green (OK) or red (NG). yyOCR tool
yyArea tool Displays the recognized text and date on a
green (OK) or red (NG) window. Displays
Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or
inside the tool window with the corrected
red (NG). brightness and outside the tool window with
If the brightness correction has been set, the brightness before correction.
inside the tool window will be displayed with zz
Process 2
the corrected brightness and outside the tool
window will be displayed with the brightness
before correction.
Outside the
yyOCR tool search region
Displays the recognized text and date on a Inside the
green (OK) or red (NG) window. search region
This is selectable for the Outline/Edge Pixel/

Width/Diameter/Edge/Pitch/OCR tool for which
[Brightness Correction] has been set.
Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected,
same.
Selected tool
Displays inside the search region with the
corrected brightness and outside the search
region with the brightness before correction.

Displaying the statistical 3 Tap the [OK] button.

information The system returns to the Menu ON screen.
When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON Contents of the statistical information are as
screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are follows.
displayed.
(1)
Select [Statistics] from the [Analysis] pull-down (2)
menu to display the statistical information of (3)
judgment.
Displaying the statistical information 5

Operating/Adjusting
(4) (5) (6) (7)
If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu] (1) Title
button at the lower left corner of the monitor. Displays the name of the sensor (Page 6-38),
program number (Page 6-2), and program
name (Page 6-14).
(2) Position adjustment status result
When the position adjustment is being set, the
position adjustment status result of the latest
judgment process will be displayed.
(3) Tool status result
Displays the status result of the latest judgment
process for each tool set in the program.
The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] will be
displayed. (4) [Reset] button
Resets the statistical information and the histograms.
2 Select [Statistics] from the [Analysis] pull- (5) Processing time information
down menu. Displays information related to the processing
time.
yyTIME............ Displays the processing time of
the latest judgment process.
yyMAX............. Displays the maximum value of
the processing time.
yyMIN.............. Displays the minimum value of
yyAVE.............. Displays the average value of
The statistical information will be displayed.

(6) Trigger count information

Hiding the statistical information
Displays the information related to the number
of triggers.
yyTrigNo.......... Displays the total number of 1 Tap the [View] button.
triggers issued. This number
does not include the number of If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the
trigger errors. [Menu] button at the lower left corner of the
yyOK................ Displays the number of triggers monitor.
issued with the total status OK.
yyNG................ Displays the number of triggers The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] will be
issued with the total status NG. displayed.
5 yyTrigErrNo...... Displays the number of triggers

issued as error triggers. 2 Select [OFF] from the [Analysis] pull-down
(7) OUT information menu.
Operating/Adjusting
Displays the latest status results of items which

are assigned to an output line (Page 4-138).
yyThe upper limit of TrigNo is 999999. When

the number exceeds the upper limit, the
counter resets to 0 and starts counting
again.
yyThe upper limit of OK, NG, and TrigErrNo is
999999. The values display stops updating The statistical information becomes hidden.
when the upper limit is reached.
yyThe statistical information is reset under the
following conditions.
- When the [Reset] button is tapped
- ‌When the power of the sensor is turned
OFF
- When the tool is added/deleted/copied
- ‌When the upper limit of the Color Area/
Area/Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/
Pitch tool is enabled/disabled or when 3 Tap the [OK] button.
the setting scale is changed by the user The system returns to the Menu ON screen.
operation or Tool Auto Tuning
- ‌When switching the scaling settings with
Width/Diameter/Pitch tool
- ‌When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if
more than two tools other than the position
adjustment tool are being set
- When the program is switched
- ‌When each correction of the setup
adjustment is started
- When the sensor is initialized

The system returns to the Menu ON screen.

Displaying the histogram Contents of the histogram are as follows.

(1) (6)
When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON
(2)
screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are (3) (7)
displayed.
Select [Histogram] from the [Analysis] pull-down (8)
menu to display the matching rate of the selected (4)

tool in histogram.
(5)
Displaying the histogram (1) Title

Displays the name of the sensor (Page 6-38),
5
1 Tap the [View] button. program number (Page 6-2), and program
name (Page 6-14).
Operating/Adjusting
(2) Tool Name
If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the
[Menu] button at the lower left corner of the Displays the name of the tool whose histogram
monitor. is been shown. Tap the tool name to select the
tool whose histogram is you wish to display.
(3) Matching rate information
Displays the information related to the matching
rate.
yyMatch..........Displays the matching rate of the
latest judgment process.
yyMAX............Displays the maximum value of
the matching rate.
yyMIN.............Displays the minimum value of
The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] will be the matching rate.
displayed. yyAVE.............Displays the average value of the
matching rate.
2 Select [Histogram] from the [Analysis]
pull-down menu. AVE is not displayed in Edge tool and High-
Speed Position Adjustment tool.
(4) Judgment Record

Displays the judgment process counts for OK or NG.
yyOK...............Displays the process count for "OK".
yyNG...............Displays the process count for "NG".
If the judgment threshold is changed, the

The histogram appears. histogram is updated according to the result
judged based on the changed threshold.
However, the judgment record retains the
counts judged based on the previous threshold.
Therefore, the judgment conditions on the
histogram may be different from the displayed
judgment record counts.

(5) [Reset] button

Resets the statistical information and the histograms. yyThe upper limit of the judgment processing
(6) Tool status result count display for the judgment record is
999999. The values display stop updating
Displays the status results for the selected tool
when the upper limit is reached.
as OK, NG, or -- (Pos.Adj. fails).
yyThe upper limit of the histogram is 999999.
(7) Threshold The values display stop updating when the
Displays the threshold for the selected tool. upper limit is reached.
yyThe histogram and judgement records are
reset under the following conditions.
Threshold is not displayed in High-Speed
- When the [Reset] button is tapped
5 Position Adjustment tool.
- ‌When the power of the sensor is turned
OFF
(8) Histogram
- When the tool is added/deleted/copied
Operating/Adjusting
Displays the histogram (frequency distribution)

- ‌When the upper limit of the Color Area/
for the selected tool.
Area/Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/
The range for OK is displayed in green and for Pitch tool is enabled/disabled or when
NG is displayed in red, having the threshold as the setting scale is changed by the user
the boundary. operation or Tool Auto Tuning
yyAbscissa axis....Displays the distribution of the - ‌When switching the scaling settings with
matching rate. The display of Width/Diameter/Pitch tool
the range is fixed and cannot - ‌When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if
more than two tools other than the position
be specified arbitrary.
adjustment tool are being set
yyVertical axis.......Adjusts automatically in
- When the program is switched
accordance with the maximum - ‌When each correction of the setup
value of the frequency. It adjustment is started
cannot be specified arbitrary. - When the sensor is initialized
yy .....................Displays the matching rate of yyBoth maximum (MAX) and minimum (MIN)
the latest judgment process. values of all the pitches are displayed in the
Pitch tool.
Pitch tool displays the histogram (frequency
distribution) of the number of pitches. 3 Tap the [OK] button.

Hiding the histogram Displaying Matching List

When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON
1 Tap the [View] button. screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are
displayed.
If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the Select [Matching List] from the [Analysis] pull-down
[Menu] button at the lower left corner of the menu to display the matching rate of all the set
monitor. tools in a list.
displayed. Displaying Matching List
2 Select [OFF] from the [Analysis] pull-down 1 Tap the [View] button. 5
menu.
Operating/Adjusting
If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the
[Menu] button at the lower left corner of the
monitor.
displayed.
2 Select [Matching List] from the [Analysis]

pull-down menu.
The histogram becomes hidden.
Matching list appears.


The displayed items in the matching list are as 3 Tap the [OK] button.
follows. The system returns to the Menu ON screen.
(1)
(4)
(2) (3)
5 (1) Title
Displays the device name (Page 6-38), program
Operating/Adjusting
number (Page 6-2) and program name (Page

6-14) of the sensor.
(2) Tool name list
Displays the names of all the set tools.
(3) Status gauge list
Displays status results (OK/NG) for all the set
tools, a line indicating the threshold, and a value
of the matching rate.
Judge is OK (green)
Threshold
Matching rate
Threshold
Judge is NG (red)
(4) [Switch] button
A total of 6 tools can be displayed on one
screen.
The displayed tool changes every time when
tapping it.
When tapping with the status results (OK/NG)
of the tool with the largest number, the overview
screen appears.
Displays status results (OK/NG) for all the set
tools and a value of the matching rate on the
overview screen.
yyDoes not display the status gauge of the set

tool and a line indicating the threshold on the
overview screen.
yyThe tools are displayed in tool number order.

Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment
The method for manually adjusting the threshold 5 Adjust the threshold by checking the
while in the Test mode. matching rate.
<Setting example>
The threshold adjustment can be started by the If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is
[Limit Adjustment] button in the tool settings of the higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the low-
Settings Navigator. quality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to
65 of the value intermediate between 40 and 90.
1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen”
(Page 6-2)
2 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button. 5
Operating/Adjusting
yyA target is detected as OK if the matching

rate is greater than the threshold, and
detected as NG if the matching rate is lower
than the threshold.
yyIn accordance with the status result of the
The [Limit Adjustment] button is available only when tool, the display color of the tool changes.
the program that the tool has been set is selected. “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7)
yyThe threshold can be changed by using the
3 If multiple tools are set in the program, select slider or inputting values.
the tool to adjust the threshold from the pull-
yyA target is judged by the new threshold from
down menu and tap the [OK] button. the judgment process of the trigger output
after the threshold is changed.
yyThe threshold can be adjusted by checking
Select the tool
the histogram result.
“Displaying the histogram” (Page 5-13)
The displayed contents are as follows.
- The histogram before threshold adjustment
is displayed.
- The status results during threshold
adjustment are not added to the frequency
distribution of the histogram.
The sensor turns to the Test mode. - The counts for OK and NG are not displayed.
- The reset button is not displayed.
4 Image a high or low-quality-target to be
the reference of judgment.
6 After the adjustment is completed, tap the
If [External] is selected for [Trigger Options] or [OK] button.
[Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the If a program is set with more than one tool, a
button (Page 4-7) to image the target by confirmation dialog for whether or not to adjust
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. threshold for other tools is displayed.
To adjust threshold for other tools, tap the [Yes]
Imaging by inputting an internal trigger finishes
button and repeat steps 3 to 6.
by the button.
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)
Tool Auto Tuning

(Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)
The Tool Auto Tuning is a function to automatically
Using the image history saved in the
adjust the judgment condition for the detection tool sensor
and the judgment threshold for each tool by using This is the method to register the image as an OK
multiple high-quality-targets (OK images) and low- or an NG image to perform tuning while checking
quality-targets (NG images). the images read from the Sensor Image History.
There are three methods to register the image to “Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images
be used for Tool Auto Tuning. whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-16)
Outline tool and Color Area/Area tool can use Tool

Auto Tuning. Sensor Image History
5

Using the images taken in the Test
Operating/Adjusting
mode
This is the method to register the image as an
OK or an NG image to perform tuning while
preparing the multiple high and low-quality-
Perform tuning by reading the
target and checking the results of the test images judged as OK or NG
operation. from the Sensor Image History

Using the image files saved in the
USB memory
This is the method to register the image as
an OK or an NG image to perform tuning
while checking the images read from the USB
memory. Batch backup files (*.iva) and image
capture files (*.ivp) can be used.
“Backing up in a batch” (Page 6-24)
“Capturing the screen” (Page 6-30)
USB
OK memory
NG
Batch backup file (*.iva)
OK Image capture file (*.ivp)
OK Perform tuning by
imaging targets which
NG
are judged as OK or NG
Perform tuning by reading the images judged as OK

or NG from the USB memory

Operation flow for the Tool Auto Starting and finishing the Tool Auto
Tuning Tuning
Start Displays the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning from
the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
yyThe Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/Pitch/

Select OCR/Position Adjustment/High-Speed Position
the tool Adjustment tool is not target for the Tool Auto
Tuning.
yyThe Color Area/Area tools with the [Fixed
Select a starting
Reference Area] set as [Enable] are excluded 5
from a Tool Auto Tuning target.
Operating/Adjusting
method

(Page 6-2)
Image a target
2 Tap the [Tool Auto Tuning] button.
Low-quality
Judgment of an
image?
High-quality
AutoTune as AutoTune as When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen

OK NG opens, tap the [Start] button.
3 If multiple tools are set in the program,

select the target tool for Tool Auto Tuning
from the pull-down menu, and tap the [OK]
Automatically adjust the judgment button.
condition and threshold
Select the tool
Yes
Add image?*
No
The Start Up Menu screen for Tool Auto Tuning

Finish opens.
* There are three methods to prepare images.

* Up to 24 images can be used for tuning.

4 Select a starting method of Tool Auto Tuning. zz

Use the registered information file
Select this method in the following cases.
yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning after
additionally adding a new image to the
registration information (images and criteria
information) saved in the USB memory
yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning using the
registration information (images and criteria
information) saved in the USB memory after
zz
Register from the beginning readjusting the tool settings
5 Select this method in the following cases. “ Tool Auto Tuning by the registration
yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning for the first information file” (Page 5-31)
time.
Operating/Adjusting
yyWhen redoing the image registration from the

beginning.
5 Select the registration source of the image
to be registered to the Tool Auto Tuning
If the [Register from the beginning] is tapped,
the registration menu screen of Tool Auto and register the image.
Tuning opens. Proceed to step 5.
If the previous registration information has been

saved in the monitor, a confirmation dialog
asking whether or not to discard the previous
registration information appears.
zz
For registration of an image taken during
the Test mode
“Registering the images taken in the Test
mode” (Page 5-21)
zz
For registration of an image history saved
yyTap the [OK] button if you wish to discard the in the sensor
previous registration information and perform “Registering the images from the image
Tool Auto Tuning. history saved in the sensor” (Page 5-23)
yyBy tapping the [Saving to the USB memory]
button, the result of Tool Auto Tuning can be
zz
For registration of an image file saved in
USB memory
saved in the USB memory as a registration
information and can be reused. “Registering the images from the file saved
in the USB memory” (Page 5-25)
zz
Use the previous registered image
Select this method in the following cases.
yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning after
additionally adding a new image to the OK/NG
image registered in the previous Tool Auto Tuning
yyWhen readjusting the tool settings after Tool
Auto Tuning and then repeating the Tool Auto
Tuning by the registered image.
“Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration
information” (Page 5-29)

6 After the registration is completed, tap the Registering the OK/NG images to
[Save] button. be used for the Tool Auto Tuning
Registering the images taken in the

Test mode
Registers the image as an OK or an NG image to
perform tuning while preparing the multiple high and
low-quality-target and checking the images imaged.

1 Display the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning. 5
“Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning”
(Page 5-19)
Operating/Adjusting
2 Tap the [Take a picture] button.
Adjusted results will be reflected and the

information dialog appears.
8 Tap the [OK] button. 3 Image a high-quality-target to be the

criteria for the OK status or a low-quality-
target to be the criteria for NG status.
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging
button.
By tapping the [Saving to the USB memory]
4 Check the displayed image and tap the
[AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG] button.
information file and can be reused. zz
For Outline tool
The system returns to the Sensor setup menu

screen.
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK

or NG image will be displayed.

zz
For Color Area tool (color type) zz
For Area tool (monochrome type)
If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the
5 information screen opens.

By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for
information screen opens.
the color extraction area opens. the brightness extraction area opens.
Operating/Adjusting
If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the
color to be the reference of judgment, or tap the brightness to be the reference of judgment,
[+]/[-] button and expand/reduce the color area or operate the slider and expand/reduce the
to be extracted. brightness area to be extracted.
yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous

operation can be cancelled.
yyTo change the color of extraction target, tap
yyTo change the brightness of extraction target,
the [Clear] button and tap the color to be the
tap the [Clear] button and tap the brightness
reference of judgment again.
to be the reference of judgment again.
After the setting is completed, tap the [Register] yyFor details of settings by using the slider,
button. refer to “Editing the value with the slider”
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK (Page 3-17).
or NG image will be displayed. After the setting is completed, tap the [Register]
button.

5 Check the changes in settings after the Registering the images from the image
auto tuning is performed, and tap the [OK]
history saved in the sensor
button.
perform tuning while checking the images loaded
from the Sensor Image History.
1 Display the main screen for Tool Auto

Changed Tuning.
settings “Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning”
(Page 5-19)
If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message 2 Tap the [Sensor Image History] button. 5
to change the tool settings or the image to be
Operating/Adjusting
registered.
The type of an image to be registered will be

displayed on the upper right on the screen.
yy : Registers as an OK image.
yy : Registers as an NG image.
The confirmation dialog to continuously register 3 Tap the image history to be the OK or NG
another image appears. image and tap the [Zoom] button.
6 Tap the [Yes] button and repeat steps 3 to 5.

Select the
image
The selected image will be enlarged.
yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG 4 Check the displayed image and tap the
images is recommended. [AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG]
yyUp to 24 images can be registered. button.
7 After the registration is completed, tap the yyBy tapping [<]/[>] button, you can check the
[No] button on the confirmation dialog.
other images in enlarged display.
The system returns to the main screen for Tool yyThe status result displayed on the screen is
Auto Tuning. the status result by the settings at the time
“Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning” of saving the image. If the tool settings are
(Page 5-19) changed after the image is saved, only the
frame of the tool window will be displayed
regardless of selection of the tool display
method (Page 5-7). The processing status
will not be displayed.

zz
For Outline tool zz
For Area tool (monochrome type)
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the
5 or NG image will be displayed. information screen opens.

zz
For Color Area tool (color type) the brightness extraction area opens.
Operating/Adjusting
If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the

brightness to be the reference of judgment,
or operate the slider and expand/reduce the
brightness area to be extracted.
If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the

the color extraction area opens.
If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the
color to be the reference of judgment, or tap the yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous
[+]/[-] button for extraction area and expand/
reduce the color area to be extracted.
yyTo change the brightness of extraction target,
tap the [Clear] button and tap the brightness
to be the reference of judgment again.
yyFor details of settings by using the slider,
refer to “Editing the value with the slider”
(Page 3-17).
After the setting is completed, tap the [Register]
button.
button.

5 Check the changes in settings after the Registering the images from the file
saved in the USB memory
button.
perform tuning while checking the images loaded
from the USB memory.
1 Connect the USB memory on which the

Changed batch backup files (*.iva) and image
settings
capture files (*.ivp) are saved, to the USB
connector of the monitor.
If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message “Installing the USB memory” (Page 6-23) 5
to change the tool settings or the image to be
2 Display the main screen for Tool Auto
Operating/Adjusting
registered. Tuning.
The type of an image to be registered will be (Page 5-19)
displayed on the upper right on the screen.
yy : Registers as an OK image. 3 Tap the [USB Memory Image] button.
The confirmation dialog to continuously register

another image appears.
6 Tap the [Yes] button and repeat steps 3 to 5.

yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG
images is recommended.
yyUp to 24 images can be registered.
4 Select a batch backup file (*.iva) or image
7 After the registration is completed, tap the capture file (*.ivp) and tap the [OK] button.
[No] button on the confirmation dialog.
The system returns to the main screen for Tool
Auto Tuning.
Select a file to be
(Page 5-19) loaded
File formats other than “*.iva” or “*.ivp” cannot

be loaded.
For details of selecting files in the USB


5 When the batch backup file (*.iva) is zz

For Color Area tool (color type)
selected, tap the image history to be the
OK or NG image and tap the [Zoom] button.
Select the
image

5 The selected image will be enlarged.
Operating/Adjusting
the color extraction area opens.

6 Check the displayed image and tap the If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the
[AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG]
color to be the reference of judgment, or tap the
button.
[+]/[-] button for extraction area and expand/
reduce the color area to be extracted.
yyWhen a batch backup file (*.iva) has been
selected, you can check the other images in
enlarged display by tapping the [<]/[>] button.
yyThe status result displayed on the screen
for the batch backup file (*.iva) is the status
result by the settings at the time of saving
the image.
yyFor the image capture file (*.ivp), only the
image will be displayed.
zz
For Outline tool
button.

zz
For Area tool (monochrome type) 7 Check the changes in settings after the
button.
Changed
settings
By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message
5
the brightness extraction area opens. to change the tool settings or the image to be
Operating/Adjusting
If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the registered.
brightness to be the reference of judgment,
or operate the slider and expand/reduce the The type of an image to be registered will be
brightness area to be extracted. displayed on the upper right on the screen.
yy : Registers as an OK image.
The confirmation dialog to continuously register

another image appears.
8 Tap the [Yes] button and register the

images repeatedly.
yyIf the batch backup file (*.iva) is selected,
repeat steps 5 to 7.
operation can be cancelled. yyIf the image capture file (*.ivp) is selected,
yyTo change the brightness of extraction target, repeat steps 4 to 7.
tap the [Clear] button and tap the brightness yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG
to be the reference of judgment again. images is recommended.
yyFor details of settings by using the slider, yyUp to 24 images can be registered.
refer to “Editing the value with the slider”
(Page 3-17). 9 After the registration is completed, tap the
After the setting is completed, tap the [Register] [No] button on the confirmation dialog.
button. The system returns to the main screen for Tool
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK Auto Tuning.
or NG image will be displayed. “Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning”
(Page 5-19)

Confirming or deleting the images

registered for the Tool Auto Tuning
Confirm or delete the OK/NG images registered for
the Tool Auto Tuning.
1 Display the main screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning.
(Page 5-19)
5 2 Tap the [Confirmation of Registered Image]

button.
Operating/Adjusting
3 Confirm or delete the OK/NG image.
yy[First].................Displays the first image.

yy[<]......................Displays the previous image.
yy[>]......................Displays the next image.
yy[Last].................Displays the last image.
yy[Delete]..............Deletes the displayed image.
The setting is re-adjusts by
using the remaining images.

[Close] button.
Tool Auto Tuning.

Tool Auto Tuning by the previous 1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
registration information “Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page 6-2)
When the information of Tool Auto Tuning 2 Tap the [Tool Auto Tuning] button.
performed before turning off power of the monitor
or before disconnecting with the sensor (previous
registration information) is used, the Tool Auto
Tuning can be performed skipping the OK/NG
image registration process.
yyYou can additionally add a new image to the OK/
NG image registered with the previous Tool Auto
Tuning, and then perform Tool Auto Tuning.
5
yyYou can readjust the tool settings after Tool Auto When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen
Operating/Adjusting
Tuning, and then repeat Tool Auto Tuning by the opens, tap the [Start] button.
registered image.
select the target tool for the Tool Auto
Tuning from the pull-down menu and tap
the [OK] button.
Select the tool
Previous registration information
OK OK NG OK
The Start Up Menu screen for the Tool Auto

OK NG OK Tuning opens.
Tuning based on the OK/NG images registered

in the previous Tool Auto Tuning
The previous registration information is saved in

the memory (RAM) inside the monitor, and remains
available until the power of the monitor is turned off
or the monitor is disconnected with the sensor.
When you repeatedly perform Tool Auto Tuning using

the same previous registration information, settings
might be changed each time being performed.
This phenomenon occurs since Tool Auto Tuning
consistently performs adjustment based on the latest
settings (settings changed immediately before).

4 Tap the [Use the previous registered image] 7 After the registration is completed, tap the
button. [Save] button.
5 Re-adjustment is performed by using the

previous registration information.
Operating/Adjusting
The adjustment result is reflected and the

The information dialog appears.
5 Check the changes made by 9 Tap the [OK] button.
the re-adjustment and tap the [OK] button.
Changed
settings
The registration menu screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning opens. By tapping the [Saving to the USB memory]
6 To add images, register the OK/NG images. saved in the USB memory as a registration
information file and can be reused.
“Registering the OK/NG images to be used
for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-21) The system returns to the Sensor setup menu
screen.

Tool Auto Tuning by the registration 1 Prepare the registration information file
information file (*.ivt).
A registration information file is saved at the
When the registration information file (*.ivt), which Tool Auto Tuning finish screen.
contains the Tool Auto Tuning images and criteria For the saving method, refer to the step 8 of
information saved at the end of the previous Tool “Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning”
Auto Tuning is used, the Tool Auto Tuning can be (Page 5-19).
performed skipping the OK/NG image registration
process. 2 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
yyYou can additionally add a new image to the OK/ “Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen”
NG images registered with the previous Tool
Auto Tuning, and then perform Tool Auto Tuning.
(Page 6-2)
5
yyYou can readjust the tool settings after Tool Auto 3 Tap the [Tool Auto Tuning] button.
Operating/Adjusting
Tuning, and then repeat Tool Auto Tuning by the
registered image.
USB
memory When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen opens,
tap the [Start] button.
Registered information file (*.ivt)
OK OK NG OK
select the target tool for the Tool Auto
Tuning from the pull-down menu and tap
the [OK] button.
OK NG OK
Select the tool

Tuning based on the OK/NG images in the
registration information file
When you repeatedly perform Tool Auto Tuning

using the same registration information file, settings
might be changed each time being performed.
This phenomenon occurs since Tool Auto Tuning The Start Up Menu screen for the Tool Auto
consistently performs adjustment based on the latest Tuning opens.
settings (settings changed immediately before).

5 Tap the [Use the registered information file] 7 Tap the [Go] button.
button.
Re-adjustment is performed by using the
5 The import screen for registration information

file appears.
registered information file.
6 Select the registered information file (*.ivt)

Operating/Adjusting
and tap the [OK] button.
Select the file to

be imported
8 Check the changes made by the re-

adjustment and tap the [OK] button.
yyFiles with the formats other than ivt format

cannot be used. Changed
yyIf the confirmation dialog appears, change settings
the registration file to be imported according
to the message.
For details of selecting the files in the USB The registration menu screen for the Tool Auto
memory, refer to “Selecting the file in the Tuning opens.
The confirmation screen opens. 9 To add images, register the OK/NG images.
“Registering the OK/NG images to be used
for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-21)

10 After the registration is completed, tap the

[Save] button.

5
Operating/Adjusting
Adjusted results will be reflected and the
By tapping the [Saving to the USB memory]

information and can be reused.
The system returns to the Sensor setup menu
screen.

Stabilizing the Judgment Process
This section explains how to adjust the device Stabilizing the judgment process by
when the judgment process is not stable.
taking a clear image of the target
To stabilize the judgment process, it is necessary
to take a clear image of the target and adjust the Adjust the imaging conditions so that the sensor can
detection tool such that it functions in a stable manner. take images with which the detection tools can clearly
recognize differences between high and low-quality-
yyStabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear
target.
image of the target (Page 5-34)
- Adjust the installation distance to image the
Imaging the target widely
target widely
- Correct the distorted image due to the installation The judgment process stabilizes by taking a large
5 - Make the image bright enough image of the target onto the screen.
- Focus well

Adjusting the installed distance (WD)
Operating/Adjusting
- Make the image blur less

Install the sensor close to the target.
- Make the glossy or metal surface shine less
Install the sensor at the appropriate distance
- Adjust the color tint (for color type only)
from the target upon checking the field of view
- Make the image less influenced by the lighting
and the installed distance of the sensor.
condition
“Checking the view and installed distance
yyStabilizing by correcting the misaligned target
(IV‑HG series)” (Page 2-2)
position (Page 5-38)
“Checking the view and installed distance
yyStabilizing the position adjustment (Page 5-39)
(IV-H series)” (Page 2-3)
yyStabilizing the High-Speed Position Adjustment
(Page 5-40) ¡ : Adequate × : Inadequate
yyStabilizing the Outline tool (Page 5-40)
yyStabilizing the Color Area/Area tool (Page 5-41)
yyStabilizing the EdgePixels tool (Page 5-42)
yyStabilizing the Width/Edge/Pitch tool (Page 5-42)
yyStabilizing the Diameter tool (Page 5-43)
yyStabilizing the OCR tool (Page 5-43)
If the judgment process is adjusted to make it

stabilize, the process time may become longer
depending on the function used. Adjust the
judgment process while confirming the balance
within the process time.

Using the digital zooming function
The target can be imaged larger using the digital
zooming function.
“Digital Zoom” (Page 4-20)

Correcting the distorted images due to Achieving adequate image brightness

the installation If the image is too dark, the judgment process for
If the sensor is not installed just in front of the target high and low-quality-targets becomes unstable due
due to the sensor installation restrictions and/or to to poor contrast. Also, if the image is too bright,
prevent a shine on the target’s surface, the target the judgment process may become unstable.
image may become trapezoidally distorted. Brightness can be adjusted in Auto Brightness
The tilt correction corrects these images and Adjustment.
displays them without distortion. “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
“Tilt Correction” (Page 6-48)
Indicator light
If the brightness cannot be adjusted 5
in the Auto Brightness Adjustment
Operating/Adjusting
Finer brightness adjustments can be made in
Advanced Brightness Adjustment.
Top view “Advanced Brightness Adjustment”
Target (Page 4-19)
Target
Lateral view
zz
Bright
Setting a higher brightness value gives a longer
exposure time, resulting in a brighter screen.
Before tilt After tilt correction zz
Imaging Mode
correction (vertical)
When "HighGain" is selected in the imaging
mode, the brightness amplification factor
increases and the screen becomes brighter.

If the brightness cannot be adjusted
due to uneven brightness
Refer to “Reducing the shininess of the
glossy or metal surface” (Page 5-37).

Achieving good focus Reducing the image blur

Adjusting the focus is required to clearly image of If the image is blurred by imaging a moving
the target. Focus can be adjusted easily with the target, the image blurring can be corrected by
Auto Focus Adjustment. shortening the exposure time (shutter time). Adjust
“Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13) the exposure time with the advanced brightness
adjustment.

If good focus cannot be achieved by
the Auto Focus Adjustment
The focusing position may not be adjusted
5 correctly if the image is too dark or too bright. Exposure time
Adjust to the applicable brightness with Auto
Operating/Adjusting
Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-12) and then

perform the auto focus adjustment.
If the focus still cannot be adjusted, adjust the
focus manually.
“When the focusing position is to be zz
Bright
adjusted manually” (Page 4-14) When the value of brightness is reduced, the
exposure time becomes shorter resulting in a
less blurry image.
zz
Imaging Mode
Select [HighGain] in the imaging mode so that
the brightness gain becomes higher. The screen
becomes brighter so that the exposure time can
be shortened and the image blurring can be
Adjust the focus position by tapping the [+] or [-] reduced. The image noise may increase.
button. Also, the exposure time may be shortened if the
[HDR] is selected in the imaging mode.
By unmounting the dome attachment or polarizing

filter attachment, image blurring can be lessened
as the exposure time can be shortened.

Reducing the shininess of the glossy

or metal surface Use the polarizing filter attachment. The optical
characteristics of the polarizing filter attachment
Glossy and/or metal surface may reflect the built-in
cut off the mirror reflection and reduce the shine
light into the camera. Since mirror reflection has a
on the target’s surface.
high-light intensity, the amount of light received will
“Using the polarizing filter attachment
be saturated and the surface will shine. This section
(OP‑87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or spread
explains how to reduce the shininess.
lens attachment (OP-87902)” (Page 2-8)

Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment “Using the polarizing filter attachment
If the target shines, the HDR function is enabled (OP‑87436/OP-87437)” (Page 2-12)
automatically and it can be reduced by using

Installing the sensor at an angle
5
the auto brightness adjustment.
Operating/Adjusting
The HDR (High Dynamic Range) function is The built-in lighting will not reflected back into
a function that prevents light saturation in the the camera, so the shine on the target’s surface
shining area by imaging the target with a wider can be reduced.
dynamic range. The HDR function can also be This is effective for flat-surface targets.
adjusted manually. When the sensor is When the sensor is
“Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12) installed in front of installed at an angle
the target from the target

Using the dome attachment
Use the dome attachment.
The dome attachment emits even diffused light
from the entire circumference to the target, so
that the contrast becomes less and the shine on
the target’s surface is reduced.
This is effective for targets of all shapes.
“Using the dome attachment (IV-GD05/
IV-GD10)” (Page 2-6)
“Using the dome attachment (IV-D10)” (Page 2-11)
The mirror reflection The mirror reflection

of the built-in light of the built-in light
reflects into the does not reflect into
camera and causes the camera so no
the surface to shine. surface shine occurs.
Dome attachment
If the image is distorted by tilting the sensor,
the image can be corrected by the tilt
Diffusion correction function.
light “Tilt Correction” (Page 6-48)
Target

Adjusting the color tint (for color type only) Stabilizing by correcting
Adjust the white balance if the color tint of the color the misaligned target position
type image is different from that of the target. If there is a variation (misalignment) in the positioning
“White Balance (for color type only)” (Page 6-51) of the target, the position to be judged is also declined
from the tool window and cannot be judged correctly.
The detection can be stabilized by using the
Reducing the effect of illumination position adjusting function.
variation “Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-69)
If the detection is not stable due to the ambient
5 light from the surroundings where the sensor is
installed, the effect of the illumination variation can

Tool settings
Master image
Operating/Adjusting
be reduced by the brightness correction function.

If the detection cannot be stabilized with the
brightness correction function, use a shielding
around the sensor to prevent from the ambient light.
“Brightness correction” (Page 4-28)
Tool window
Position adjustment window

Processing during an operation
Position adjustment process
Tool window
Position adjustment window
Search region of the tool window

Stabilizing the position adjustment

If the outline of the reference target
cannot be detected
This section explains how to adjust when the
yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline
position adjustment is not stable.
may not be extracted. Set the extraction
“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-69)
sensitivity to [High].

If the target tilts and the position If the process remain unstable even after
adjustment becomes unstable setting the extraction sensitivity to [High], it is
Search region necessary to adjust the exposure condition for
Rotation range the target.
“Stabilizing the judgment process by taking 5
a clear image of the target” (Page 5-34)
Operating/Adjusting
yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may
become stable by using the color filter.
“Color Filters (color type only)” (Page 4-20)
zz
Rotation Range
yyBroaden the rotation range if the tilt of the target
exceeds the rotation range (default value: ± 20°).
“Rotation Range” (Page 4-74)
yyTo stabilize the position adjustment, the tool
window will search with the range ± few
degrees wider than the setting value of rotation
range. (The tool window will search ± few
degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0°.)
Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like
to detect the target in accordance with the set
rotation angle of the target.
“Margin” (Page 4-74)
zz
Search Region
Broaden the search region if the variation in the
position determining of the target exceeds the
region to be searched.

If the position adjustment becomes
unstable due to the effect of the
unwanted outlines
yyThe outline disabling function can disable
unwanted outlines.
“Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-72)
yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].

Stabilizing the High-Speed Position Stabilizing the Outline tool

Adjustment This section explains how to adjust the outline tool
This section explains how to adjust when the High- when the judgment for high and low-quality-targets
Speed Position Adjustment is not stable. is not stable.
If the detection becomes unstable due

If the outline cannot be detected when
the target becomes out of position
to the effect of unwanted edges other
Adjust the search region. Broaden the search
than the target
5
region if the varies of the position determining of
yyRaise the threshold for the edge sensitivity so the target exceeds the region to be searched.
that the unwanted edges are not extracted. “Setting a search region” (Page 4-43)
Operating/Adjusting

yyChange to an image with no unwanted edges
by making the target background plain, etc.

to the effect of the unwanted outline
other than the target

If the edge of a target cannot be yyThe outline disabling function can disable
detected unwanted outlines.
yySet the window size the same as the size of “Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-43)
the target. yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].
If the judgment direction is horizontal (X axis “Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-44)
in case of 2-Axis Adjustment), set the height yySet the search region so that non-target images
of the tool window the same as the height of containing unwanted outlines are not searched.
the target. “Setting a search region” (Page 4-43)
yyDecrease the threshold for the edge yySet the search algorithm to [High Accuracy].
sensitivity. “Search Algorithm” (Page 4-46)
If it cannot be detected even after decreasing yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by
making the target background plain, etc.
the threshold for the edge sensitivity, it is
necessary to adjust the exposure for the
target. Adjust it so that the target shade does If Edge Emphasis (Filter) of digital zoom is
set to [ON], unnecessary outlines may be
not appear.
detected.

If the target tilts and the position
adjustment becomes unstable
Use 2-Axis Adjustment and set the angle
correction to [Enable].
“Setting the Hi-Sp.Adj tool” (Page 4-129)


If the target tilts and the outline Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool
cannot be detected
This section explains how to adjust the Color Area/
yyAdjust the rotation range. Broaden the rotation
Area tool when the judgment for the high and low-
range if the tilt of the target exceeds the
quality-target is not stable.
rotation range (default value: ± 20°).
yyTo stabilize the detection, the tool window will
search with the range ± few degrees wider
If the color you wish to judge cannot
than the setting value of rotation range. (The be extracted
tool window will search ± few degrees even if yyTap and extract the color or the brightness to
the rotation range is set to 0°.) be the reference for judgment. 5
Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like yyBy repeatedly tapping the un-extracted color or
Operating/Adjusting
to detect the target in accordance with the set brightness, the extraction range can be added.
rotation angle of the target. yyAdjust the extraction range with the extraction
“Margin” (Page 4-45) range zoom in/zoom out ([+]/[-] buttons).
Tap the [+] button to expand the color or
brightness range currently being extracted.

If the match rate difference between the
Tap the [-] button to reduce the range.
high and low-quality-targets is small
“Setting the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-50)
Adjust the search algorithm.
yySet the [Fixed Reference Area] to [Enable].
If there is no difference between the match rate

“Extended functions of the Color Area/
for high and low-quality-target, select the [High
Area tool” (Page 4-56)
Accuracy]. This will result in better judgment
accuracy. However, the processing time becomes
longer.
If the area search becomes unstable
“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-46) due to unwanted colors being extracted
Adjust with the mask function. The region in

If the outline of the target cannot be which unwanted colors are extracted can be
detected disabled.
“Mask settings” (Page 4-53)
yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline
may not be extracted. Set the extraction
sensitivity to [High].
If the process remain unstable even after setting
the extraction sensitivity to [High], it is necessary
to adjust the exposure condition for the target.
“Stabilizing the judgment process by taking
a clear image of the target” (Page 5-34)
yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may
become stable by using the color filter.
“Color Filters (color type only)” (Page 4-20)

Stabilizing the EdgePixels tool Stabilizing the Width/Edge/Pitch tool

This section explains how to adjust the EdgePixels This section explains how to adjust the Width/Edge/
tool when the judgment for the high and low-quality- Pitch tool when the judgment for high and low-
target is not stable. quality-targets is not stable.
“EdgePixels tool” (Page 4-60) “Width tool” (Page 4-76)

If the target edge pixels cannot be
extracted
yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the edge to the effect of unwanted edges other
5 pixels may not be extracted.
than the target
yyAdjust with the mask function. Mask the
Set the edge extraction sensitivity to [Hi
region in which unwanted edges have been
Operating/Adjusting
Sens].
extracted.
If the process remains unstable even after
setting the edge extraction sensitivity to [Hi “Mask” (Page 4-99)
Sens], it is necessary to adjust the exposure “Mask” (Page 4-107)
for the target. yyRaise the threshold of the edge sensitivity so
“Edge Sens Adjust” (Page 4-65) that the unwanted edges are not extracted.
yyWhen the number of the target’s edge pixels “‌ Edge Sens Man. Adj.” (Page 4-83)
is low, capture a bigger target and increase “‌ Edge Sens Man. Adj.” (Page 4-103)
the pixels of the edge to be extracted. “‌ Edge Sens Man. Adj.” (Page 4-112)
yyChange to an image with no unwanted edges
by making the target background plain, etc.

If it becomes unstable due to
unwanted edge pixels being extracted
If the edge of a target cannot be detected
Adjust with the mask function. Mask the region yyAlign the rotation angle of tool window with
in which unwanted edge pixels have been the edge angle.
extracted. yyDo not protrude the side which is not in the
judgment direction of tool window from the
target.
If the judgment direction is horizontal, change
the height of the tool window to be shorter
than the height of the target.
yyDecrease the threshold of the edge sensitivity.
If it cannot be detected even after decreasing
the threshold of the edge sensitivity, it is
necessary to adjust the exposure for the
target. Adjust it so that the target shade does
not appear.
“‌ Edge Sens Man. Adj.” (Page 4-83)

Stabilizing the Diameter tool Stabilizing the OCR tool

This section explains how to adjust the diameter This section explains how to adjust the OCR tool
tool when the judgment for high and low-quality- when the judgment for high and low-quality-targets
targets is not stable. is not stable.
“Diameter tool” (Page 4-86) “OCR Tool” (Page 4-115)

When the text and date on the object
to the effect of unwanted circles other cannot be read
than the target If the text and date on the object are not clear,
yyAdjust with the mask function. reading may fail. 5
“Mask” (Page 4-88) Adjust the object capture conditions and clearly
Operating/Adjusting
yySet the edge sensitivity to low so that the display the text and date.
unwanted circles will not be detected. “Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a
“Diameter Extract.” (Page 4-89) clear image of the target” (Page 5-34)
yyChoose an image with no unwanted edges by

When unwanted text and date are read
Adjust with the mask function.

If the target circle cannot be detected Mask the region that the unwanted text and
yySet to both bright and dark directions which date is in.
detect the diameter. “Mask” (Page 4-118)
“Advanced Diam.Ext.” (Page 4-92)
yySet the edge sensitivity to [Hi Sens].
If it can not be detected even after setting the
edge sensitivity to [Hi Sens], it is necessary to
adjust the exposure for the target. Adjust it so
that the target shade does not appear.
“Diameter Extract.” (Page 4-89)

Shortening the Processing Time
This section explains how to adjust the device to For the processing time
shorten the processing time.
To shorten the processing time, perform The processing time is the period of time from when
an external or internal trigger is received until the
adjustments to shorten the processing times of the
status result is finalized.
imaging process and the detection tools. The processing time is displayed at the upper right
yyShortening the imaging processing time (Page of the run screen or the test screen.
5-45)
y Shortening the processing time of each tool (Page
y Processing time
5-46)
yyShortening the processing time of the Outline tool
5 (Page 5-46)
yyShortening the processing time of the Color Area/
Operating/Adjusting
Area/EdgePixels/Width/Diameter/Edge/Pitch tool
(Page 5-46)
yyShortening the processing time of the OCR tool
(Page 5-47)

Flow of the internal process
yyShortening the processing time of the position Trigger input

adjustment (Page 5-47)
Imaging
If the processing time is shortened, the stability of
judgment may decrease. The processing time should
(Tilt Correction)
therefore be adjusted with a view of maintaining
balance with the stability of the judgment process.
(Brightness
Correction)
(Position
Processing time
Adjustment)
Tool 1 process
Tool 2 process
Tool n process
Status output
Methods to shorten the processing time are as

follows.
yyShortening the imaging processing time.
yyShortening the processing time of each tool.
yyDo not use correction functions (tilt correction,
brightness correction, and position adjustment).
yyDo not use the FTP client function.
yyDo not use a field network.

Shortening the imaging processing Selecting the tool

time yyThe processing time will be shorter for the Color
Area/Area/Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/Pitch
zz
Imaging Area
tool than the Outline tool. Select the Color Area/
The processing time can be shortened by
Area/Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/Pitch tool
adjusting the imaging area.
if it can be adjusted by the Color Area/Area/Edge
Entire imaging area (default value)
Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/Pitch tool.
Reduce the imaging area
yyThe processing time will be shorter for the High-
Speed Position Adjustment tool than the normal
position adjustment tool. If the High-Speed
Position Adjustment tool can be used, select the
5
High-Speed Position Adjustment tool.
Operating/Adjusting
Non-imaged area
Reduce the imaging area by setting the imaging
area from Entire (default value) to Partial. The
processing time for capturing the image in Non-
imaged area can be shortened. The importing
time will be shortened by narrowing the vertical
direction (V).
“Imaging Area” (Page 4-18)
zz
Exposure Time
The processing time can be shortened by
shortening the exposure time (Page 4-19). The
longer exposure time makes the processing
time longer than the displayed exposure time.
By unmounting the dome attachment or

polarizing filter attachment, the exposure time
can be shortened.

Shortening the processing time of Shortening the processing time of the

each tool Color Area/Area/EdgePixels/Width/
Diameter/Edge/Pitch tool
Shortening the processing time of the The processing time can be shortened by adjusting
Outline tool the window shape settings.
The processing time can be shortened by adjusting
Window shape
the settings for the search region, rotation range,
and search algorithm.
Search region
5 Rotation range
Operating/Adjusting
zz
Window Shape
If the current window shape is [Entire], reduce
the window shape by modifying the setting to
zz
Search Region
The searching time can be shortened by [¨ Rect] or [¡ Circle].
reducing the search region and setting the The processing time can be shortened by
region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial]. reducing the window.
Make sure that the range of position determining “‌ Setting the Color Area/Area tool” (Page
of the target does not exceed the search region.
“Setting a search region” (Page 4-43) 4-50)
“‌ Setting the EdgePixels tool” (Page 4-62)
zz
Rotation Range
“‌ Setting the Width tool” (Page 4-77)
The target search time while rotating the master
image can be shortened by reducing the rotation “‌ Setting the Diameter tool” (Page 4-87)
range (default value: ± 20°). “‌ Setting the Edge tool” (Page 4-98)
Make sure that the range of an installation angle “‌ Setting the Pitch tool” (Page 4-106)
of the target does not exceed the rotation range.
zz
Search Algorithm zz
Window orientation
Select the [High Speed]. This will decrease the For the Width/Edge/Pitch tool, secure the
judgment accuracy, but the processing time will be window orientation horizontally or vertically (do
shorter. not rotate) to save the processing time.
“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-46)
zz
Producing an image with less unwanted
outlines
The processing time becomes longer for images
with multiple unwanted outlines other than the
target outlines.
yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by
yySet the search region so that non-target images
containing unwanted outlines are not searched.

Shortening the processing time of the Shortening the processing time of the
OCR tool position adjustment
If you are using the OCR tool, you can shorten the When the position adjustment is performed, the
processing time by clearly displaying the object text processing time can be shortened by adjusting the
and date. search region settings or rotation range settings.
yyMake an image with no unwanted background Search region
information by making the target background Rotation range
plain, etc.
yyAdjust the object capture conditions and clearly
display the text and date.
5
Operating/Adjusting
zz
Search Region
The searching time can be shortened by
reducing the search region and setting the
region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial].
Note that the range of the target position that
the position adjustment function can correct
becomes narrower.
zz
Rotation Range
The target search time while rotating the master
image can be shortened by reducing the rotation
range (default value: ± 20°).
Note that the range of the target angle that
the position adjustment function can correct
becomes narrower.
zz
Producing an image with less
unnecessary outlines
The processing time becomes longer for images
with multiple unwanted outlines other than the
target outlines.
yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by
yySet the search region so that non-target images
containing unwanted outlines are not searched.
zz
Using High-Speed Position Adjustment
tool
Compared with the normal position adjustment
tool, the High-Speed Position Adjustment tool
process with high speed.

MEMO
5
Operating/Adjusting

6
Here the Sensor Setup Menu screen, the Sensor
Advanced screen, and the Monitor Settings screen
Various Functions are also explained.
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen.....6-2

Changing the Sensor Displayed
on the Monitor
(Change Connected Sensor Function).............6-3
Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the
Sensor Connected
6
(List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function)......6-5
Various Functions
Holding the Image of the Sensor
on which NG Occurred(NG Hold Function).....6-9
Changeover for a Target
(Program Functions)........................................6-10
(Confirming the Images
whose Status Result is NG).............................6-16
Adding Date and Time information
to the sensor(function for adding
sensor date information).................................6-20
Saving the Sensor Settings
and Images to a USB Memory.........................6-23
Setting the Extended Functions
of the Sensor.....................................................6-33
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information....6-55

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen
This section explains the Sensor Setup Menu (2) [Detail] button
screen, which is displayed by tapping the [Setup] By tapping the [Detail] button, the Program
button when the menu display of the monitor is ON. Details screen opens. The master image can be
confirmed and the program name can be edited.
1 Set the menu display of the monitor ON “Editing a program name” (Page 6-14)
“Copying a program” (Page 6-14)
and tap the [Sensor Setup] button.
“Initializing a program” (Page 6-15)
(3) Master image
Displays the master image registered to the
currently selected program. If no master image is
registered, the [No Master Image] will be displayed.
(4) [Sensor Setup] button
Start the Settings Navigator.
6 “Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the

(5) [Limit Adjustment] button
Various Functions
2 Tap the [OK] button. Adjusts the threshold of the tool registered in
the currently selected program.
(6) [Tool Auto Tuning] button
Performs the auto tuning of the tool registered
in the currently selected program.
“Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting
the Judgment Condition)” (Page 5-18)
(7) [Sensor Advanced] button
The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. Performs the advanced settings for the sensor.
The displayed items are as follows. “Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor”
(Page 6-33)
(1) (8) [Sensor Image History] button
(2) Displays the image history saved in the sensor.
“Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images
(3)
(4)
(9) [USB Memory] button
(5) Operates the USB memory connected to the
(6) monitor.
“Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a
USB Memory” (Page 6-23)
(7) (8) (9) (10) (10) [RUN] button
Starts running the sensor.
(1) Program “Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)
Displays the program number of the selected
program. The program can be switched from
the pull-down menu.
“Changeover for a Target ( Program Functions)”
(Page 6-10)

Changing the Sensor Displayed on the Monitor (Change Connected Sensor Function)
Changing the Sensor Displayed on the Monitor

(Change Connected Sensor Function)
When multiple sensors are connected to a monitor, the sensor displayed on the monitor can be changed.
When direct connection (2 units or more) or network connection is used, this function can be used.
Intelligent Monitor
IV-M30
6
Ethernet switch
Various Functions

Changing the Sensor Displayed on the Monitor (Change Connected Sensor Function)
Changing the sensor to be

displayed on a monitor yyIf the settings for the selected sensor have not
been made, the Sensor Setup Menu screen will
1 Set the menu display of the monitor ON be displayed. For details on sensor settings,
refer to “Chapter 4 Settings Navigator
and tap the [Chnge Connected Snsr]
button. (Setting the Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1).
yyThe sensors displayed on the Change
Connected Sensor screen are those displayed
as the search results of the network search.
Sensors added to the network later can be
displayed on the list by tapping the [Search
Again] button.
yyWhen direct connection (1 unit) is used, this
6 function cannot be used.
Sensors connected to the monitor are listed.
Various Functions
2 Select a sensor to be displayed on the

monitor and tap the [Connect] button.
The screen for the selected sensor opens on

the monitor.

Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the Sensor Connected (List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function)
Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the Sensor

Connected(List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function)
Overview of the List of NG Sensor (1) Sensor list
Display the sensors registered on the List of NG
Occurrences function
Sensor Occurrences. The sensor displayed on
the monitor is shown with the selected status
If the sensor is connected with direct connection (1 (orange). The list for No.1 to 7 differs from the
unit), this function cannot be used. list that includes No. 8 or later.
By using the list of NG sensor occurrences function, (2) Indicator light
the [NG] button (blinking in red) is displayed when Display the status of the sensors registered on
NG occurs on the sensor connected to the monitor the List of NG Sensor Occurrences.
during running.
yyGreen (ON).......No NG occurred.
yyRed (ON)...........NG occurred once or more.
yyRed (Blink)........The number of NG
occurrences increases after
displaying the latest list of NG
6
sensor occurrences.
Various Functions
[NG] button
yyYellow ...........The sensor is not connected
(lighting/ due to a connection error.
blinking) Check the connection with the
Tapping the [NG] button displays the list of sensors
connected to the monitor and their NG occurrence sensor.
statuses can be confirmed. Blinks when confirming
from the list of NG Sensor
zz
If the sensors are registered as No. 1 to 7
Occurrences for the first time.
on the List of NG Sensor Occurrences
Lights up when it has been
(2) (3) (4)
confirmed from the list of NG
Sensor Occurrences.
yyGray..................The sensor has not been
registered, or the information
(1) of the sensor is being
acquired.
(5) (6) (7) (8)

zz
If the sensors are registered as No. 8 or
later on the List of NG Sensor Occurrences
(2) (3)
(1)
(5) (6) (7) (8)

(3) Status (7) [Connect] button

Display the status of the sensors registered on Connects the selected sensor and display the
the List of NG Sensor Occurrences. image on the monitor. If the sensor on which
The status of the sensor is displayed with NG occurred is selected, the sensor is changed
characters. to it.
yyNG: (counts)......The NG count is displayed as (8) [Close] button
a value from 0 to 99999. The
Closes the List of NG Sensor Occurrences
NG count is the accumulated
screen.
value after turning the power
on. If NG occurs 99999 times
or more, the display “99999”
remains.
6 To reset the NG count, perform one of the

operations below.
Various Functions
yyTap the [Clear] button.

yyTurn the power off.
yyInitialize the sensor.
yyNOT SET...........The sensor has not
been registered for the
corresponding number.
yySYS ERR ..........Error number 001 to 128 will
(No.) be displayed when important
or fatal error occurs with the
sensor. If multiple errors occur
multiple times, the lowest error
number will be displayed.
yy CONNECT ERR.....The sensor is not connected.
Or the version of the sensor is
older than R3.00.00.
yyUPDATING........The information on the sensor
is being acquired. Displayed
when the information on the
sensor has not been acquired
just after startup, for example.
(4) Device Name
Displays the device name assigned to the
sensor.
(5) [Clear All] button.
Clears the NG occurrence status of all the
sensors registered on the List of NG Sensor
Occurrences.
(6) [Clear] button.
Clears the NG occurrence status of the sensor
selected on the sensor list.
Setting the List of NG Sensor zz

When specifying the IP address of the
sensor for registering
Occurrences
Tap the [Edit] button.
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the
state that the menu display of the monitor
is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button,
and then the [Display Settings] button.
The screen to input the IP address of the sensor

to be registered opens. Enter the IP address of
the sensor and tap the [OK] button. 6
Various Functions
3 Tap the [Settings] button.
The sensor of the specified IP address will be

registered on the sensor list.
4 Register the sensors on the List of NG

Sensor Occurrences.
zz
When searching for a sensor and registering it
Tap the [Search Sensor] button.
The number displayed on the List of NG

Sensor Occurrences is automatically assigned.
Searching starts and the searched result will be

displayed.

5 Tap the number of the sensor (default 8 To display the List of NG Sensor
value: OFF) displayed on the List of Occurrences screen for startup of the
NG Sensor Occurrences and select an monitor, set [Display on Startup] to [ON].
arbitrary number.
If the sensor was registered by specifying

the IP address, the number is automatically
assigned. Change the number as needed.

button.
6 The system returns to the Monitor Settings
screen.
Various Functions
The selected number will be registered.
6 Repeat step 5 to register the number

of sensors for the List of NG Sensor
Occurrences.
yyUp to 16 sensors can be registered on the

List of NG Sensor Occurrences. Tap the [<<]/
[>>] button to select a sensor detected.
yyTo initialize the List of NG Sensor
Occurrences, tap the [Clear] button.

button.
The system returns to the Display Settings screen.

Holding the Image of the Sensor on which NG Occurred (NG Hold Function)
Holding the Image of the Sensor on which NG

Occurred(NG Hold Function)
Overview of the NG Hold function Setting the NG Hold function
If the NG Hold function is used, an image of the
sensor on which NG occurred during running is 1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the
held and is displayed on the monitor. The state that the menu display of the monitor
image when NG occurred can be confirmed. is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button,

NG occurs during running.

6
Various Functions
“NG HOLD” is
displayed as the 3 Set [NG Hold Function] to [ON].
total status result
and the screen is
held.
To release the image held, tap the [HOLD CLR]

button with the menu display of the monitor set to ON.

button.
The system returns to the Monitor Settings
screen.
yyIf another NG occurs during holding of an NG

image, the NG image will be updated.
yyThe NG hold status will be released with one of
the operations below.
- When the run screen changes to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
- When the external master image registration
is performed.
- When the status output is reset with an
external input for clearing an error.
- When the [HOLD CLR] button is tapped
yyThe statistics display and histogram will be
updated during NG hold.

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
Overview of the program functions Things can be performed with

The sensor can save the judgment condition set in the program functions
the settings navigator as a program up to 32 types yySaves 32 types (32 products) of judgment
(32 products). conditions (programs).
By reading the judgment condition which has been “Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
saved according to each product, changeover can Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1)
be done easily. yyReads and operates the saved program.
“Using the program functions (changing over)”
Sensor
(Page 6-12)
PROG31 : Product XX yySelects the reading method of the program.
••• “Program Switch Method” (Page 6-52)
6 PROG02 : Product C yyNames the judgment conditions (programs).

“Editing a program name” (Page 6-14)
PROG01 : Product B
Various Functions
PROG00 : Product A yyCopies and uses the judgment conditions (programs).

Settings Navigator
*1
yyImaging settings yyReturns the judgment conditions (programs) to
yyMaster image the status before setting.
*2
yyTool settings “Initializing a program” (Page 6-15)
yyOutput Assignment
Sensor Advanced
yyEnvironmental
yySetup Adjustment
yySwitching programs
*1 Includes the focusing position.

*2 Including the threshold of each tool.

Preparing the program functions Preparation procedures

Registers the judgment condition for each product
to the program before running. 1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
(Page 6-2)
Preparation flow
(1) Select a program number 2 Select a program number to register a
judgment condition of a product.
Select a program number to register a judgment
condition from PROG00 to PROG31.
(2) Set a judgment condition in the Settings
Navigator Select the
program
Set the judgment condition for a product in the
Settings Navigator.
6
(3) Select a program switch method
Various Functions
Select a switch method. There are methods
such as switching from the external input line or
switching by tapping the monitor. The program can also be selected from the
[Detail] button (Page 6-2).
The following functions can be used with the

preparations for the program function. 3 Set a judgment condition in the Settings
yyThe product name can be registered to the Navigator.
program.
“Editing a program name” (Page 6-14)
yyTo register a similar product, the program can
be copied, and then the settings can be edited.
yyInitializes and returns the judgment condition
registered in the program to the status before
setting.
“Initializing a program” (Page 6-15) “Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to register programs

for the number of products that are to be
changed over.

5 Select a program switch method. Using the program functions

(changing over)
When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in the

Program Switch Method

“ Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen”
“Program Switch Method” (Page 6-52) (Page 6-2)
yyMonitor/PC........Switching by tapping the
monitor screen or operating 2 Select the program number that the
from the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) product to be judged is registered.
6 or the field network.

yyExternal IN........Switching by inputting signals
from PLC to the input line of
Various Functions
the sensor. Select the

program
6 If the [External IN] is selected in the
program switch method, set the input
terminal.
The bit to be set differs depending on the
The program number can also be selected
product numbers to be registered. while confirming a master image with the
Product numbers to [Detail] button (Page 6-2).
bit to be assigned
be registered
to the input line
(Program numbers) 3 Tap the [RUN] button and the run mode
2 bit0 will start with the new program.
3 to 4 bit0/bit1
5 to 8 bit0/bit1/bit2
9 to 16 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3
17 to 32 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3/bit4
Setup example
When 7 types of products are to be registered,
bit0, bit1, and bit2 are assigned to arbitrary IN
terminals. bit3 and bit4 are not assigned. For details of how to switch from the IV-Navigator
(IV-H1), refer to “IV-H/IV-HG series Series User’s
Manual (PC Software)”.

When the [External IN] is selected in the Program Switch Method
1 Start the run mode.

“Starting an Operation” (Page 5-2)
2 Select the program number to which the product to be judged is registered with the status
of the input line.
Change the input lines IN2 to IN6 which were assigned to bit0 to bit4 in the input settings (Page 6-34)
to the following statuses and maintain the settings. Start the run mode with the new program number.
Program bit4 bit0 Program bit4 bit0
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit3 bit2 bit1
number (MSB) (LSB) number (MSB) (LSB)
PROG00 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF PROG16 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
PROG01 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON PROG17 ON OFF OFF OFF ON 6
PROG02 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF PROG18 ON OFF OFF ON OFF
Various Functions
PROG03 OFF OFF OFF ON ON PROG19 ON OFF OFF ON ON
PROG04 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF PROG20 ON OFF ON OFF OFF
PROG05 OFF OFF ON OFF ON PROG21 ON OFF ON OFF ON
PROG06 OFF OFF ON ON OFF PROG22 ON OFF ON ON OFF
PROG07 OFF OFF ON ON ON PROG23 ON OFF ON ON ON
PROG08 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF PROG24 ON ON OFF OFF OFF
PROG09 OFF ON OFF OFF ON PROG25 ON ON OFF OFF ON
PROG10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF PROG26 ON ON OFF ON OFF
PROG11 OFF ON OFF ON ON PROG27 ON ON OFF ON ON
PROG12 OFF ON ON OFF OFF PROG28 ON ON ON OFF OFF
PROG13 OFF ON ON OFF ON PROG29 ON ON ON OFF ON
PROG14 OFF ON ON ON OFF PROG30 ON ON ON ON OFF
PROG15 OFF ON ON ON ON PROG31 ON ON ON ON ON
yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-37) is [NPN] ON : The state shorted with 0 V line
OFF : Open
yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-37) is [PNP] ON : The state that voltage is applied
OFF : Open
For details of the controlling method and the timing chart, refer to “Changing Over” (Page 7-8).

Editing a program name Copying a program

Tap the [Detail] button in the Sensor Setup Menu Copies a set program to another program number.
screen and edit the program name. Re-uses the set items and creates a new program.
1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen. 1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” “Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen”
(Page 6-2) (Page 6-2)
2 Tap the [Detail] button. 2 Tap the [Detail] button.

The Program Details screen opens. The Program Details screen opens.
3 Select the program to change the name 3 Select the program number to be copied
and tap the [Edit] button. and tap the [Copy] button.
6 Select the Select the
program program
Various Functions
The selected program can be moved by tapping The selected program can be moved by tapping
the [<] or [>] button. the [<] or [>] button.
The screen to edit the program name opens.
4 Select the program number to be the copy
4 Enter the arbitrary name and tap the [OK] destination and tap the [Go] button.
button.
Select the
program
number
For details of how to enter characters, refer to
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-19).
The system returns to the Program Details screen.

the program name might be replaced and The copy source program is copied to the copy
displayed as hyphens (-). destination.
Copied program

Initializing a program
Initializes settings in the program and resets to the
default.

(Page 6-2)
2 Tap the [Detail] button.

The Program Details screen opens.
3 Select the program to be initialized and

tap the [Initialize] button.
Select the 6
program
Various Functions
The selected program can be moved by tapping
the [<] or [>] button.

The system returns to the Program Details screen.
The initialized program becomes [No Master Image].

Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)

(Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
The sensor has a built-in memory for saving images used for judgment. According to the saving condition,
it automatically saves the latest images. The saving conditions are as follows.
yyNG images only (default value).... Saves the images whose total status result was NG.
yyAll images..................................... Saves all the images that were judged.
Loads the saved images into the monitor and the images can be used for confirming the causes and
tendency of the NG result.
The numbers of images can be saved are as follows.
yyColor type...................... 100 images
yyMonochrome type.......... 300 images
The number of images which can be saved when using the FTP client function are as follows.
yyColor type...................... 70 images
yyMonochrome type.......... 210 images
6 Since the memory of the sensor image history is volatile, all saved images are erased when the power
is turned OFF.
Various Functions
To save the images, batch back up the images into a USB memory.
Displaying the Sensor Image History screen

This section explains how to display the Sensor Image History screen.
There are two methods for displaying the Sensor Image History screen.
The [Logging Settings] can be set only when it is displayed from the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Displaying from the run screen
Displaying from the Sensor Setup
Menu screen
1 Tap the [Sensor Image History] button
when the menu display of the monitor is 1 Tap the [Sensor Image History] button in
set to ON. the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
The Sensor Image History screen opens. The Sensor Image History screen opens.

Loading and confirming the saved The View screen opens.

(1)
images
Displays the image history in the sensor.
(2)
1 Display the Sensor Image History screen.
“ Displaying the Sensor Image History screen”
(3)
(Page 6-16)
(4)
(5) (6) (7)
(1) Page number
Indicates the page number of the image history.
(2) Thumbnail images
Displays the number of triggers, total status 6
result, and thumbnail image.
Various Functions
yyIf the function of adding sensor date
When displaying from the run screen, the
information is enabled, the capture date
confirmation dialog appears. Select whether or
information will be added.
not to pause. “Adding Date and Time information to
When the operation is not paused information)” (Page 6-20)
yyThe added or overwritten history image will yyFor details of the number of triggers, refer
not be updated automatically. For updating, to “Displaying the statistical information”
close the history image display once and (Page 5-11).
then display it again. (3) Detailed information
yyWhen the history image is erased by Displays the detailed information for the
overwriting and updating in the sensor selected thumbnail image.
during displaying on the monitor, it may not Displays the program number, program name,
be displayed again on the monitor. number of triggers, status results for the position
adjustment, and the status results for each tool.
(4) Operation buttons
Selects a thumbnail image.
yy[First].................Moves to the first page of the
image history.
yy[<<]....................Moves to the previous page.
yy[<]......................Moves to the previous history.
yy[>]......................Moves to the next history.
yy[>>]....................Moves to the next page.
yy[Last].................Moves to the last page of the
image history.

(5) [Batch Backup] button yyTitle

Backs up the images in a batch. Displays the program number, program name
“ Saving the sensor settings or the image and number of triggers.
history” (Page 6-24)
yyIn the following cases, characters of the title
To back up the images in a batch from are displayed in yellow.
the View screen, the saving target will be yyImages which the tool settings was
[Prog.+Image Hist.]. changed after image history saving
yyWhen Tool Auto Tuning has been
(6) [View] button performed
Zooms in on the selected image history on the yyMoreover, if [Process 1] / [Process 2] /
monitor. [Process] is selected for Tool View (Page
5-8), only the tool window is displayed and
the process contents are not displayed.
6 yyIf the function of adding sensor date
information is enabled, the capture date
Various Functions
information will be added.

“Adding Date and Time information to
information)” (Page 6-20)
yy[<] button (7) [Back] button

Moves to the previous history. The system returns to the run screen or the
yy[>] button Sensor Setup Menu screen.
Moves to the next history.
yy[Save to USB Memory] button
Saves the displayed image to the USB memory.
“‌ Saving the image history individually”
(Page 6-27)
yy[Auto Tuning] button
Performs auto tuning based on the displayed
history.
“‌ Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting
the Judgment Condition)” (Page 5-18)

Clearing the saved images Changing the logging conditions of

Clears the image histories saved in the sensor. the image history
Sets the logging condition (storage condition) for
1 Display the Sensor Image History screen. the image history.
(Page 6-16) 1 Display the Sensor Image History screen.
2 Tap the [Clear] button. Display the Sensor Image History screen from
the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
The [Logging Settings] can be set only when
it is selected from the Sensor Setup Menu
screen.
(Page 6-16)
6
Various Functions
2 Tap the [Logging Settings] button.
The image history will be cleared and the
system returns to the run screen or the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
3 Select a logging condition.
yyAll......................Saves all the images to the

image history regardless of
the status result.
yyNG only.............Only saves the images whose
status result is NG to the
image history.

The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu
screen.

Adding Date and Time information to the sensor (function for adding sensor date information)
Adding Date and Time information to the sensor

(function for adding sensor date information)
Overview for Adding Sensor Date 2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and
Information Function then the [Time] button.
The captured date information can be added to the

image data.
If it is NG, the data can be confirmed on the sensor
image history screen.
If [Time+Date Info] is enabled, the operations are

shown as followed.
yyCapture date information is added to the history
image. 3 Tap the [Time+Date Info] button.
yyCapture date information is added to the file
name of FTP transfer file.
6 yyWhen the file format of FTP transfer file is BMP,
the capture date information is added to the
Various Functions
image data.
yyWhen the results file is also transferred via FTP,
the capture date information is added to the text
file.
yyThe sensor date information is synchronized
with the monitor date information every 3
seconds. 4 Select [Enable] in [Time+Date Info].
yyAfter the date information has been added
once to the sensor, the date information will be
updated even if the monitor is disconnected.
yyIf the sensor is powered off, the date information
will be cleared.
Setting Adding Sensor Date

Information Function

For direct connection (1 unit) 5 Tap the [OK] button.
Returns to the Date Settings screen.
The date information is added to the sensor when 6 Tap the [OK] button.
connected to the monitor. The system returns to the Monitor Settings
screen.
state that the menu display of the monitor 7 Tap the [Close] button.
is set to ON. Returns to the Test screen.


Direct Connection (2 units or more)/ 4 Select [Enable] in Time+Date Info and tap
Network Connection the [Setting] button.
The date information is added to the sensor when

the monitor is started.
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button when

the menu display of the monitor is set to
ON.
5 Register the sensors in a list with date

information added.
zz
When searching for a sensor and
registering it
6
Tap the [Search Sensor] button.
Various Functions
2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and
then the [Time] button.
The sensors are searched and registered in the

list.
3 Tap the [Time+Date Info] button.

zz
When specifying the IP address of the 6 Select [ON] from [Setting] line of the pull-
sensor for registering down menu for sensors which add the
Tap the [Edit] button. date information.
For sensors with IP address specified and

registered, [ON] is selected when it was
registered.
Enter the IP address of a sensor to be

registered and tap the [OK] button.
6
Various Functions
yyUp to 16 sensors can be registered in the

list. Tap [<<]/[>>] to switch the display.
yyTo initialize the list, tap the [Clear] button.
The sensor will be registered in the list. 7 Tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Sensor+Date Info.
Settings screen.

Returns to the Date Settings screen.

screen.

Returns to the Test screen.

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to

a USB Memory
Connect the USB memory to the monitor so that Displaying the USB Memory screen
the data backup, settings data transfer, and screen
This section explains how to display the USB
capture can be performed. Memory screen.
Installing/Removing the USB memory

There are two methods for displaying the USB
Memory screen.
The items can be set are the same for the two
Installing the USB memory methods.
1 Open the cover of the USB connecting

Displaying from the run screen
connector on the monitor. 1 Tap the [USB Memory] button with the
2 Connect the USB memory to the USB is set to ON.
connector.
6
Various Functions
The USB Memory screen opens.
Supported formats : FAT (FAT16) / FAT32
Removing the USB memory
The USB memory can be removed at any time,

except while a progress bar or a dialog indicating that
The [Batch Backup] button, [Individ. Prog.
a saving process is in progress is being displayed. Backup] button and [Transfer Program
Settings] button are available when the USB
1 Remove the USB memory from the USB memory is attached.
connecting connector.

Displaying from the Sensor Setup
Menu screen
1 Tap the [USB Memory] button in the
Sensor Setup Menu screen.
The USB Memory screen opens.

Saving the sensor settings or the 4 Perform the Batch Backup settings.
image history
Backing up in a batch
Backs up the data saved in the sensor into the USB
memory in a batch.
When multiple sensors are to be used, the settings
can be copied based on the batch backup data.
The image history of the batch backup data zz
Folder
can be confirmed by the simulation function of Displays the name of the folder to be created on
IV‑Navigator. the USB memory. "Device name_Last 24bit of
the MAC address" will be automatically set.
6 yyIt is recommended to perform a batch backup
zz
File Name
of the data saved in the sensor in case of
Various Functions
malfunction of the product. Displays the name of the backup file. Tap the
yyThe saving time increases when this is [Edit] button and the name can be edited to the
performed in [During operation]. Execution while arbitrary name.
in the [During setting] status is recommended.
1 Connect the USB memory to the USB “Inputting characters” (Page 3-19).
“ Installing/Removing the USB memory”
zz
Save
Selects the backup target.
(Page 6-23)
yyProgram Only....Backs up the sensor settings
2 Display the USB Memory screen. (the Sensor Setup (Settings
“Displaying the USB Memory screen” (Page Navigator) and Sensor
6-23) Advanced settings of all
programs).
3 Tap the [Batch Backup] button. yyProg.+ .......Backs up all the images in the
Image Hist. image history as well as the
sensor settings.
When the image history has been saved

[During operation], the image being the saving
object may be updated and deleted during the
batch backup. A deleted image is not saved.
Because of this, saving [During setting] is
The Batch Backup screen opens. recommended.
zz
File Size
Displays the size of the backup file (expectancy)
and the free space of the USB memory.

5 After the setting is completed, tap the [Go] Saving the program individually
button.
Backs up the setting data saved in the sensor into
After the batch backup completes, the backup
the USB memory for each individual program.
result appears on the monitor.
6 Confirm the backup result and tap the [OK] The saving time increases when this is performed
button. in [Program]. Execution while in the [Run] status
The system returns to the run screen or the is recommended.
1 Connect the USB memory to the USB
“‌ Installing/Removing the USB memory”
(Page 6-23)
2 Display the USB Memory screen. 6

“‌ Displaying the USB Memory screen” (Page
Various Functions
6-23)
3 Tap the [Individ. Prog. Backup] button.
The Separate Program Backup screen opens.

4 Set the individual program backup zz

File Size
settings. Displays the size of the backup file (expectancy).
zz
Free
Displays the free space in USB Memory.
5 After the setting is completed, tap the [Go]

button.
After the individual program backup completes,
the backup result appears on the monitor.
zz
Folder The program number of the sensor setting
Displays the name of a folder to be created on data saved in individual program backup will
be saved as 00.
6 USB memory. “Device name_Last 24bit of the
MAC address” will be automatically set.
zz 6 Confirm the backup result and tap the [OK]
Various Functions
File Name
button.
Displays the name of the backup file. Tap the
The system returns to the run screen or the
[Edit] button and the name can be edited to the
arbitrary name.
zz
Program number (pull-down menu)
Specifies the program number which is backed
up individually.
zz
Save
Selects the backup target.
yyProgram Only....Backs up the specified
program sensor settings
(the Sensor Setup (Settings
Navigator) and Sensor
Advanced settings).
yyProg.+ ........Backs up all the images in
Image Hist. the image history as well as
the specified program sensor
settings.
When [Prog.+ Image Hist.] was selected in

[RUN] and the backup has been performed,
the image which is the saving object may be
updated and deleted during the operation of
individual program backup. A deleted image is
not saved. Because of this, saving in [Program]
is recommended.

Saving the image history individually

(Page 6-23)
2 Display the zoom-in screen of the image

history screen.
“ Loading and confirming the saved images”
(Page 6-17)
3 Tap the [Save to USB Memory] button.

6
Various Functions
4 Edit the file name as needed and tap the
[Go] button.
The image history will be saved to the USB

memory and the storage result appears.

The system returns to the zoom-in screen of the
image history screen.

Transferring the settings backed up 1 Connect the USB memory to the USB
in the USB memory to the sensor connector of the monitor.
Transfers the setting data (batch backup file) saved (Page 6-23)
in the USB memory to the sensor.
2 Display the USB Memory screen.
“ Displaying the USB Memory screen”
yyOperations cannot be cancelled during
(Page 6-23)
transmission of the settings data.
yyIt is recommended to back up the data saved in
the sensor in a batch beforehand.
3 Tap the [Transfer Program Settings] button.
“ Saving the sensor settings or the image
history” (Page 6-24)
yyThe image data in the image history will not be
transferred.
6 yyThe settings file of a different model of the
sensor cannot be transferred.
Various Functions
yyWhen directly connecting the sensor to the

monitor, the setting file of the sensor with the
FTP client function or a field network enabled The confirmation dialog appears.
cannot be transferred.
yyWhen the FTP client function or field network 4 Tap the [OK] button.
function is enabled, the setting data cannot be The screen to select the setting data opens.
transferred to the sensor during running.
5 Select the batch backup file to be
transferred (*.iva), and tap the [OK] button.

The Transfer Program Settings screen opens.

6 If you would also like to transfer the I/O 7 Confirm the information of the settings file
polarity (NPN/PNP) and the network settings, to be transferred and tap the [Go] button.
tap the [Option] button. After the transmission of the settings data
is completed, the transmission result will be
displayed on the monitor.
When the protocol setting has been changed,

the connection is terminated and the sensor
restarts.
The Option screen opens.

8 Confirm the transmission result and tap
the [OK] button.
Select [Enable] in [Transfer All Settings] and tap The system returns to the run screen or the
the [OK] button. Sensor Setup Menu screen. 6
Various Functions
When [Transfer All Settings] has been set to
[Enable], the system returns to the Monitor
Settings screen.
yyWhen the FTP client function is set to [ON],

the image history will be cleared.
yyThe number of images which can be saved
to the image history when using the FTP
client function are as follows.
- Color type.................. 70 images
- Monochrome type...... 210 images
yyThe setting of [Transfer All Settings] is reset
to [Disable] after the setting data were
transferred or when the setting is canceled.
yyWhen the PROFINET communication is
being used, the sensor restarts.

Capturing the monitor screen and Capturing the screen

saving to the USB memory
Saves the run screen or settings screen of the 1 Enable the screen capture function.
monitor into the USB memory as an image file (BMP). “ Enabling the screen capturing function”
The saved image files can be imported into the PC (Page 6-30)
and used as an image for creating reports.
2 Display the screen to be captured and
tap the title area at the upper part of the
Enabling the screen capturing function screen for about one second.

6 (Page 6-23)
2 Display the USB Memory screen.

Various Functions
“ Displaying the USB Memory screen”

(Page 6-23)
The capture will be executed and the completion
3 Tap the [Screen Capture Settings] button. message appears for a few seconds.
yyEach setup screen can be captured by tapping

the title area.
yyFor the full-screen mode, tap the area where the
zooming rate is displayed.
yyWhen the screen which displays the taken
image is captured, the three types of file (screen
capture (bmp), raw image (bmp), image capture
4 Select the [ON] and tap the [OK] button. file (ivp)) are saved at the same time.
yyFor details of the saved folder or file name, refer
to “Folder composition and file naming rules”
(Page 6-31).
yyIn some cases, such as when choice items of a
pulldown menu are being displayed or during file
processing, screens cannot be captured.
The system returns to the run screen or the


Folder composition and file naming rules
Reference
Data type Storage Rule Description
page
Storage \(Device name of the sensor)_ Batch saves all the
folder (Last 24bit of the MAC address) settings in the sensor.
Batch backup File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *1 [Program Only] or 6-24
[Prog.+Image Hist.] can be
Extension iva selected.
Storage \(Device name of the sensor)_ Save the settings inside
folder (Last 24bit of the MAC address) the sensor by individual
Individual program. 6-25
Program Backup File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *1
[Program Only] or
Extension iva [Prog.+Image Hist.] can be
selected.
6
\(Device name of the sensor)_ Simultaneously saves the
Various Functions
Storage
yyScreen capture (Last 24bit of the MAC address)\ bmp format file for the
folder
(with taken IMAGE taken image and the ivp
6-27
images) File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss * 1 format file which can be
6-30
yyIndividual image used for master image
history storage Extension bmp registration or Tool Auto
ivp Tuning.
yyWhen the sensor is connected
\(Device name of the sensor)_
(Last 24bit of the MAC
Storage Saves an image that the
address)\SCREEN
yyScreen capture folder displayed screen has been
yyIndividual image yyWhen the sensor is not captured as it is including 6-30
history storage connected the title area and the
\IV-M30 buttons.
File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *1
Extension bmp
Storage \(Device name of the sensor)_
folder (Last 24bit of the MAC address) Saves images and criteria
Tool Auto Tuning information of Tool Auto 5-31
File name Paa_Tbb_(Tool name) *2
Tuning.
Extension ivt
*1 Y YYY: Year; MM: Month; DD: Day; hh: Hour; mm: Minute; ss: Second
For individually saving the batch backup and image history, the file name can be changed to arbitrary
name and saved.
*2 aa: Program number (00 to 31), bb: Tool number (01 to 16), Tool name: The tool name which has been
set will be applied as a tool name if the tool name has been set. The tool type will be applied as a tool
name if the tool name if the tool name has not been set.

yyThe numbers of files to be saved in each folder must be 100 files or less.
Files may not be saved correctly.
For the folder with the number of files over 100 files, delete the files and change the folder name.
yyThe total numbers of sub folders and files in each folder (iva files or ivp files) that can be displayed on
the screen to select a file (Page 3-20) is 128.
yyIf characters which cannot be displayed correctly with the current display language (Page 6-62) are
included in the folder or file names, the folders or files will be save with those characters replaced by
hyphens (-).
6
Various Functions

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor
Sensor advanced settings Setup Adjustment

The section explains the Sensor Advanced screen
zz
Tilt Correction
displayed by tapping [Sensor Advanced] in the
Performs tilt correction of the images displayed on
the monitor.
“Tilt Correction” (Page 6-48)
zz
Rotate 180°
Rotates the display of the monitor 180°.
“Rotate 180°” (Page 6-50)
zz
White Balance (for color type only)
Adjusts the white balance for the image displayed
on the monitor.
“ White Balance (for color type only)”
6
(Page 6-51)
Various Functions
Program
zz
Program Switch Method
Sets the switching method for programs.
“Program Switch Method” (Page 6-52)
Environmental zz
Auto Focus Adj Pos
Sets whether or not to share the adjusting
zz
I/O Settings
position for auto focus to all programs.
Sets the input/output settings, specifies the
“ Auto Focus Adjustment Position” (Page
polarity, and sets the I/O monitor.
6-52)
“I/O Settings” (Page 6-34)
zz
Device Name/Pass
Sets the sensor name and password lock. System
“Device settings” (Page 6-38)
zz
Sensor Information
zz
Network Settings
Displays the information set in the sensor.
Sets the network settings for the sensor.
“Sensor Information” (Page 6-53)
“Network Settings” (Page 6-40)
zz
Adv. Network Settings zz
Initialize Sensor
Sets the FTP client function and the field Initializes the information set in the sensor.
network settings for the sensor. “Initializing the sensor” (Page 6-54)
“Advanced Network Settings” (Page 6-41) zz
Update Sensor
Upgrades the sensor software.
“Updating the sensor” (Page 6-54)

I/O Settings Input Settings

Sets the input/output settings for the sensor.
1 Tap the [Settings] button of the input settings.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the
2 Tap the [Environmental] button and then

the [I/O Settings] button.
2 Set the input settings for the sensor.

6
Various Functions
3 Set the input/output settings for the

sensor.
zz
IN1
Sets the detection timing of the trigger input for
IN1 input line.
yyExt. Trigger ↑
Sets the trigger input to the rising edge of the
external trigger.
“Output Settings” (Page 6-36) yyExt. Trigger ↓
Sets the trigger input to the falling edge of the
“Polarity” (Page 6-37)
external trigger.
“I/O Monitor” (Page 6-37)
zz
IN2 to IN6
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] Sets the roles for input line IN2 to IN6.
button. yyOFF
The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen. Ignores the input.
yyProgram bit0 to bit4
Specifies the number for switching the programs.
“ Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)”
(Page 6-10)
yyClear Error
Sets the error output clearance.
yyExt. Master Save
Sets the master image registration from the
external input.

zz
Main/Expansion Simultaneous Input zz
Option
(IV-HG15 (Expansion) only) The input option screen opens by tapping the
[Option] button.
This setting is available only when the
sensor amplifier connected is the IV-HG15
(Expansion).
To prevent mutual interference, set it on the
IV-HG10 (Main).
This setting should be made when the input to
the IV-HG10 (Main) is used as the input to the
IV-HG15 (Expansion).
[Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save?]
Selecting the [Yes] button writes the data to
the ROM of the sensor when the master image 6
registration is performed with the external input
Various Functions
or field network.
“ Registering the Master Image” (Page 7-9)
Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input
If the [Yes] button is selected, imaging and
judgment will be performed at the intervals of
the internal trigger while the input to IN1 is ON.
yy(Setting example) When the [Trigger Options]
is set to [External Trigger] and [IN1] on the “Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)
[Main/Expansion Simul Input] is set to [Yes],
an external trigger input to the IV-HG10 (Main) yy[Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is the
can be copied to the IV-HG15 (Expansion). common setting for programs. It cannot be
yyInput to the line which is set to [Yes] on the set for each program.
IV-HG15 (Expansion) cannot be accepted. yyIf [Trigger Options] is set to [External
Trigger], the IN1 input will be accepted as an
zz
Mutual Interference Prevention (IV-HG10
external trigger.
(Main) only)
yyThe trigger cannot be input via the field
network.
This setting can be made only when the sensor Reset Status Output on Clear Error
amplifier connected is the IV-HG10 (Main).
Execution
Set to prevent judgment error due to If the [Yes] button is selected, output or error
interference of lights of sensors connected to for judgment is set to OFF from when resetting
the IV-HG10/IV-HG15. with clearing errors with the external input starts
If set to [Yes], the IV-HG15 (Expansion) emits to when the status results output with the next
light after lighting on the IV-HG10 (Main) trigger are input.
finishes.
[Close] button.
The system returns to the I/O Settings screen of
the sensor.

Output Settings zz
Common Output Settings
The screen to select the output type opens by
1 Tap the [Settings] button of the Output Settings. tapping the [Common Output Settings] button.
“Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 7-7)
[Latching]
Outputs the result along with the judgment
condition of the sensor.
2 Set the Output Settings of the sensor.

6
Various Functions
[One-Shot]
Sets the one-shot time and ON-delay time in
which output the status output with one-shot.
zz
OUT1 to OUT8 (IV-HG series)/
OUT1 to OUT4 (IV-H series)
Specifies the output format of the output line
with [N.O] or [N.C].
zz
Main/Expansion Logic Out
This setting can be made only when the yyOne-Shot ON Time

sensor amplifier connected is the IV-HG10 Specifies the flash width of the one-shot within
(Main). 1 to 1000 msec.
Set the logic output of the IV-HG10 (Main) and yyON-Delay Time
IV-HG15 (Expansion). Specifies the ON-delay time of the one-shot
flash within 0 to 5000 msec.
For details of settings by the slider or inputting

value, refer to “Editing the value with the
slider” (Page 3-17).

yy AND : Output when output on both the [Close] button.
IV-HG10 (Main) and IV-HG15 The system returns to the I/O Settings screen of
(Expansion) is set to ON. the sensor.
yy OR : Output when output on either the
IV-HG10 (Main) or IV-HG15
(Expansion) is set to ON.
yy OFF : No logic output.
Polarity I/O Monitor

Whether or not the I/O line for control is correctly
1 Select the [NPN] or [PNP] under Polarity. wired can be confirmed.
1 Tap the [Go] button in the I/O Monitor.
yyNPN
Output circuit.....NPN open collector
6
Input circuit........No-voltage input
yyPNP
2 Set the I/O Monitor settings.
Various Functions
Output circuit.....PNP open collector
Input circuit........Voltage input

3 Tap the [OK] button. zz

Input
The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen.
Displays the input status of external input in
real time. Whether or not the ON/OFF output
from the PLC is being correctly input can be
confirmed.
zz
Output
Tap the [ON] button to turn ON the each OUT
output. Tap the [OFF] button to turn them OFF.
Confirm that the PLC or the display lamp is
correctly output.
OUT1 to OUT8 are set on the IV-HG series,

and OUT1 to OUT4 are set on the IV-H series.

[Close] button.
The system returns to the I/O Settings screen of
the sensor.

Device settings Device Name

Sets the sensor name and password lock. The sensor can be arbitrary named and controlled.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the dialog to enter
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the a device name opens.
Sensor Setup Menu screen. Enter the arbitrary name and tap the [OK] button.
2 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then

the [Device Name/Pass] button. yyIf the display language (Page 6-62) is changed,
the device name might be replaced and
displayed as hyphens (-).
yyTo use the PROFINET function, use only “a - z”,
“0-9”, “-”, and “.”. For the setting details, refer
to “IV-H/IV-HG Series User’s Manual (Field
6 Network)”.
yyWhen you changed the device name while the
Various Functions
PROFINET communication is being used, the

sensor restarts.
3 Set the device settings of the sensor.
“Device Name” (Page 6-38)


button.

Password Lock
Sets the password to the sensor to prevent the
incorrect operation.
Correctly use the password lock of the sensor and

the touch screen lock of the monitor (Page 6-61).
yyTo enable the password lock, open the run screen.
yyTo disable, input the password when the input
dialog for the password to disable appears.
yyDuring the password lock, editing the Sensor
Setup is locked ([Sensor Setup] button/[Trig]
button on the run screen, threshold adjustment,
image history view (if unable to log in), clearing
the image history, Transfer Program Settings). 6
yyIf the password lock is temporarily cancelled in
Various Functions
the menu ON screen (Page 5-4), the lock is
cancelled until the system turns to the menu OFF
screen (Page 5-4).
1 Tap the [Settings] button under Security.

2 Select [ON] and tap the [Edit] button.
3 Set a desired password in the password

settings screen.
yyDefault: None (blank)

yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer
to “Inputting characters” (Page 3-19).

The password confirmation dialog appears.
5 Enter the password set in step 3 and tap

the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Security screen.

The password will be changed and the system
returns to the Device Name/Pass screen.

Network Settings 3 Sets the network address of the sensor.

Sets the network of the sensor.
yyFor details of the monitor's network settings,

refer to “Network Settings” (Page 6-60).
yyThe settings are not required for direct connection.
yyHow to use the network setting
yyThe IP address of the sensor connected to the
network can be changed.
yyThe network settings of the sensor can be zz
MAC Address
initialized.
Displays the MAC address of the sensor. The
The settings can also be initialized using the
MAC address cannot be changed.
IP reset switch (Page A-30) of the sensor.
6 yyTo set the IP address before connecting to zz
IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway
the network, it can be set by connecting the
Displays the address for each network.
Various Functions
monitor and sensor directly.

Tapping the [Edit] button opens the screen to
yyWhen you changed the device name while the
PROFINET communication is being used, the edit the address.
sensor restarts. Set the desired address and tap the [OK] button.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the For the port number setting, perform it on the
Sensor Setup Menu screen. editing screen for the IP address.
2 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then zz

[Reset] button
the [Network Settings] button. Tapping the [Reset] button resets the IP Address /
Subnet Mask / Default Gateway.
“Empty” will be displayed after the reset.

button.
yyIf connected directly, the system returns to the
Sensor Advanced screen.
yyIf connected to the network, terminate the
connection to the sensor and reconnect it. If
the reconnection is successful, the Sensor
Setup Menu screen will be displayed. If the
reconnection fails, the Monitor Settings screen
will be displayed.

Advanced Network Settings FTP

Sets the FTP client function and the field network Automatically transfers the image data and status
settings for the sensor. result information saved in the sensor memory to
an FTP server.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the LAN
Sensor Setup Menu screen. Data transfer via FTP
2 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then

the [Adv. Network Settings] button.
FTP client FTP server

6
yyTo use the FTP client function, select [Network
Various Functions
Connection] for the connection setting of the
sensor. During the direct connection, the setting
The Adv. Network Settings screen opens. item is shaded and cannot be selected.
yyIf data are not transferred properly with the FTP
3 Sets the Advanced Network Settings of client function, refer to “Remedy when data
the sensor. transfer via FTP is unavailable” (Page A-28).
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “FTP”.
“FTP” (Page 6-41)

“ Field Network” (Page 6-47)

[Close] button.
The system returns to the Sensor Advanced
screen.

2 Tap the [ON] button in FTP Client. 2 Set the network address of the FTP server.
zz
IP Address
yyWhen the FTP client function is set to [ON], Displays the IP address of the FTP server.
the image history will be cleared. When the [Edit] button is tapped, the “IP Address”
yyThe number of images which can be saved
screen opens.
6 to the image history when using the FTP
client function are as follows.
Set an arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button.
yyColor type................. 70 images
Various Functions
yyMonochrome type..... 210 images yyThe port number setting can be done on the
edit screen of “IP Address”.
3 Sets the FTP setting of the sensor. yyDefault port number : 21
“FTP Destination Settings” (Page 6-42) zz
User Name
“Transfer Condition Settings” (Page 6-43)
Input the user name for logging in to the FTP
“Transfer Destination Folder Settings” (Page 6-45)
server.
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] When the [Edit] button is tapped, the “User Name”
screen opens.
button.
Set an arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Adv. Network Settings
screen.

FTP Destination Settings yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “FTP
Destination”. zz
Password
Input the password for logging in to the FTP
server.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the “Password”
screen opens.
Set an arbitrary password and tap the [OK]
button.

The FTP Destination screen opens.
zz
Passive Mode
To use the passive mode, tap the [Enable] button.

3 Tap the [Connection Test] button to

Transfer Condition Settings
test the connection with the connection
destination. 1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “Transfer
Condition”.
The connection test is performed and the result

window opens. The Transfer Condition screen opens.
2 Set the file transfer conditions. 6
Various Functions
If [Successfully connected.] is displayed, the
setting is completed.
zz
Transfer Condition
When the test is executed, the connection with Selects the transfer condition of image data.
the FTP server, folder creating at the transfer yyAll......................Transfers all the images that
destination, and data file creating are tested. are judged.
yyNG Only............Transfers all the images whose
When the connection cannot be done properly, total status results are NG.
deal with the problem in accordance with the
cause of connect failure displayed on the yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
result window. adjust the processing time so that all the
“ Remedy when data transfer via FTP is images can be transferred.
unavailable” (Page A-28) yyWhen the transfer could not be done on
time, the data are saved in the internal
4 Tap the [OK] button. buffer. The internal buffer can save images
up to 30 images.
The system returns to the FTP Destination
yyImage data are transferred in the sequence that
screen.
they have been saved to the internal buffer.
5 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] yyWhen the remaining capacity of the internal
buffer is insufficient, an FTP error occurs and
button.
the image data transfer fails.
The system returns to the main screen of the
yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
FTP Settings. confirm that there is sufficient storage area
on the FTP server.

zz
File Format zz
OK/NG Criteria Info Addition
Selects the file saving format for image data. Tap the [ON] button to add the tool window
yyIVP (frame) and total status results (OK/NG) to the
Transfers the image data as the format which
image data to be transferred to the FTP server.
can be opened by IV-Navigator. Operation
results can be confirmed in the simulator The setting can be made only when the file
function by using the transferred image data. format is set to [BMP].
Moreover, the image data can be converted to Example of the image to be transferred
the BMP format by using the IVP-Converter.
yyBMP
Transfers the image data as the format which
can be opened by other applications.
zz
Transfer Judgment Results
To transfer judgement results simultaneously
6
with the image data, select [ON].
Judgement results are transferred as a tab Total Status OK Total Status NG
delimited text.
Various Functions
yyIf the imaging area is set to ‘Width: 32 pixel

yyThe example for displaying the saved results or less” or “Height: 24 pixel or less”, OK/
file with Microsoft Excel is as follows. NG will not be displayed on the image to be
transferred. While if the imaging area is set
to “Width: 160 pixel or less” or “Height: 120
pixel or less”, the OK/NG display will become
smaller.
yyIf [Add Time+Date Info] is enabled, the
capture date information will be added at
yyIf the adding sensor date information function the bottom left of the image data. However,
is enabled, the capture date information will if the imaging area is set to “Width: 160
be added. pixel or less” or “Height: 120 pixel or less”,
the capture date information will not be
zz
FTP Error displayed on the image to be transferred.
To turn ON the error output function for when a
file transfer failed, select [ON].
button.
When this item is set to [ON], the followings The system returns to the main screen of the
occur if a file transfer fails. FTP Settings.
yyThe following error messages are displayed
in response to the causes of failure.
- FTP Connection Error
- FTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed)
- FTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data Buffer)
“Remedy when data transfer via FTP is
unavailable” (Page A-28)
yyThe error output function turns ON.
yyThe indicator light of the sensor blinks in red.
yyIf “FTP Transfer Error” has occurred while
the sensor is running, the error condition will
continue until the error is cleared.


Transfer Destination Folder Settings zz
File Name
Sets the file name of the transfer files.
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “Transfer When the [Edit] button is tapped, the “File Name”
Destination Folder”. screen opens.
Set an arbitrary file name and tap the [OK] button.
yyDefault: None (black). Up to 16 characters

can be set.
yyThe transfer file naming rule is as follows.
xxxxxx_AAAAA_BB_CC.DDD
The Transfer Destination Folder screen opens. yyxxxxxx.......The file name which has been
2 Specify the transfer destination folder of

set (up to 16 characters)
yyAAAAA......A sequence number for each
6
FTP server. FTP transfer (5 digits which
Various Functions
zero suppression is not used).
Promptly after startup, “00000”
is displayed.
yyBB.............The program number (2 digits
which zero suppression is not
used)
yyCC.............The total status result
(“OK” or “NG”)
yyDDD..........The extension (“ivp” or “bmp”)
yyIf the adding sensor date information function
zz
Folder
is enabled, the capture date information will
Specifies the transfer destination folder of FTP server.
Set an arbitrary folder name. be added after the total status result (OK or
yyInput is not necessary if the image data is to NG).
be transferred to the root folder.
yyTo specify a subfolder, break it with “/” (one-
byte slash). yyIf there is a file with the same name at
yyIf the specified folder does not exist, a new the transfer destination, that file will be
folder will be created. overwritten. When you transfer image data
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the “Folder” from multiple IV-H/IV-HG series, specify
screen opens. different transfer destinations so that the
Set an arbitrary folder name and tap the [OK] button. image data are not overwritten accidentally.
yyIf the transfer destination folder is read only
yyDefault: None (blank). Up to 16 characters or is opened, an FTP error will occur and the
can be set. image data transfer will fail.
yy“/” (one-byte slash), “.” (one-byte point) and

“ ” (one-byte space) cannot be used as the
first nor last letter of the folder name.
yy“/” (one-byte slash) cannot be used multiple
times in a row.

zz
Fixed File Name zz
Create Subfolder
The file name of the image data to be To create subfolders under the transfer
transferred to the FTP can be fixed. destination folder, select [ON].
If [OFF] is selected, the file name will be the
name set in [ File Name]. yyThe subfolder naming rule is as follows.
If [ON] is selected, the name with the program IVxxxxx
number and total status results removed from (xxxxx is a sequence number created
every time the sensor is restarted or the
the name set in [ File Name] will be the file
FTP settings are changed.)
name.
yyWhen subfolders were created, the folder
structure is as follows.
yyThe transfer file naming rule is as follows:
Root folder
xxxxxx_AAAAA.DDD
yyxxxxxx...............The file name which
6
Transfer destination folder
has been set (up to 16
Subfolder
characters)
Various Functions
yyAAAAA..............A sequence number for 0000

each FTP transfer (5 digits 0001
which zero suppression is
0002
not used).
Promptly after startup, When the file index quantity reaches the index
“00000” is displayed. upper limit, the folder of the next sequence
number is created.
yyDDD..................The extension (“ivp” or
“bmp”) is displayed.
yyIf the file name is to be fixed to the same yyThe default of subfolders is “IV00001”.
name, set [Index Upper Limit] to “0”. If “0” is yyThe upper limit is “IV99999”. When the upper
set, the file name will be as described below. limit has been reached, the count continues
yyIf the file name is set by returning to “IV00000”.
xxxxxx yyThe subfolder name cannot be initialized.
yyIf the file name is not set yyThe upper limit of the count number of folders
AAAAA in the subfolder is “9999”. When the number
is over the upper limit, the transfer stops.
zz
Index Upper Limit
Sets the upper limit of the number of image
data which can be transferred to the transfer
button.
destination folder.
The system returns to the main screen of the
FTP Settings.
When the file index quantity has reached the
index upper limit, as follows.
yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [ON],
the folder of the next sequence number is
created.
yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [OFF],
the file index quantity returns to “0”.

Field Network
Communicates with a PLC via a field network and 2 Select the protocol.
the status result, etc., can be input to the PLC as
communication data.
For the communication protocol, EtherNet/IP(TM)
and PROFINET can be selected.
Host device such as PLC
(EtherNet/IP(TM),
PROFINET master unit)
3 To enable the handshake control, select

[Enable].
6
Various Functions
EtherNet/IP(TM),
PROFINET adapter
Sensor
When the protocol is set as [Disable], this
setting item is shaded and cannot be selected.
yyTo use the field network function, select [Network
Connection] for the connection setting of the
sensor. During the direct connection, the setting 4 To enable byte swap for the data region,
item is shaded and cannot be selected. set [Byte swap] to [Enable].
yyWhen the protocol setting has been changed,
the connection is terminated and the sensor
restarts.
yyFor the details of the field network function, refer
to “IV-H/IV-HG Series User’s Manual (Field
Network)”.
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “Field

Network”.
You can change the order data is stored in
memory:
yyDisable: Last > First
yyEnable: First > Last

button.
The system returns to the Adv. Network Settings
screen.

Tilt Correction
If the sensor cannot be installed in the front of the target due to the installation restrictions of the sensor
and target and/or to prevent a shine on the target’s surface, the image of the target may be trapezoidally
distorted.
The tilt correction corrects these images and displays them without distortion.
Vertical correction Horizontal correction
Indicator light
6 Top view
Top view
Target
Various Functions
Target
Indicator light
Target Target
Lateral view Lateral view
Before tilt correction After tilt correction Before tilt correction After tilt correction
(vertical) (horizontal)

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the zz

Vertical
Sensor Setup Menu screen. Performs a tilt correction in the vertical direction.
Slide the slider to [+] or [-] to correct the display
2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button and of the vertical direction of the taken image.
then the [Tilt Correction] button.
Before correction After correction Before correction

<Image of vertical correction>
zz
Horizontal
Performs a tilt correction in the horizontal direction.
Slide the slider to [+] or [-] to correct the display
The information screen opens. of the horizontal direction of the taken image. 6
Various Functions
4 Image a target to be a reference such as a
piece of paper printed with square grids. Before correction After correction Before correction
<Image of horizontal correction>
yyIf the quality of the taken image displayed on

the monitor is poor, tap the [Image Settings]
button to adjust the taken image.
The following adjustments can be made.
“Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13)
5 Perform the tilt correction. “Lighting” (Page 4-19)
yyMake sure the target fits within the imaging
area after tilt correction. The imaging area
after the tilt correction may have become
narrower than before the correction by the tilt
correction.

button.
zz
OFF
Tilt correction is not performed. After performing a tilt correction, a message
prompting you to re-register the master image
appears.
Re-register the master image after the [OK]
button is tapped.
“ 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
The system returns to the sensor advanced screen.

Rotate 180° 3 Image a desired target.

The image of a target may be rotated 180° and
displayed due to the installation restrictions of the
sensor and target. The rotate 180° function rotates
the image displayed on the monitor 180°.
Indicator light
If the quality of the taken image displayed on
the monitor is poor, tap the [Image Settings]
button to adjust the taken image.
6 The following adjustments can be performed.
yy “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
yy “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13)
Various Functions
yy “Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-19)

yy “Lighting” (Page 4-19)
4 Tap the [ON] button.

The display of the monitor will be displayed with
the image rotated 180°.
Target
Before rotate 180°

correction
After rotate 180°
correction 5 Tap the [OK] button.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the yyAfter performing a rotate 180° correction, a
message prompting you to re-register the
master image appears.
2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button, and Re-register the master image after the [OK]
button is tapped.
then the [Rotate 180°] button.
“2. Master Registration (Registering an
Image as a Reference for Judgment)”
(Page 4-22)
yyIf a tilt correction (Page 6-48) has also been
performed, confirm the tilt correction settings
after a rotate 180° correction.

White Balance (for color type only) 4 Image a white-colored target and tap the
[Go] button.
Adjusts the white balance (color tint) of the built-in
camera of the sensor.
The white balance is adjusted by default.

2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button, and After the white balance adjustment is completed,
then the [White Balance] button. the message "White balance complete." appears.
5 Tap the [OK] button. 6

The system returns to the White Balance screen.
Various Functions
After performing a white balance adjustment,
a message prompting you to re-register the
The White Balance screen opens. master image appears.
3 Tap the [Execute] button. button is tapped.
“ 2. Master Registration ( Registering an Image
To initialize the white balance which has been

set, tap the [Initialize] button and tap the [OK]
button on the confirmation dialog.
If the taken image displayed on the monitor is

not suitable for adjusting the white balance,
tap the [Image Settings] button to adjust
the taken image. Also, if the white balance
has been set to [Enable], the image will be
displayed with the white balance adjustment
applied.
The following adjustments can be performed.
yy “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
yy “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13)
yy “Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-19)
yy “Lighting” (Page 4-19)

Program Switch Method Auto Focus Adjustment Position

Sets the method for switching the program number. Sets whether or not to make the adjusting position
“ Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)” for the auto focus common to all programs.
(Page 6-10)
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
2 Tap the [Program] button and tap the [Auto
2 Tap the [Program] button and tap the Focus Adj Pos] button.
[Program Switch Method] button.
6
Various Functions
3 Set an auto focus adjustment position.

3 Set a program switch method.
zz
Common
yyMonitor/PC.........The program number is
Sets the focus adjustment position common to
switched by the monitor or IV-
all programs. Select this when the focus position
Navigator (IV-H1) operation.
of the target registered in each program is
yyExternal IN........The program number is
common. The program can be quickly switched
switched by the external input.
because re-adjustment of the focusing position
will not be performed when the program number
To use the [External IN], any of the program
is switched.
bit0 to bit4 must be assigned to any of the IN2
to IN6 in the input settings. zz
Individual
“Input Settings” (Page 6-34) Sets the focus adjustment position in each
program. Select this when the focus position
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] is different for each target registered in each
button. program. Re-adjusts the focusing position when
the program number is switched. Switching
programs takes longer in this option due to the
time needed to adjust the focusing position.

Sensor Information
The duration for the operation count of the
focusing function (program switch count) Displays the information set in the sensor.
is 100,000 times. If the focusing position The model, version, serial number, MAC address,
does not need to be changed for each IP address, and device name can be confirmed.
program, set the “Auto Focus Adj Pos” to
“Common” to extend its duration. 1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] 2 Tap the [System] button and then the
button.
[Sensor Information] button.
When the auto focus adjustment position is set

to [Common], a message recommending re-
registration of the master image appears.
6
button is tapped.
Various Functions
The information set in the sensor will be displayed.
zz
IV-H series
zz
IV-HG series
The monitor information (Page 6-64) can be

confirmed by tapping the [Monitor Information]
button at the lower left of the screen.
3 After the information is confirmed, tap the

[OK] button.

Initializing the sensor

Initializes the information set in the sensor and sets
to the factory default.
For details of procedures, refer to “Initializing the
yyThe following settings will not be initialized.

yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 6-37)
yyNetwork Settings (Page 6-40)
yyUse the "Initialize monitor" function to initialize
the information set in the monitor.
“Initializing the monitor” (Page 3-16)
6
Updating the sensor
Various Functions
Updates the operation software of the sensor.

For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information
Monitor Settings Monitor Environment

The section explains the monitor settings displayed
zz
Language
by tapping the [Monitor Settings] button with the
Selects the language to be displayed on the
state that the menu display of the monitor is set to
monitor.
ON.
“Language” (Page 6-62)
zz
Time
Confirms or changes the time set in the monitor.
“Time” (Page 6-63)
zz
Backlight
Sets the backlight of the monitor.
“Backlight” (Page 6-63)
6
zz
Touch Panel Calibration
Various Functions
Adjusts the position to be touched of the
monitor.
“Touch Panel Calibration” (Page 6-64)
System
zz
Monitor Information
Displays the information set in the monitor.
“Monitor Information” (Page 6-64)
Sensor Connect
Performs the settings for connecting with the
zz
Initialize Monitor
Initializes the information set in the monitor.
sensor.
“Initialize Monitor” (Page 6-65)
“Sensor Connect” (Page 6-56)
zz
Update Monitor
Updates the software version of the monitor.
Monitor Device Settings “ Update Monitor” (Page 6-65)
zz
Network Settings
Performs the network settings of the monitor.
zz
Display Settings
Performs the settings for the screens and
buttons to be displayed on the monitor.
“Display Settings” (Page 6-60)
zz
Touch Screen Lock
Sets to prevent the incorrect operation of the
monitor.
“Touch Screen Lock” (Page 6-61)

Sensor Connect
yyIf the sensor cannot be connected, refer to
Performs the settings for connecting with the sensor. “Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is
unavailable” (Page A-16).
When directly connecting with a yyFor the direct connection, the IP address is
sensor (1 unit) automatically set.
yyIf the monitor is directly connected with the
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the sensor when the PROFINET function is being
used, the PROFINET function will stop. To
state that the menu display of the monitor use the PROFINET function again, restart the
is set to ON. sensor.
2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button.

6
Various Functions
yyIf the monitor and a sensor has been

connected directly (1 unit), the [Direct
Connection (1 unit)] will be displayed.
yyPerform the procedure from step 3 only if an
IP address is displayed (network connected).
3 Tap the [1 unit] button and tap the [OK]

button.

After the restart, the run screen or the Sensor
Setup Menu screen opens.

Searching the sensor begins.

When directly connecting with multiple
sensors (2 units or more)

is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button.

result will be displayed.
6 Select a sensor to be connected and tap
the [Connect] button.
6
Various Functions
If the monitor and a sensor have been
connected directly, the [Direct Connection
(2 units or more)] will be displayed.
3 Tap the [2 units or more] button and tap

the [OK] button. yyBy tapping the [LED Blinking] button, the
indicator light of the selected device operates
as described below. Use this function for
checking the sensor.
For the IV-HG series
yyThe indicator light on the sensor head
blinks alternately (green and red).
yyThe indicator light on the sensor amplifier
blinks (orange).
For the IV-H series
yyThe light on the sensor blinks (orange).
The confirmation dialog appears. yyBy tapping the [Device Name Setting] button,
the screen for entering the device name will
4 Tap the [OK] button. open. For details, refer to
(Page 6-38).
“Device Name”
The monitor restarts. yyBy tapping the [Search Again] button, the
search for a sensor will restart.
5 Tap the [Search Sensor] button. The run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu
screen opens.
yyIf the sensor cannot be connected, refer to

“Remedy when direct connection (2 units
or more) is unavailable” (Page A-17).
yyFor direct connection (2 units or more), the
IP address is automatically set.
yyThe sensor on which PROFINET has been
set will not be detected.

When connecting with the sensor via a 4 Tap the [OK] button.
network After the restart, the sensor connection setup
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the zz

screen opens.
Searching for and connecting to sensors on
is set to ON. the network
2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button. Tap the [Search Sensor] button.
6
The searched result will be displayed.
Various Functions
Select the sensor to be connected using the [<]

When the monitor and the sensor are connected or the [>] button and tap the [Connect] button.
via network, the [Network Connection] will be
displayed and the IP address of the connected
sensor will be displayed.
3 Tap the [Network Connection] button and

After connecting, the run screen or the Sensor

When a sensor without a set IP address is

selected and the [Connect] button is tapped,
The confirmation dialog appears. the confirmation dialog appears.
The information dialog appears when the [OK]
button is tapped. The screen to set the sensor
yyIf the FTP client function is to be set to [ON], network settings opens when the [OK] button
select [Network Connection]. is tapped.
yyIf the field network is to be set to Tap the [Edit] button, set the IP address, the
[EtherNet/IP(TM)] or [PROFINET], select subnet mask, and the default gateway, and
[Network Connection]. then tap the [Connect] button.

zz
Specifying the IP address of and
yyBOOTP is used for assigning the IP address connecting to the sensor
to the sensor. Tap the [Specify Sensor] button.
“Settings after initialization” (Page A-30)
yyThe search time is about 10 seconds.
yySearching range and retrievable number of
units are as follows.
yySensor with no IP address (default) :
A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved
within a range that the BOOTP packet from
the sensor reaches (Page A-30).
yySensor with IP address :
A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on The screen to input the IP address of the sensor
the local network to which the monitor is to be connected opens.
connected. Input the IP address of the sensor to be 6
connected and tap the [Connect] button.
Various Functions
yyWhen the [Ping Test] is tapped after the IP
address is input, you can confirm whether or
not a sensor with the specified IP address
exists on the network.
yyTo set a port number, set it using the [PORT]
button.
After connecting, the run screen or the Sensor
If the connection cannot be established, refer

to “Remedy when connection via a network
is unavailable” (Page A-18).

Network Settings Display Settings

Performs the settings of the network address of the Sets the display method of the screens or messages
monitor. to be displayed on the monitor.
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the 1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the
state that the menu display of the monitor state that the menu display of the monitor
is set to ON. is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button, 2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button,
and then the [Network Settings] button.
6
Various Functions
3 Set the individual display item.

3 Set the network address for the monitor.
zz
Manual Trigger
Sets to enable/disable the [Trig] button in the
zz
MAC Address
run screen when the Trigger Options are set to
Displays the MAC address for the monitor. The
[External] or when the [Internal Trigger Control
MAC address cannot be changed.
with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes].
zz
IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway “ Names and Functions of the Operation
Tapping the [Edit] button displays the screen to Screen” (Page 5-4)
edit the address.
Set the arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button. The [Trig] button displayed in the settings
screen cannot be set to hidden.
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] zz
Update Image in RUN Mode
button.
Sets the display to ON/OFF for the taken image
The message "Monitor will be restarted." appears.
to be displayed on the monitor. Usually the setting
is set to ON.
5 Tap the [OK] button. zz
Tool Auto Tuning Guide
Sets the Tool Auto Tuning Guide to show/hide.
After the restart, the run screen opens.
The display automatically turns OFF by tapping the
[Hide Next] button in the Tool Auto Tuning Guide.

zz
NG hold function Touch Screen Lock
Make settings for the NG hold function.
Sets the password on the monitor to prevent
“ Holding the Image of the Sensor on
misoperation of the touch panel.
which NG Occurred(NG Hold Function)”
(Page 6-9) yyTo enable the touch screen lock, turn the screen to
the menu OFF screen on the run screen (Page 5-4).
zz
List of NG Sensor Occurrences function
yyTo disable it, tap the [Menu] button and input the
Make settings for the List of NG Sensor
password.
Occurrences.
yyDuring the touch screen lock, operations other
“ Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of
than the tool selection and image capture are
the Sensor Connected (List of NG Sensor
locked.
Occurrences Function)” (Page 6-5)
zz
Display on Startup
Make settings for the display of “List of NG
Sensor Occurrences” ON/OFF for startup of the
is set to ON.
6
monitor.
Various Functions
“ Setting the List of NG Sensor Occurrences” 2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button
(Page 6-7) and then the [Touch Screen Lock] button.

button.
The system returns to the Monitor Settings screen.
3 Select [Enable] and tap the [Edit] button.
4 Set the arbitrary password in the

password settings screen.

yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer to

The password confirmation dialog appears.

6 Enter the password set in step 4 and tap Language

the [OK] button.
Selects the language to be displayed on the monitor.
The system returns to the Touch Screen Lock
screen.
7 Tap the [OK] button. is set to ON.
screen. 2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and
then the [Language] button.
For efficiently using the touch screen lock and

password lock (Page 6-39),
yyThe touch screen lock function locks the touch
6 screen operation of the monitor to prevent
misoperations of the monitor and the sensor
connected to the monitor.
Various Functions
yyThe password lock function locks the sensor

settings. It does not lock the operations and
settings of the monitor. 3 Select the button of the language to be
yyTo lock editing the sensor settings with multiple displayed on the monitor and tap the [OK]
monitors or the IV-Navigator (IV-H1), use the button.
password lock function. It cannot protect from
the misoperations by the monitor or IV-Navigator
(IV-H1) that the touch screen lock is not applied.
The information screen opens.

After the restart, the display language will be
switched to the selected language and the run
screen opens.
Regarding the display of the characters in device

names (Page 6-38) and program names (Page 6-14)
yyCharacters which cannot be display with
the language after change are replaced and
displayed as hyphens (-).
yyIf the device or program name has not been changed
after you changed a language, those name can be
displayed as they were in the previous language once
you change back a language into the previous one.
yyIf the device or program name has been changed
after the language change, it will remain replaced
by hyphens (-) and the former information will be
erased when the language is changed back.

Time Backlight
Sets the date and time of the monitor. Sets the backlight of the monitor.
yyThis setting is adjusted by default. The monitor recovers from dim mode when the
yyThe date and time information are used for touch panel is operated or when an error occurs
saving files into the USB memory.
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the state that the menu display of the monitor
state that the menu display of the monitor is set to ON.
is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and
2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and then the [Backlight] button.
then the [Time] button.
6
Various Functions
3 Set the backlight of the monitor.
3 Set the date and time of the monitor.
zz
Backlight Brightness
yyMove the input cursor to the item to set by the Adjusts the brightness of the backlight.
[←] or [→] button and enter the numbers. The brightness can be adjusted between level 1 to 7
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of (default : 5).
the selected item. zz
Auto Off
Selects the [Enable]/[Disable] for the Auto Off
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] function.
button. zz
Auto Off Time Delay
The system returns to the Monitor Settings screen. This is available when the [Enable] is selected for
the Auto Off function. Sets the time delay of the
monitor to be dimmed. Also, after 30 minutes since
the monitor being dimmed, the monitor turns off.
Options: 30 sec/1 min/5 min/10 min/30 min
button.

Touch Panel Calibration Monitor Information

Adjusts the position to be touched of the touch panel. Displays the information set in the monitor.
Displays the model, version, serial number, MAC
This setting is adjusted by default. address, and IP address.
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the 1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the
is set to ON.
is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and 2 Tap the [System] button and then the
[Monitor Information] button.
tap the [Touch Panel Calibration] button.
6
Various Functions
The information set in the monitor will be

displayed.
The screen switches to the screen to adjust the
position to be tapped.
4 Follow the message displayed on the

monitor and tap the center of the cross
mark ( ) in order.
The sensor information (Page 6-53) can be

confirmed by tapping the [Sensor Information]
button at the lower left of the screen.
3 After the information is confirmed, tap the

[OK] button.
After the adjustment for the positions to be tapped The system returns to the Monitor Settings
is completed, the message "Touch panel calibration screen.
completed. Touch the screen to exit." appears.
5 Tap the monitor.


Initialize Monitor
Initializes the information set in the monitor and set
to the factory default.
For details of procedures, refer to “Initializing the
monitor” (Page 3-16).
yyThe following settings will not be initialized.

yy“Language” (Page 6-62)
yy“Time” (Page 6-63)
yyUse the "Initialize Sensor" function to initialize
the information set in the sensor.
“Initializing the sensor” (Page 3-15)
6
Update Monitor
Various Functions
Updates the operation software of the monitor.
For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.

MEMO
6
Various Functions

7
This chapter explains how the input / output
terminal controls each operation.
Controlling with
Input/Output Line
Controlling Timing of Judgment

with Triggers.......................................................7-2
Importing the Status Output..............................7-5
Changing Over....................................................7-8
Registering the Master Image...........................7-9
Clearing Errors.................................................7-11
Operations when Power of the Sensor
is Turned on......................................................7-12 7
Input Response Time.......................................7-13
Controlling with the Input/Output Line

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers
For details of the trigger, refer to “Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8).
External trigger
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [External], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of
inputting the external trigger input.
Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4

Min
100 μs Min 1.2 ms
ON
External trigger input (1) (5)
OFF
Processing time
ON
BUSY output (2)
OFF
Max 2 ms
Judgment process (3)

(internal)
Trigger delay
7 Total status output Min 0.2 ms

Status output of each tool ON
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Result from Trigger 4
Position adjustment output OFF
(4)
Output of each logic Max 2 ms

ON
Trigger error output
OFF
(1) Positions the target and inputs external trigger. The shortest input time is 100 μs for ON, and 1.2 ms for
OFF.
(2) BUSY output function turns ON. Processing time differs depending on the settings.
(3) After the trigger delay time (Page 4-8) elapses, the target is imaged and the judgment process is
performed.
(4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is
turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output.
(5) If the external trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error
occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output
Assignment (Page 4-138) under Settings Navigator to [ON].
yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.

When Output Settings (Page 6-36) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 6-36) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe ON status of each input indicates 0 V line is shorted when the Polarity (Page 6-37) is NPN, and
indicates that voltage is applied within the 0 V line when the Polarity is PNP.
yyThe edge trigger for activating timing or in deactivating timing can be set for the external trigger input.
yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared,
when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-36) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to
[One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 7-7).

Internal trigger
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [Internal], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of set
trigger interval.
Internal trigger Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4 Trigger 5
Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval

(1)
Processing time
(5)
ON
BUSY output (2)
OFF
Judgment process (3)

(internal)
Min 0.2 ms
Total status output
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Result from Trigger 4
Position adjustment output OFF (4)
Output of each logic

ON
OFF
7

(1) Inputs internal trigger in the trigger interval being set.
(2) BUSY output function turns ON at the timing that internal trigger occurred. Processing time differs
depending on the settings.
(3) The target is imaged and judged. No trigger delay settings.
(4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is
turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output.
(5) If the internal trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error
occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output
Assignment (Page 4-138) under Settings Navigator to [ON].

yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-36) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to
[One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 7-7).
yyWhen [Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], the minimum input ON time is 1 ms and the
minimum input OFF time is 1.2 ms.
The actual interval from IN1 input to an internal trigger output is within “set trigger interval + 1 ms”.
Set the trigger interval longer than the processing time. If the trigger interval is shorter than the processing
time, the internal trigger will be input during the processing time, so the trigger error will occur.

Operating in the shortest cycle

To input the internal trigger in the shortest cycle and perform the judgment process, set the trigger input to
1 ms. Also, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment of Settings Navigator (Page 4-138) to [OFF] and
ignore the trigger error.
7

Importing the Status Output
Imports the status output assigned to output line of power I/O cable. For details on assigning to output line,
refer to “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-138).
Importing the total status/total status NG output

Total status results of multiple detection tools and position adjustments for the examined target can be
checked.
External trigger/Internal
Trigger 1
trigger
Processing time
White line: OUT 2 ON

Assign the BUSY output OFF
Min 0.2 ms
Black line: OUT 1 ON
Assign the total status/ Previous total status result Total status result of Trigger 1
total status NG output OFF
yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-36) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the 7
output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 7-7).

yyThe total status output turns ON when the total status results were OK.
The total status NG output turns ON when the total status results were NG.
The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
yy[All Tools OK]
When all of the status results of the detection tools and the adjustment result of the position
adjustment result were OK, the total status result is OK.
yy[Any Tool OK]
When any of the status results of the detection tools except that of the position adjustment was OK,
the total status result is OK.
yy[Logic 1] to [Logic 4]
When the logical operation result of the set detection tools was OK, the total status result is OK.
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF
when the program number is switched or external master image is registered.

Importing the individual status output of each detection tool/logic

The individual status result of the detection tool and position adjustment for the examined target can be checked.
Trigger input Trigger 1
Processing time
Black line: OUT 1 ON

Assign the BUSY output OFF
Min 0.2 ms
White line: OUT 2 ON

Previous result Status result of Tool 1
Assign "Tool 1" OFF
Gray line: OUT 3 ON
Previous result Status result of Tool 2
Assign "Tool 2" OFF
Orange line: OUT 4 ON
Previous result Status result of Logic 1
Assign "Logic 1" OFF
7 yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-36) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the
output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 7-7).
yyThis is an example when the status results of Tool 1, Tool 2, and Logic 1 are to be checked individually.
yyThe status output turns ON when the status result of each tool/logic was OK. Turns OFF when the result
was NG or --.
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF
when the program number is switched or external master image is registered.

Changing the timing of the status output

The timing of status output can be selected from the [Latching] which links to judgment and [One-Shot]
which outputs for a certain time. For details on settings, refer to “Output Settings” (Page 6-36).
Trigger 1 Trigger 2
trigger
ON
BUSY output
OFF
Min 0.2 ms
Status output ON
Previous status result Status result of Trigger 1 Status result of Trigger 2
(Latching output) OFF
Status output ON
Status result of Trigger 1 Status result of Trigger 2
(One-Shot output) OFF
Delay time One-Shot ON Time Delay time One-Shot ON Time
yyIn case of [Latching], updates the output by linking with judgment.

yyIn case of [One-Shot], outputs in a set amount of time after the set delay time is passed.
7
yyWhen the program number is switched or the external master image is registered, the status output turns
OFF before each process is completed.

Cancelling One-Shot output
To use the One-Shot output function, the following condition needs to be met.
Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > One-Shot ON Time
If the above is not met, the following One-Shot output that occurs during the One-Shot outputting is
cancelled and is not output.
Trigger 1 Trigger 2
trigger Trigger input interval
(1)
ON
BUSY output
OFF
Internal process of Trigger ON
(2) Status result of Trigger 1 (internal)
1 OFF
Delay time One-Shot ON Time
Internal process of Trigger ON

(3) Status result of Trigger 2 (internal)
2 OFF
ON
Judgment process Status result of Trigger 1
OFF
(1) This is an example of what happens when the trigger input interval is shorter than the One-Shot ON Time.
(2) To perform the One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 1, the previous One-Shot output
is completed, so that outputting can be performed normally.
(3) To perform One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 2, the One-Shot output of Trigger 1
is output. Therefore, the output status of Trigger 2 will be cancelled and it will not be output.
yyIf the BUSY time is not constant, meet the following condition to use it. The system might be affected by
a fluctuating BUSY time.
BUSY time + Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > BUSY time + One-Shot ON Time

Changing Over
Changing Over
Program functions can easily change over by reading out the judgment condition previously saved with the
input line. For details of program functions, refer to “Changeover for a Target ( Program Functions)” (Page
6-10).
Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3
trigger
Min 10 ms
(1) (5)
Program bit0 to bit4 ON
PROG00 PROG01 PROG02
Input OFF
Switching time (T1) Switching time
BUSY output (2)

T2 (4)
ON
Program number PROG00 PROG01 PROG02
OFF
Min 0 ms
Total status output
Previous result Result from Trigger 1
7 Output of each logic (3)
ON
OFF
(1) Keeps the Program bit0 to bit4 input by switching to the state of the program number to be switched.
Minimum input time is 10 ms.
“ When the [External IN] is selected in the Program Switch Method” (Page 6-13)
(2) The BUSY output turns ON while switching the programs. Switching time differs depending on the settings.
(3) The output status (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the switching program is completed.
(4) If the program number is switched during the judgment process by the trigger input, the system cancels
the judgment process (result of Trigger 2 is not output). The switching process is delayed by the
canceling process. Delay is time differs depending on the settings.
(5) If the trigger occurs while switching the programs (during the BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a
trigger error occurs. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-138)
under the Settings Navigator to [ON]. In the case of a manual trigger, the trigger is processed after the
switching program is completed.
yyFor details on T1 and T2, refer to “Input Response Time” (Page 7-13).
yyUse this function during an operation. Programs cannot be switched with the external input during setup.
yyIf the switched program is set to [Internal], the first timing for inputting the trigger after switching the
program fluctuates. A delay of one trigger interval may occur.
yyDo not use with the external master registration input at the same time. The sequence for switching
programs and external master registration process will vary.
yyThe response of an image displayed on the monitor might be delayed until after switching programs (BUSY
output OFF).

Registering the Master Image
The external master registration function can register the master image with using the input line. For details
on master image registration, refer to “2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference for
Judgment)” (Page 4-22).
(1) Trigger 1 (7) Trigger 2
trigger
Min 2 ms
(Min 2 ms)
External master registration ON
(2)
input OFF
Master image registration time (T3)
ON
BUSY output (3)
OFF
T4
Judgment process ON
Image of Trigger 1
(internal) OFF
(5)
ON
Master image (internal) Previous master image Image of Trigger 1
OFF
Total status output
7
ON (4)
Status output of each tool
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2

ON
Error output (6) In case of failure
OFF
(1) Takes an image to be registered as a master image by the external trigger or internal trigger.
(2) If the BUSY output turns OFF, the external master registration input will be input. Minimum ON/OFF
input time is 2 ms.
(3) The BUSY output turns ON and the master registration starts. The master registration time differs
depends on the settings.
(4) The status output (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the master image
registration is completed.
(5) The image imaged in Trigger 1 will be registered as a master image.
(6) If the external image registration is failed, the error output turns ON. Check that the external master
image registration is succeeded with the error output. In case of failure, the image will not be updated
from the previous master image. The error output turns OFF when the external master image
registration is succeeded or by the clear error input.
(7) After the master image registration is completed, the judgment process is performed with the new
master image. Trigger 2 judges the target with using an image of Trigger 1 as a master image.

yyFor details of T3 and T4, refer to “Input Response Time” (Page 7-13).
yyUse this function during an operation. The external master image registration cannot be performed during
setup.
yyIf the trigger occurs while registering the master image (during BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a
trigger error occurs. The trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when
the program is switched, or when the error is cleared. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in
the Output Assignment (Page 4-138) under Settings Navigator to [ON].
y If the external master registration input is input during the imaging process (BUSY) by the trigger, the
y
system cancels the judgment process (taken image will not be registered). After the process is canceled,
the image taken before cancellation is registered as a master image. The master image registration
process is delayed by the cancelling process. Delaying time differs depending on the settings.
yyDo not change over the programs at the same time as external master registration input is being performed.
The sequence of the external master registration and switching programs process will vary.
7 yyIf the external master image registration is to be performed frequently, set [Write ROM when
using “Ext. Master Save”?] of the input option to [No] to protect the nonvolatile memory of the
internal sensor. For details of settings, refer to “Input Settings” (Page 6-34).
Number of times that external

ROM writing Master image is registered externally
master image registration can
settings when power is turned OFF
perform (duration)
The master image is not deleted.
Yes The image can be used as a master image after 100,000 times
starting up the device next time.
The master image is deleted.
No External master image registration needs to be No limit
performed after starting up the device.
yyIf the setting for writing to ROM is set to [No], the image is written to ROM when the system is
in the settings mode. The master image is not deleted once the system is in the settings mode
before the power is turned OFF.
yyIf the setting is set to [Yes], do not turn OFF the power during the master registration time (T3).
Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may be lost.

Clearing Errors
Clearing Errors
If an error targeted for clearing has occurred, outputting an error can be turned OFF by the clear error input.
Error occurred
Min 2 ms
(Min 2 ms)
ON (2)
Clear Error input
OFF
T5
(1) (3)
ON
Error output
OFF
(1) If an error occurred, the error output turns ON.

Error types which can be output are as follows.
yySystem error
yyStartup memory readout error
yyExternal master registration error
yyTrigger error
To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-138) under Settings 7
Navigator to [ON].

yyFTP error
To output the FTP error, set the FTP error within the FTP settings (Page 6-41) to [Enable].
(2) The error output can be turned OFF by the clear error input. Minimum ON/OFF input time is 2 ms.
Errors which can be cleared are as follows.
yyExternal master registration error
yyTrigger error
yyFTP error
The system error/startup memory readout error cannot be cleared.
(3) When [Reset Status Output on Clear Error Execution] is set to [Yes], the status output is reset.
yyFor details on T5, refer to “Input Response Time” (Page 7-13).

Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on
Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on
Operations when the power is turned ON are as follows. Check activation of the BUSY output when
starting operation.
Initializing BUSY
2 seconds or longer 20 ms or longer
RUN Setting RUN System error
ON
Power (DC24V)
OFF (1)
Determine the
I/O settings
(2)
Program number
Trigger Trigger
(3)
ON (4)
BUSY output
OFF
(5)
ON
7
Error output
OFF
(6)
ON
RUN output
OFF Min Min
Min 0 ms 0.2 ms 0.2 ms
Total status output
Position adjustment output
OFF
(1) After the power is turned ON, the I/O Settings (NPN or PNP and N.O. or N.C.) will be determined.
“Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page 3-13)
“Polarity” (Page 6-37)
(2) The program number will be determined. If the program switching condition (Page 6-52) is set to
[External IN], the program number is determined according to the inputting condition of the input line.
(3) BUSY output function turns ON.
yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to OFF, so no changes occur.
(4) The BUSY output turns OFF and the system starts to operate.
yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from ON to OFF.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
By checking the activation of the BUSY output, operation in N.O./N.C. can be checked.
(5) If the startup error is occurred, the error output turns ON during the BUSY status.
(6) The RUN output turns ON when the sensor is running with no system error occurring.

yyThe RUN output, BUSY output and error output will be output from the output line assigned in output
assignment for program numbers (Page 4-138) determined after the power is turned ON. If the outputs
are not being assigned, it will not be output.

Input Response Time
Input Response Time
The following response times are the typical examples (typ.). The response times may differ depending
on the settings or the image processing condition. Control by confirming the BUSY output for securing
from the affect of different response times.
Response time for the switch program input

T1 (Switch program time) = A + B + C + 50 [ms] (typ.)
T2 = 10 [ms] (typ.)
Response time for the external master registration input

T3 (Master registration time) = A + B + D + 50 [ms] (typ.)
T4 = 5 [ms] (typ.)
Response time for the error clear input 7

T5 = 5 [ms] (typ.)
Description for symbols
Symbols Description Time

400 + trigger delay setting time (0 to 1,000) [ms]*
Added when it is input during the judgment process.
Judgment process
A * ‌The trigger delay setting time is only added when [External] (Page
cancelling time
4-11) is selected for the trigger type of the program before the
program was switched.
(Total of the “Registration time × Number of set tools”) + 1300 [ms]*
B Tool registration time Registration time: 100 [ms] (typ.)
* Added when one or more OCR tools are included.
860 [ms] (typ.)
Auto focus position
C Added only when auto focus-type sensor is used and the [Auto
adjustment time
Focus Adj Pos] (Page 6-52) is set to [Individual].
3,500 [ms] (typ.)
Nonvolatile memory
D Added only when the [Write ROM when using “Ext. Master Save”?]
saving time
(Page 6-35) is set to [Yes].

Input Response Time
MEMO
7

8
This chapter explains the specifications and
dimensions of the sensor and monitor.
Specifications
Specifications.....................................................8-2
Dimensions.........................................................8-8
Specifications

Specifications
Specifications
IV-HG Series
Sensor Head
Model IV-HG500CA IV-HG500MA IV-HG150MA IV-HG300CA IV-HG600MA
Type Standard type Narrow view type Wide view type
Installed distance 20 to 500mm 40 to 150mm 40 to 300mm 40 to 600mm
Installed distance 20mm : Installed distance Installed distance Installed distance
10 (H) x 7.5 (V) mm 40mm : 40mm : 40mm :
to 8 (H) x 6 (V) mm 42 (H) x 31 (V) mm 42 (H) x 31 (V) mm
View Installed distance to to to
500mm : Installed distance Installed distance Installed distance
200 (H) x 150 (V) mm 150mm : 300mm : 600mm :
32 (H) x 24 (V) mm 275 (H) x 206 (V) mm 550 (H) x 412 (V) mm
1/3 inch 1/3 inch 1/3 inch 1/3 inch
1/3 inch color
Image sensor color monochrome monochrome monochrome
CMOS
CMOS CMOS CMOS CMOS
Pixel 752 (H) x 480 (V)
Focus adjustment Auto*1
Exposure time 1/10 to 1/50,000 1/20 to 1/50,000 1/25 to 1/50,000 1/50 to 1/50,000
Amplifier type White LED Infrared LED
Light Lighting
8 method
Pulse lighting/DC lighting is switchable. Pulse lighting
Indicators 2 (indicate the same status)
Specifications
Ambient
0 to +50°C (No freezing)
temperature
Relative
35 to 85 % RH (No condensation)
humidity
Environmental
Vibration*2 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes
resistance
Shock
500 m/s2 6 different directions in 3 times
resistance*2
Enclosure
IP67
rating*3
Material Main unit case : Zinc diecast, Front cover : Acrylic (hard coating), Indicator cover : TPU
Weight Approx. 75 g
Sensor Amplifier
Model IV-HG10 (Main) IV-HG15 (Expansion)
Outline, Color area*4, Area*5, EdgePixels, Width, Diameter, Edge, Pitch,
Type
Tool OCR*6, Position adjustment, Hi-Sp.Adj (1-Ax. Adj/2-Ax. Adj)
Number*7 Detection tools : 16 tools, Position adjustment tool : 1 tool
Switch settings
32 programs
(programs)
Number of
Image Color-type head: 100*9, monochrome-type head: 300*10
cases
history *8
Condition NG only/All is selectable
OFF/Statistics/Histograms/Matching list is switchable.
Statistics : ‌Processing time (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of OKs,
numbers of NGs, trigger numbers, trigger errors, judge results list
Analysis information *11 by tools
Histograms : ‌Histogram, matching degree (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE),
numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs
Matching list : ‌‌Adjustment result list by tool, Matching list by tool,
Status gauge list by tool

Specifications
Model IV-HG10 (Main) IV-HG15 (Expansion)

HDR, High Gain, Color filters* , Digital zoom (x2, x4), Brightness correction, Tilt
4
correction, White balance*4, Mask outline, Mask function, Color histogram function*4,
Monochrome histogram function*5, Test run, ToolAutoTune*14, Input monitor, Output
Other functions
test, Security settings, Simulator, Prevention function for mutual interference among
heads, Total status output, Direct connection (2 units or more), List of NG Sensor
Occurrences, NG Hold Function, [Add Time+Date Info] function and scaling function
Indicators PWR/ERR, OUT, TRIG, STATUS, LINK/ACT
No-voltage input/voltage input is switchable.
For no-voltage input : ON voltage 2V or lower, OFF current 0.1mA or lower,
Input ON current 2mA (short circuit)
For voltage input : Maximum input rating 26.4 V, ON voltage 18 V or higher,
OFF current 0.2mA or lower, ON current 2mA (for 24V)
Inputs 6 inputs (IN1 to IN6)
IN1 : External trigger, IN2 to IN6 : Enable by assigning the optional functions
Assignable functions :
Function Program switching, Clear error, External master image registration,
Main/Expansion simultaneous input
Open collector output NPN/PNP is switchable, N.O./N.C. is switchable
For open collector NPN output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA (20mA when
an Expansion unit (IV-HG15) is connected),
Output remaining voltage 1.5V or lower
For open collector NPN output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA (20mA when
an Expansion unit (IV-HG15) is connected),
remaining voltage 2V or lower
8
Outputs 8 outputs (OUT1 to OUT8)
Specifications
Enable by assigning the optional functions
Function
Total judge result, RUN, BUSY, Error, Position adjustment result, Judge result
of each tool, Logical operation result of each tool, Main/Expansion logic output
Standard 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Ethernet*12
Connector RJ-45 8pin connector
Network function FTP client, EtherNet/IP(TM), PROFINET
Power DC 24V ± 10% Supplied from the Main unit
voltage (including ripple)
Rating
Consumption 0.8A or less. 1.5A or less when an Expansion unit (IV-HG15) is connected
current (excluding output load)
Ambient 0 to +50°C (No freezing)*13
Environmental temperature
resistance Relative 35 to 85%RH (No condensation)
humidity
Material Main unit case : Polycarbonate
Weight Approx. 150 g
*1 The focusing position can be automatically adjusted at the time of installation. Disabled during the
operation. The focusing position can be registered by programs.
*2 Except when the dome attachment for IV-HG series (IV-GD05/IV-GD10) mounted.
*3 Except when the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87899/OP-87900/OP-87901/OP-87902) is mounted.
*4 Color type only.
*5 Monochrome type only.
*6 Version 5.00.** or later only
*7 Tools can be installed by programs.
*8 Saves to the memory in the sensor. The images saved in the sensor can be backed up to the USB memory
installed to the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or to the PC by the PC Software for IV-H/IV-HG series (IV-H1).
*9 70 images when using the FTP client function
*11 This can be displayed on the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or by the PC Software for IV-H/IV-HG series (IV-H1).
*12 This is for connection with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the PC Software for IV-H/IV-HG Series (IV-H1).
*13 Attach the sensor amplifier to the DIN rail then set it on the sheet metal.
*14 Tool Auto Tuning can be used with the Outline/Color Area/Area tool.
Specifications
IV-H Series
Model IV-H500CA IV-H500MA IV-H150MA IV-H2000MA
Type Standard range Short range Long range
Installed distance 50 to 500mm 50 to 150mm 300 to 2000mm
Installed distance 50mm : Installed distance 50mm: Installed distance 300mm:
View to to to
Installed distance 500mm : Installed distance 150mm: Installed distance 2000mm:
1/3 inch 1/3 inch
Image sensor
color CMOS monochrome CMOS
Pixel 752 (H) x 480 (V)
Focus adjustment Auto*1
1/10 to 1/10 to
Exposure time 1/20 to 1/25,000 1/10 to 1/25,000
1/50,000 1/25,000
Amplifier
White LED Red LED Infrared LED
type
Light
Lighting
Pulse lighting/DC lighting is switchable.
8 method
Outline search, Color area*7, Area*8, EdgePixels, Width, Diameter, Edge, Pitch,
Type
Tool Position adjustment, Hi-Sp.Adj (1-Ax. Adj/2-Ax. Adj)
Specifications
Number*2 Detection tools : 16 tools, Position adjustment tool : 1 tool

Switch settings
32 programs
(programs)
Image Numbers 100 images*4 300 images*5
history*3 Condition NG only/All is selectable
OFF/Statistics/Histograms/Matching list is switchable
Statistics : ‌Processing time (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of
OKs, numbers of NGs, trigger numbers, trigger errors, judge
results list by tools
Analysis information*6
Histograms : ‌Histogram, matching degree (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE),
numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs
Matching list : ‌Adjustment result list by tool, Matching list by tool,
Status gauge list by tool
HDR, High Gain, Color filters*7, Digital zoom, Brightness correction, Tilt
correction, White balance*7, Mask outline, Mask function, Color histogram
function*7, Monochrome histogram function*8, Test run, ToolAutoTune*13, Input
Other functions
monitor, Output test, Security settings, Simulator*9, Direct connection (2 units
or more), List of NG Sensor Occurrences, NG Hold Function, [Add Time+Date
Info] function and scaling function
Indicators PWR/ERR, OUT, TRIG, STATUS, LINK/ACT
No-voltage input/voltage input is switchable
For no-voltage input : ON voltage 2V or lower, OFF current 0.1mA or lower, ON
Input current 2mA (short circuit)
For voltage input : Maximum input rating 26.4V, ON voltage 18V or higher,
OFF current 0.2mA or lower, ON current 2mA (for 24V)
Inputs 6 inputs (IN1 to IN6)
IN1 : External trigger, IN2 to IN6 : Enable by assigning the optional functions
Function Assignable functions :
Program switching, Clear error, External master image registration

Specifications
Model IV-H500CA IV-H500MA IV-H150MA IV-H2000MA

Open collector output NPN/PNP is switchable, N.O./N.C. is switchable
For open collector NPN output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA,
Output remaining voltage 1.5V or lower
For open collector PNP output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA,
remaining voltage 2V or lower
Outputs 4 outputs (OUT1 to OUT4)
Enable by assigning the optional functions
Function
Total judge result, RUN, BUSY, Error, Position adjustment result, Judge
result of each tool, Logical operation result of each tool
Ethernet*9
Connector M12 4pin connector
Network function FTP client, EtherNet/IP(TM), PROFINET
Power
DC 24V ± 10% (including ripple)
voltage
Rating
Consumption
0.6A or less (excluding output load)
current
Ambient
temperature
0 to +50°C (No freezing) 8
Relative
Specifications
35 to 85%RH (No condensation)
humidity
Environmental
Vibration*10 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes
resistance
Shock
500m/s2 6 different directions in 3 times
resistance*10
Enclosure
IP67
rating*11
Main unit case : Aluminum die-casting, Packing : NBR, Front Cover : Acrylic,
Material
Mounting adapter : POM
Weight Approx. 270 g
*1 The focusing position can be automatically adjusted at the time of installation. Disabled during the
operation. The focusing position can be registered by programs.
*2 Tools can be installed by programs.
*3 Saves to the memory in the sensor.
The images saved in the sensor can be backed up to the USB memory installed to the intelligent
monitor (IV-M30) or to the PC by the PC Software for IV-H/IV-HG series (IV-H1).
*6 This can be displayed on the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or by the PC Software for IV-H/IV-HG series (IV-H1).
*7 Color type only.
*8 Monochrome type only.
*9 This function can be used with the PC software for IV-H/IV-HG series (IV-H1).
*10 This is for connection with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the PC Software for IV-H/IV-HG Series (IV-H1).
*11 Except when the dome attachment (IV-D10) mounted.
*12 Except when the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/OP-87437) is mounted.
*13 Tool Auto Tuning can be used with the Outline/Color Area/Area tool.

Specifications
Intelligent Monitor
Model IV-M30
Display 3.5" TFT color LCD 320 x 240 dot (QVGA)
Method White LED
Backlight
Duration Approx. 50,000 hours (25 ˚C)
Method Analog resistive
Touch panel
Actuating force 0.8N or lower
Indicators PWR, SENSOR
Ethernet*1
Connector M12 4pin connector
Japanese / English / Deutsch / Chinese (Simplified) /
Languages Chinese (Traditional)/ Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese /
Korean
Expanded memory USB memory*2
8 Rating
Power voltage DC 24V ± 10% (including ripple)
Consumption
0.2A or lower
Specifications
current
Ambient
0 to +50°C (No freezing)
temperature
Relative humidity*3 35 to 80%RH (No condensation)
Environmental 10 to 55 Hz, 0.7mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y,
Vibration
resistance and Z axes
Drop impact
1.3m over the concrete (2 times each in the arbitrary direction)
resistance
Enclosure rating IP40
Material Polycarbonate
Weight Approx. 180g
*1 This is dedicated for connection with IV-H/IV-HG series sensor.
*2 Use the KEYENCE recommended product.
*3 If the ambient temperature is over 40˚C, use it in the absolute humidity of 40˚C 80% RH or lower.

Specifications
MEMO
Specifications

Dimensions
Dimensions
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Sensor head

yyIV-HG500CA yyIV-HG500MA yyIV-HG150MA yyIV-HG300CA yyIV-HG600MA
2xM4 Depth 3.5 2xM4 Depth 3.5 2xφ3.2 Plate through

Indicator mounting hole
31 24
3.1
2.9 Indicator
12
17.4
(44.3)
38.1
44.3
46.3
51.8
(104.7)
Center of light reception
38.4±1.2
(31)
φ12
17.9
8 24
29.6
35.6
(31)
φ4.8
44.3
Specifications
Minimum
20
Minimum
34.7 20
38.4±1.2 Sensor head/amplifier cable
(93.1) for IV-HG series
2m/5m/10m
yyWith Vertical mounting bracket for IV-HG series yyWith Transverse mounting bracket for IV-HG
(OP-87908) series (OP-87909)
37.9
40
24.5
8.5
(95.2)
5.2
(30.9)
75.2
.2
R2
45
Center of 9
light reception 24
2
2.
φ20
R
32.5
5
14.2
16.3
14.3
38.1
48.1
R
30°
2.
2.1
45
Center of light reception
86.6
(30.9)
R2
(106.6)
.2
8
Minimum 20
Minimum 7.9
19.9
51.1
53
33.7
21.5
9.5
6.8

Dimensions
yyWith Adjustable bracket for IV-HG series yyWith Spread lens attachment for IV-HG150MA
(OP-87910) (OP-87902)
2
φ1
16
14.9
17
29.8 35.2
41.8 24 7.2
* Strut φ12 is not supplied
4.3
5.3
61.3 with the OP-87910
19.6
4.3
46.5
Center of
light reception
4.5
22.2
24.1
4.8
Center of
24.1
light reception
yyWith Dome attachment for IV-HG series (IV-GD05)
WD reference surface
Distance from
82.6
Minimum 20
40.1
8
Specifications
yyWith Polarizing filter attachment for 57
27.3
IV‑HG500CA/500MA/150MA (OP-87899) φ84.3
71
Polarizing filter attachment for IV-HG300CA 43
(OP-87900) Polarizing filter attachment for 4.3
φ8
28
IV‑HG600MA (OP-87901)
84.5
56.5
Center of
light reception
(32.8)
(4.8)
1.9
24
18.4
4.1
46.3
(49.3)
Center of
light reception

Dimensions
yyDome attachment for IV-HG series (IV-GD05) yyDome attachment for IV-HG series (IV-GD05)
with Vertical mounting bracket for IV-HG with Adjustable bracket for IV-HG series
series (OP-87908) (OP-87910)
19.5
30°
Distance from
(78.9)
Distance from
φ12
32.5
φ20
40.1
(5.2)
40.1
(133.2)
16
(71)
55
54.3
32.7
27.4 9.4
74.8
14.7
69.5 (φ84.3)
(φ84.3)
(94.3) * Strut φ12 is not supplied
with the OP-87910
Minimum 20
(84.5)
76
53
47.1
47.1
4.8
33.7
4.8
(84.5)
(129.6)
37.5
Center of
Minimum 20
10.1
8.5
light reception
(82.6)
8 yyDome attachment for IV-HG series (IV-GD05) with
(82.6)
Center of
Transverse mounting bracket for IV-HG series
light reception
Specifications
(OP-87909)
yyWith Dome attachment for IV-HG series (IV-GD10)
(8)
(101.6)
Distance from
(129.6)
61.6
14.3
43.1
38.1
28
26.9
69 15.2
Distance from
(84.3)
40.1
82.1 53
135.1
92.5
64.5
78
34
φ1
53.3
135.1
81.9
Minimum 20
Center of
light reception Center of
light reception

Dimensions
yyDome attachment for IV-HG series (IV-GD10) with yyDome attachment for IV-HG series (IV-GD10) with
Vertical mounting bracket for IV-HG series (OP-87908) Adjustable bracket for IV-HG series (OP-87910)
Distance from WD reference surface
Distance from
2
φ1
61.6
30°
61.6
(78.9)
32.5
φ20
16
5.2
(154.7)
92.5
76.5
75.8
32.4
35.2
99.9 * Strut φ12 is not supplied
27.1 with the OP-87910
40.5 135.1
94.6
135.1
72.3
4.8
Minimum 20
(135.1)
101.3
(154.9)
(135.1)
Minimum 20
53
62.8
33.7
(82.6)
33.9
Center of
Specifications
Center of
light reception light reception
yyDome attachment for IV-HG series (IV-GD10) with

Transverse mounting bracket for IV-HG series (OP-87909)
(8)
(101.6)
(154.9)
43.1
38.1
5
53.3
14.3
26.6
41
94.1
Distance from
(135.1)
61.6
99.5
Minimum 20
Center of
light reception

Dimensions
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Sensor amplifier

yyIV-HG10 yyI/O cable for IV-HG series
61.1
30.3 57.2
Minimum 137.8
(104.7)
90
When using an Ethernet cable

Minimum 118.6
72.6 When using a LAN cable
60.6 DIN rail 36.8
61.8
49.8
Minimum 137.8
When using an Ethernet cable
90
(104.7)
Minimum 118.6
When using a LAN cable
54.9
36.8
61.8
30.3 DIN rail
8 Sensor head/ LAN cable I/O cable for IV-HG series

amplifier cable or
for IV-HG series Ethernet cable
49.8
Sensor head/amplifier cable

for IV-HG series
Specifications
LAN cable
or
Ethernet cable
54.9
I/O cable for

IV-HG series
yyIV-HG15
(32.6)
61.1
30.3 57.2
90
93.8

Dimensions
Optional parts for the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
Dome attachment for IV-HG series Polarizing filter attachment for

yyIV-GD05 IV‑HG500CA/500MA/150MA (OP‑87899)
)
Polarizing filter attachment
4.3
(φ8 for IV‑HG300CA (OP-87900)
Polarizing filter attachment for
IV‑HG600MA (OP‑87901)
.3
φ3
Distance from
40.1
13.7
48.1
23.8
43
7.9
84.3 84.5
18.4
yyIV-GD10
8
34
46.3
φ1 Center of
light reception
Specifications
16.9
Spread lens attachment for IV-HG150MA

Distance from
yyOP-87902
61.6
10.4
23.8 4.3
69.6
64.7
19.6
135.1 135.1
44.4
Center of
light reception
Sensor head/amplifier cable for

IV-HG series
yyOP-87903 yyOP-87904 yyOP-87905
(2m) (5m) (10m)
2000 (OP-87903)
5000 (OP-87904)
(φ12)
38.4 ±1.2 10000 (OP-87905) (38.4)

φ12
φ4.8

Dimensions
I/O cable for IV-HG series Adjustable bracket for IV-HG series
yyOP-87910
yyOP-87906 48.1
19.1 36.9 38.1 4.5
φ4
.4
19.5
27.8
5
(25)
12
φ27
32
3000
3.3
.4
φ1
8.1
35
φ4
4.4
7
Material : A5052
t = 3.0
Vertical mounting bracket for

IV-HG series
yyOP-87908
Bracket
21
Material : Zinc die-casting
* Strut φ12 is not supplied
8
53 Material : A5052 with the OP-87910
t = 3.0
12.5
48
Specifications
30°
R
2.
38.1
2
.2
R2
φ20
5
10°
32.5
4°
R2
.2
5.2
12.5

IV-HG series
yyOP-87909
38.1
2
2.
R
Material : A5052
t = 3.0
12
38.1 2
2.
R
10°
40
35
10°
R2
9
.2
48.1 21

Dimensions
Vision Sensor
yyIV-H500CA yyIV-H150MA yyIV-H500MA yyIV-H2000MA

(102)
R
50
52
0
R5
(108)
41
50 0.4 81.5
10.5 6 3-M3
8
(Depth 6mm)
10.5
20.5
Specifications
50
57.4
32.4
10.5
56 Mounting
adapter
58
1/4-20UNC
(Depth 6mm)
20
45.5 25 4-M4
(Depth 6mm)
81.5 40
52
56
50

Dimensions
yyWith dome attachment

Installed distance: 0 to 50 mm from the front of the dome attachment
Compatible sensor: Standard range type/Short range type
φ134
34.6
62
yyWith polarizing filter attachment

32
8
φ56
Specifications
5
Optional parts for the Vision Sensor
Dome attachment for IV-H series

yyIV-D10
90.4
φ134

Dimensions
Polarizing filter attachment Power I/O cable

yyOP-87436 yyOP-87437 yyOP-87440 yyOP-87441 yyOP-87442
32
(2m) (5m) (10m)
2000
5000
45 10000
φ56
φ15
120 5
φ6.7
150 5
180 5
Front cover
yyOP-87461 L type Power I/O cable
27.1 0.4 yyOP-88036 yyOP-88037 yyOP-88038
(2m) (5m) (10m)
180 5
φ50
5
38.42
φ6.7
120
5 8
150
2000
Specifications
φ15
5000
27 10000
Mounting adapter
yyOP-87460
4-φ3.2
φ6.8 Counterbore depth 3mm
57
1/4-20UNC
(Depth 6mm)
56
20
4-M4
(Depth 6mm)
17 25

Dimensions
Bracket
yyOP-87685
0.4 112.5 56
50
48.4
93
31.6
19.6
99
(99) 58
8
41
82.5
Specifications

Dimensions
Intelligent Monitor
yyIV-M30
102.3
70.56 (2.2)
(Display area)
(13)
1.4
52.12
84
(Display area)
USB port
(52)
R20 26.4
(Excluding the
(109) convexed surface)
8
R50
Specifications
yyWhen connecting an L-shaped Ethernet cable
(24)
(38.2)
50
R

Dimensions
yyUsing the wall mounting adapter

6
2.74
98.7
40
20.2
2-φ3.5
30.3
Mounting hole dimension
2-M3
40
yyUsing the panel mounting adapter

8 119
110
4 22.8
110 4-φ3.5
Specifications
109 100 91.5 110.5 92 +1 100

0
111 +1
0
Panel thickness
Panel cutting dimensions
(40) 1 to 4mm
4-M3
Screw depth 4.2
(97)

Dimensions
yyUsing the DIN mounting adapter

107
35.9
57.1
33.8
Specifications

Dimensions
Optional parts for the monitor
Monitor power cable Wall mounting adapter

yyOP-87443 yyOP-87444 yyOP-87445 yyOP-87464
(2m) (5m) (10m)
4.5
φ3.7
φ9.5
26.7
96.9
2000
5000
10000
Protection sheet
48 8.5
yyOP-87463
73.9 Panel mounting adapter
69.9
yyOP-87465
8
Specifications
50.4
109
t = 0.16
5
Stylus 119
18.5
yyOP-87462
φ7.6 94.7 φ5.6
DIN mounting adapter

yyOP-87466
81.3
9.9
107 30.7

Dimensions
Communication cables
Monitor cable for a sensor with a Ethernet cable

built-in amplifier yyOP-87907 (1m) yyOP-87457 (2m)
yyOP-87450 (2m) yyOP-87451 (5m) yyOP-87458 (5m) yyOP-87459 (10m)
yyOP-87452 (10m) yyOP-87453 (20m)
φ6.4
17.1
φ14.8
φ6.4
φ14.8
1000
2000
5000
47.3 10000 44.7
2000
5000
10000
47.3 20000 47.3
L type Ethernet cable
yyOP-88042 (1m) yyOP-88043 (2m)
L type Monitor cable for a sensor with yyOP-88044 (5m) yyOP-88045 (10m)
a built-in amplifier 35
17.1 33.1
yyOP-88039 (2m) yyOP-88040 (5m)
8
13.4
yyOP-88041 (10m)
32.5
1000
φ6.4
2000
Specifications
8°
35 5000
44.7 10000
33.1 φ15
32.5
φ6.4
2000
φ14.8 5000 LAN cable
8°
47.3 10000
φ15
yyOP-87950 (1m) yyOP-87951 (3m)
yyOP-87952 (5m) yyOP-87953 (10m)
1000 (OP-87950)
3000 (OP-87951)
5000 (OP-87952)
15.5
10000 (OP-87953)
15.5
13.6 44.2 44.2 13.6

φ6.2

Dimensions
MEMO
8
Specifications

Appendices
Status Table.......................................................A-2
and Position Adjustment Tool.......................... A-6
Troubleshooting................................................A-7
Error Messages...............................................A-10
Remedy when the Monitor
cannot be Connected with the Sensor.......... A-16
Initializing the Network Settings
(IP Reset Switch).............................................A-30
Maintenance.....................................................A-32
Index.................................................................A-34
Copyright notice..............................................A-42
STLport.............................................................A-43
A
-IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) - A-1

Status Table
Status Table
Status table
Indicator light of the sensor

(IV-H500/IV-H150/IV-H2000)
Monitor Indicator light of the sensor amplifier
Status screen (IV-HG10/IV-HG15)
type
PWR/ERR OUT TRIG
Waiting for a trigger OFF

*3
Judgment processing Lighting *5
Running *2 RUN
Switching programs (green)
*9 OFF
Registering the external master image
Limit Adjustment TEST
*5
Trigger Options, Master Registration, etc.
LIVE
Setting Automatically adjusting the brightness Blink (green) OFF *13
Setup Adjustment *14
I/O Monitor -
OFF
A Others
Running RUN
Trigger error
Setting LIVE Blink (red) Same as normal
Error External master registration error
System error -
Lighting (red) OFF OFF
Startup memory readout error
¡/Í indicates enable/disable of the input.

ON/OFF indicates the following status. The operation differs according to the output setting (N.O./N.C).
yyFor N.O. ON : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
OFF : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
yyFor N.C. ON : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
OFF : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
*1 Turns ON if the judgment is OK. Turns OFF if it is NG.
When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
“Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-143)
When the position adjustment is NG, the status of each tool becomes NG.
*2 The sensor continues running even during the operation of the [Monitor Settings/Sensor Image
History/USB Memory] screen in the run screen.
*3 Indicates the overall status result of the previous judgment process.
OK: Lighting (green), NG: Lighting (red)
*4 Outputs the status result of the previous judgment process.
*5 Lights (one-shot) by linking to the trigger issuance (external/internal).
When a trigger delay has been set, it lights before the delay.
A-2 - IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) -
Status Table
Input Output
External Total Status / Total status NG /

External Switch Clear
master image BUSY Each tool / Each logic / RUN Error
trigger programs Error
registration Pos.Adj. *1
¡ ¡ ¡ OFF
*4
*7 *8
Í ON OFF
*6 *10 *11 ON
*12
*11 *10
Same
¡ as while
Í Í Í running OFF OFF
*13 OFF
Í
OFF
*15 ← ← ← ← ← ←
OFF OFF OFF
A
Í Í Í Í
Same as normal ¡ Same as normal

ON
OFF OFF
Í Í Í Í OFF
*16 *16 *16
*6 Disregards the input. A trigger error occurs.

*7 Stops the judgment process and switches over.
*8 Stops the judgment process and registers the previously taken image as a master image.
*9 Turns off the light before the process is completed. Until the light turns off, the previous status result
will be displayed.
*10 After the current process is completed, generates the new input.
*11 Do not use. The processing order becomes indeterminate.
*12 Turns OFF before the process is completed. Outputs the previous status result until this turns OFF.
*13 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image will be updated. The Busy output operates.
*14 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image is updated.
*15 While the I/O monitor function is used, only the operation of the I/O lines is confirmed. The assigned
functions will not operate.
*16 The NPN open collector output turns OFF regardless of the output settings (N.O./N.C.) and the
polarity (NPN/PNP) settings.
Additionally, refer to “Chapter 7 Controlling with Input/Output Line” (Page 7-1).

Status Table
Displaying and outputting the status result
Total Status
Judgment of each tool Total Status *2
NG
Status
Display
Output Display Output Output
Judgment Matching rate *1
Waiting for a trigger
-- --- OFF -- OFF OFF
(Not judged) *3
Judge is OK OK 0 to 100 ON
*4 *5
Judge is NG NG 0 to 100 OFF
Unable to judge *6 -- --- OFF *6 OFF ON
*1 yyWhen the setting scale is changed by the Color Area/Area tool, 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected.
yyWhen the setting scale is changed by the Width/Diameter/Pitch tool, 0 to 100/0 to 999 can be
selected.
yyThe matching rate of the Edge tool is the number of detected edges. Selectable scales are as
follows:
0 to 2/0 to 5/0 to 10/0 to 20/0 to 50
yyThe matching rate when the scaling function is used with the Width/Diameter/Pitch tool is based on
the scaling settings.
yyThe cut-off process (Page A-6) may be performed for the Outline tool and Position Adjustment tool.
A yyIf all the text and date matches, the matching rate for the OCR tool will be displayed as 100. If either
the text or date does not match, 0 is displayed. If you set shade contrast to [Enable], the matching
rate is linked to the text and date shading.
*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
*3 In this status, there is no trigger input after the power turned ON, after the program number has
changed, after the master image registered, after the status output reset, or after a shift from the
setting mode to the run mode.
*4 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
*5 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
*6 A
t the time of using the position adjustment/High-Speed Position Adjustment tool, when the judgment
of each tool cannot be determined, it becomes “Unable to judge”. For details, refer to “Displaying
and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment” (Page A-5).

Status Table
Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position

adjustment
Judgment of each tool

Position Color Area/ Area/ Total Total
Window
adjustment Display/output Pos. Adj./ EdgePixels/ Status
protrusion *¹ Outline Status *²
result Hi-Sp.Adj Width/Diameter/ NG
Edge/Pitch/OCR
View judgment OK OK/NG OK/NG
*3
No Status output ON ON/OFF ON/OFF *4
5
View matching rate 0 to 100 0 to 100 -- *
Succeeded
View judgment OK OK/NG -- *6
*3
Yes Status output ON ON/OFF OFF *4
7 6
View matching rate 0 to 100 0 to 100 * --- *
View judgment NG -- -- NG
Failed Status output OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
View matching rate 0 to 100 --- ---
*1 This is an operation for if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the imaging area
(Page 4-18) at the time of position adjustment succeeded.
A
*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
*3 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
*4 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
*5 Setting scale can be changed.
The scales shown below are selectable.
yyColor Area/Area/EdgePixels/Width/Diameter/Pitch: 0 to 100/0 to 200/0 to 999
yyEdge: 0 to 2/0 to 5/0 to 10/0 to 20/0 to 50
yyOCR (when shade contrast is [Enable]): 0 to 100
The matching rate when the scaling function is used with the Width/Diameter/Pitch tool is based on the
scaling settings.
*6 For details of the target’s outline which is protruded from the search region, refer to “Matching rate
at the time of protrusion” (Page A-6)
*7 The judgment cannot be determined if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the
imaging area.

Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and

Position Adjustment Tool
Matching rate at the time of protrusion Cut-off process of the matching rate
The cut-off process means the process where the
zz
When the search region is “Entire”
outline detection process is ended when no outline
When the target outline protrudes from the
exceeding a certain matching rate (cut-off value)
imaging area, the protruding outline is excluded
below the threshold value is found.
from the target for calculating the matching rate.
A matching rate which has been cut off becomes
The matching rate decreases in proportion to
0. Because the cut-off value is linked to the
the protrusion amount.
threshold, the cut-off value is also changed when
Tool window the threshold is changed.
Protruding outline
(excluded from the target for (Cut-off value)
calculating the matching rate) Threshold
Matching
rate
Current
Outline to be targeted
matching rate
for calculating the Cut-off processing range
matching rate (Range where the matching rate
becomes 0)
Imaging area
zz
When the search region is “Partial”
A The sensor searches the outline of the target that
is in the search region. The matching rate of the
target being out of search region will be “0”.
If the target is being protruded from the imaging
area, the matching rate will decrease depends
on how much the target is protruded from the
imaging area.
When the tool window after position adjustment

is protruded from the imaging area, the judgment
display of the Color Area/Area/Edge Pixels/Width/
Diameter/Edge/Pitch tool becomes -- (Unable to
judge) and the status output turns OFF.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Reference
Symptom Check point Remedy
page
The PWR/ERR indicator light An error occurred. Check the Refer to "Error Message".
of the sensor or the PWR
errors from lighting or blinking A-10
indicator light of the monitor
is lighting or blinking in red. in red.
An error message is Check the details of the error Refer to "Error Message".
A-10
displayed on the monitor. message.
Is the power cable correctly Connect the power cable
2-17
The power is not supplied to connected? correctly.
the sensor or monitor does Is the voltage or capacity of Use a power source of the
not turn on. the power source meet the 8-2
correct rating.
specification?
Place a target at the correct
Is the installed distance of the installed distance. The
2-3
target correct? installed distance depends on
the sensor type.
Place the sensor in such a way
Is the sensor view correct? that the sensor view matches 2-3
the target size.
Adjust the focusing position
Is the focus adjustment correct? 4-13
(focus) of the sensor.
Is the brightness adjustment Adjust the brightness of the
An image is not displayed on 4-12
the monitor, or the image is
correct? sensor.
A
abnormal. Is the target or the sensor Devise anti-vibration measures
etc. -
vibrating?
Use brightness correction. 4-28
Does the ambient light affect
the image? Place the douser to prevent
-
the incident of ambient light.
Is the front cover dirty or Clean the front cover. Replace
it with the spare front cover A-33
damaged? (OP-87461).
Is the function of Update Image Set the function of Update
6-60
in the RUN mode set to [OFF]? Image in the RUN mode to [ON].
yyStart the run mode
Is the system in the setting
yyTurn on the power of the 5-2
mode?
sensor again.
If a target is to be imaged
using an external trigger, input
the external trigger. When the
NPN is selected in the Polarity,
The image or the status Is the trigger correctly input? the circuit becomes a non- 2-17
result is not updated. voltage input circuit. When
PNP is selected in the Polarity,
the circuit becomes a voltage
input circuit. Check the cables.
All or part of the settings Complete the settings in
necessary for running have not Settings Navigator. 4-1
been completed.
The NG Hold function is used. Set [NG Hold Function] to [OFF]. 6-9

Reference
page
The status result is displayed Is the function of Update Image Set the function of Update
6-60
but the image is not. in the RUN mode set to [OFF]? Image in the RUN mode to [ON].
The network may be affected
by the traffic in the in-plant
LAN. Configure a local network
-
Image update is slow. Is the network connected to the and confirm the network
(during operation/setting) in-plant LAN? connection only for the IV-H/
IV-HG Series.
Set the function of Update
6-60
Image in the RUN mode to OFF.
The touch screen lock of the
Is the input screen for the monitor or the password lock 6-39
unlock password displayed? of the sensor is enabled. Input 6-61
The monitor cannot be the unlock password.
operated using the touch
The password is lost and cannot Contact your nearest
panel.
unlock. KEYENCE office.
-
Are not there any damage or
crack on the touch screen?
Is the output line correctly Correctly connect to the
2-17
connected? external devices.
A Set the output line and output
Is the output setting correctly
settings correctly in the 4-138
set?
Settings Navigator.
Is the system in the setting Start the run mode
5-2
mode?
Is the threshold correctly set? Set the threshold correctly. 5-17
The status result is not yySet the detection tool correctly.
output. Is the tool correctly set? yySet the position adjustment 4-30
tool correctly.
Set the NPN or PNP according
Is the Polarity correctly set? to the circuits of the external 6-37
devices.
Set the N.O. (normally open)
Are the N.O. and N.C. correctly or N.C. (normally closed)
6-36
set? according to the circuits of the
external devices.

Reference
page
Is the trigger condition set to Select [External] in Trigger
4-8
[External]? Options.
Is the input line correctly Correctly connect to the
2-17
connected? external devices.
Make the input line and input
Has the input setting been
settings correctly in [Input 6-34
An external trigger cannot made correctly?
Settings].
be input. When the NPN is selected
in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a non-voltage input
Has the Polarity been correctly
circuit. When the PNP is 6-37
set?
selected in the Polarity, the
circuit becomes a voltage input
circuit. Check the cables.
The program number cannot Has the switching method for Set the switching method for
be changed with the input the programs been correctly the programs to [External IN]. 6-52
line. set?
Has the input line been Correctly connect to the
2-17
correctly connected? external devices.
Has the input setting been

Set the input line and input A
settings correctly in [Input 6-34
correctly set?
Settings].
When the NPN is selected
in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a non-voltage input
Has the Polarity been correctly
circuit. When the PNP is 6-37
set?
selected in the Polarity, the
circuit becomes a voltage input
circuit. Check the cables.
The monitor and sensor Refer to “Remedy when the
cannot be connected to. Check the cables and settings. Monitor cannot be Connected A-16
with the Sensor” (Page A-16).
Image data cannot be Refer to “Remedy when data
Check the cables and settings. A-28
transferred via FTP. transfer via FTP is unavailable”

Error Messages
Error Messages
Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light

The causes of and remedies for an error can be checked by observing the indicator light.
zz
IV-HG10/IV-HG15 zz
IV-H500CA/IV-H150MA/IV-H500MA/
IV‑H2000MA
PWR/ERR PWR/ERR
indicator light indicator light
On the IV-HG series, the indicator light on the sensor head blinks (red) when the light on the sensor
amplifier is ON (red) or blinking (red).
PWR/ERR
Cause Remedy
indicator status
ON In operation. -
Green
A Blink Setting in progress.
Operation stopped. -
yyTurn on the power of this device.

A system error occurred. yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
A startup memory read error
ON occurred.
yyInitialize the settings.
yyA data abnormality occurred
due to noise or because the yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
power switched OFF while
writing was in progress.
A trigger error occurred. yyThe trigger error can be fixed using one of the
A judgment process is not following procedure.
performed. yyNext normal trigger input
yyIf a target is to be imaged yyClear Error input
using an external trigger, the yySwitching the program number
external trigger will be input yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
Red during a BUSY status. yyDo not input an external trigger during a BUSY status.
yyIf a target is to be imaged yySet the trigger interval of the internal trigger to a value
using an internal trigger, the that is longer than the processing time.
trigger interval will become yyAn error will not occur if the trigger is set to [OFF]
shorter than the processing described in output assignment for the Settings
Blink time. Navigator (Page 4-138).
An external master image
registration error (without yyAn external master image registration error can be
fixed using one of the following procedures.
registered master image)
occurred. The master image is yySuccessful next external master image registration
not updated. yyClearing the Error input
yySwitching the program number
yyThe image to be registered
as a master image was not yyProceeding to the settings screen for sensor
imaged. yyTaking an image to be registered as a master image
and register it as an external master image.
yyThe work memory is
insufficient. yyDeleting one or more detection tools.

Error Messages
PWR/ERR
Cause Remedy
indicator status
The external master image
registration error (with
registered master image)
occurred. The following
errors occurred even though
the image was updated and yyAn external master image registration error can be
registered as a master image. fixed using one of the following procedures.
yyFor the new master image, yySuccessful next external master image registration
the outline cannot be yyClearing the Error input
extracted with the outline yySwitching the program number
tool. yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
yyFor the new master image, yyChecking that the image to be registered and the
the area cannot be extracted detection tools/position adjustment settings are
applicable.
with the color area/area tool.
yyFor the new master image,
the edge cannot be extracted
with the Edge Pixel/Width/
Red Blink Diameter/Edge/Pitch tool.
An FTP error occurred. The
following errors occurred.
yyConnection with the FTP An FTP error can be fixed using one of the following
server failed. procedures.
yyTranfer to the transfer yyClick the [OK] button on the Error screen.
destination folder failed. yyClear Error input.
yyThe transfer speed could
not catch up the sensor
yyResolve the causes of transfer failure.
A
processing speed.
A synchronization error A synchronization error can be fixed using one of the
occurred. following procedures:
The master date and time yyClearing the Error input
in the OCR tool could not yyResolving the causes of the synchronization error
synchronize with the date and yyEnable the sensor add date and time information
time of the PC app. function.
Power is not supplied to this yyConnect the power cable correctly.
OFF
device. yyUse a power source of the correct rating.
Errors in a state that the PWR/ERR indicator light lights in red or blinks in red turn the error output ON.

Error Messages
Confirming error messages of the monitor

Output/
Message Cause Remedy
Indicator
Sensor system error happens. A system error occurred in yyTurn on the power of the sensor
the sensor. again.
Turn on sensor. yyIt is conceivable that a yyIf the same error occurs, contact *1
If not turned on, contact local fault occurred inside the your nearest KEYENCE office.
service center. sensor.
Sensor internal memory reading A memory read error yyInitialize the settings following
has failed. occurred when the sensor the instructions on the screen.
started. yyTurn on the power of the sensor
Turn on or initialize sensor.
yyA data trouble occurred. again.
*1
After this message is closed, yyIt is conceivable that the yyDo not turn OFF the power
[Initialize] button will be power was switched OFF while saving the settings.
displayed. during writing, or noise yyIf the same error occurs, contact
was picked up. your nearest KEYENCE office.
Sensor program xx is damaged. A memory read error yyInitialize the settings following
Initialization is necessary. occurred when the sensor the instructions on the screen.
started. yyTurn on the power of the sensor
After this message is closed, yyA data trouble occurred again.
[Initialize] button will be during the execution of yyDo not turn OFF the power
*1
displayed. program number xx. while saving the settings.
A yyIt is conceivable that the yyIf the same error occurs, contact
power was switched OFF your nearest KEYENCE office.
during writing, or noise
was picked up.
Trigger error A trigger error occurred. yyAn trigger error can be fixed
Judgment processing has using one of the following
not been executed. procedure.
yyIf a target is to be imaged yyNext normal trigger input
using an external trigger, yyClearing the Error input
the external trigger will yySwitching the program number
be input during a BUSY yyProceeding to the settings
status. screen of the sensor
yyIf a target is to be imaged yyDo not input the external trigger *2
using an internal trigger, during a BUSY status.
the trigger interval will yySet the trigger interval of the
become shorter than the internal trigger to a value that is
processing time. longer than the processing time.
yyAn error will not occur if the
trigger is set to [OFF] described
in output assignment for the
Settings Navigator (Page 4-138).
xx does not support the Tool The tool with Tool Auto Select Outline tool or Color Area/
Auto Tuning function. Tuning unsupported is Area tool.
being selected.

Error Messages
Output/
Indicator
Some tools can not correctly An external master image yyAn external master image
judge because of insufficient registration error (with registration error can be fixed
outline extraction amount as a registered master image) using one of the following
result of occurred. The following procedures.
“Ext. Master Save”. errors occurred even yySuccessful next external
(Matching rate is 0.) though the image was master image registration
Check tool configuration. updated and registered as yyClearing the Error input
Some tools can not correctly a master image. yySwitching the program number
judged because area is 0 as a
yyFor the new master yyProceeding to the settings
result of “Ext. Master Save”.
image, the outline cannot screen of the sensor
(Matching rate is 0.)
be extracted with the yyChecking that the image to be
Check tool configuration.
outline tool. registered and the detection
yyFor the new master tools/position adjustment *2
Brightness of brightness
image, the area cannot settings are applicable.
adjustment area is not
adjustable as a result of “Ext. be extracted with the yyAdjusting the brightness of the
Master Save”. Color Area/Area tool. image to be registered properly.
Check configuration of yyThe brightness correction
brightness adjustment. cannot be performed
Some tools can not correctly correctly for the new
judge because the edge master image.
yyFor the new master
A
information is not enough.
extraction amount as a result of image, the edge cannot
“”Ext. Master Save””. be extracted with the
(Matching rate is 0.) Edge Pixel/Width/
Check tool settings. Diameter/Edge/Pitch tool.
Outer master registration fails An external master image yyAn external master image
because image is not captured. registration error (with no registration error can be fixed
registered master image) using one of the following
occurred. The master procedures.
image is not updated. yySuccessful in next external
yyThe image to be master image registration
Outer master registration registered as a master yyClearing the Error input
fails because of lack of work image was not imaged. yySwitching the program number *2
memory. yyThe work memory is yyProceeding to the settings
insufficient. screen of the sensor
yyTaking an image to be registered
as a mater image and registering
it as an external master image.
yyDeleting one or more detection
tools.
Monitor fatal error (XXX) A system error occurred in yyTurn on the monitor power
occurred. the monitor. again.
Contact your nearest KEYENCE yyIt is conceivable that a yyIf the same error occurs, contact
office. fault occurred inside the your nearest KEYENCE office.
Monitor system error happens. *3
monitor.
Turn on monitor.
If not turned on, contact local
service center.

Error Messages
Output/
Indicator
Connecting to sensor… Connection is not possible Refer to “Remedy when the
because there is no Monitor cannot be Connected with
response from the sensor. the Sensor” (Page A-16).
Connecting to sensor Connection is not possible
(XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX)… because there is no
response from the sensor
with the specified IP address. *4
Communication timeout to Connection is not possible
sensor happens. because there is no
response from the sensor.
Data transfer to sensor fails. Connection is not possible
because data transmission
to the sensor has failed.
Specified sensor is being Connection is not possible Disconnect the presently
connected to other PC or because the specified sensor connected monitor or PC and
monitor. is connected to a different then re-connect it.
monitor or a different PC. *4
Only one monitor or PC can
be connected to a sensor at
the same time.
Writing in file fails. File saving to the USB Replace the USB memory.
memory failed.
A Access to file or folder fails. Access to the USB memory yyFormat the USB memory.
failed. yyReplace the USB memory.
Data saving has failed. The USB memory is
If it happens repeatedly: broken.
yyReplace USB memory.
yyFormat USB memory.
Disk space is insufficient. Saving is not possible Increase the amount of free
because the amount of free space by deleting files in the USB
space of the USB memory memory or by formatting.
is insufficient.
There is not enough space to Saving is not possible Increase the free space by
perform individual program because of the insufficient deleting files in USB memory or
backup. free space in USB memory. by formatting.
This file configuration data is for The setting files for a Read the setting files of a sensor
xxxx. different model of sensors of the same model.
This file is not readable. cannot be read.
FTP Connection Error Connection with the FTP Refer to “Remedy when data
server failed. transfer via FTP is unavailable”
FTP Transfer Error Data transfer to the transfer (Page A-28).
(Transfer Failed) destination folder failed.
*2
FTP Transfer Error Data which is larger than
(Insufficient Data Buffer) the remaining storage of the
FTP buffer has been created
and the transfer failed.
Sensor head and amplifier are Connect the sensor head of Connect the sensor head of
not compatible with each other. IV-G Series with the sensor IV‑HG Series.
Connect correct sensor head amplifier of IV-HG Series.
and amplifier together.

Error Messages
Output/
Indicator
No sensor head is connected to The sensor head is not Connect the sensor head.
the connected.
sensor amplifier.
Connect a sensor head to the
sensor
amplifier, and then turn on power
again.
If the problem is not solved,
contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.
The activation of the Expansion The expansion amplifier yyTurn the power off, connect the
unit cannot be recognized. main unit and expansion unit
amplifier cannot be confirmed. correctly, then turn the power
back on.
Check the Expansion unit yyIf the same error occurs, contact
amplifier your nearest KEYENCE office.
connection, and then turn on
power
to the sensor again.
If the problem is not solved,
contact
your nearest KEYENCE office. A
The load operation failed. The file to be imported is Select the setting file is for the
This setting file is designed for not correct. expansion sensor amplifier.
Main
unit sensor amplifiers.
Select a setting file designed for
Expansion unit sensor amplifiers.
The load operation failed. The file to be imported is Select the setting file for the main
This setting file is designed for not correct. sensor amplifier.
Expansion unit sensor
amplifiers.
Select a setting file designed for
Main unit sensor amplifiers.
A connection cannot be Connection with the sensor Check the items below.
established with failed. yySpecify the correct IP address
number **. of the sensor.
Check the following items. yyPower supply for the sensor.
- The sensor’s IP address. yyNetwork connection
- The sensor’s power supply. yyNetwork Settings of the monitor
- The network wiring.
- The network settings of the
monitor.
*1 E rror output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Lighting (red),
PWR indicator light of the monitor: Lighting (red)
*2 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Blinking (red),
PWR indicator light of the monitor: Blinking (red)
*3 PWR indicator light of the monitor: Lighting (red)
*4 SENSOR indicator light of the monitor: Off
Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor
Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected

with the Sensor
Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is unavailable
Status Remedy
yySupply power to the sensor.
yyConnect the sensor and the monitor correctly and directly
with a monitor cable.
“Connecting directly (1 unit)” (Page 2-31)
yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of a
retry, the run screen opens automatically.
yyThe Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel]
button or [OK] button is tapped. Tap the [Connect] button
after a correct connection has been established.
Retries occur repeatedly because
connection is not possible.
The status is as shown below.
yyConnection is not possible after power ON.
yyConnection is not possible using the [Connect]
button of the sensor connection setup screen.
If the problem is not solved using one of the above

A remedies, reset (initialize) the sensor network settings.
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)”
(Page A-30)
yyThe error (381) "Data transfer to sensor

fails." may also be displayed.
yyConnection became impossible after
connection was established once.
yyConnect the sensor and the monitor correctly and directly
with a monitor cable.
yyTap the [OK] button and close the message.
yyIn the case of a network connection, change the
configuration to network connection.
“When connecting with the sensor via a network”
(Page 6-58)
The network is connected to other network
devices such as multiple sensors or
computers.

Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is unavailable
Status Remedy
yyConnect the sensor and the monitor correctly.
“Connecting via network (Direct connection (2 units or
more)/Network connection)” (Page 2-31)
yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of
yyThe Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel]
button or [OK] button is tapped. Tap the [Connect] button
after a correct connection has established.
Retries occur repeatedly because connection
is not possible.
The status is as shown below.
yyConnection is not possible after power ON.
yyConnection is not possible using the [Connect]
button of the sensor connection setup screen.
If the problem is not solved using one of the above

remedies, reset (initialize) the sensor network settings.
(Page A-30)
A
Connection became impossible after

Turn the sensor off, connect the sensor head and sensor
amplifier correctly, then turn the power on.
Communication between the sensor head

and sensor amplifier became impossible
after connection was established once.
yyThe protocol setting for the field network is [PROFINET].
Set the protocol setting for the field network to OFF. To
set to it OFF, a network connection is required.
yyTo use PROFINET, use the network connection.
When the connected sensors were searched for, the

sensors connected to the monitor were not listed.

Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable
Status Remedy
yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network
equipment.
yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of
The Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel]

Retries occur repeatedly because
button or [OK] button is tapped.
connection is not possible after the power is
turned on.
A yyTap the [Connect] button after a correct connection has

established.
yyTap the [Search Sensor] button to search for the sensor.

“Searching for and connecting to sensors on the
network” (Page 6-58)
If a connection is unavailable, refer to “When the
connection cannot be established by searching for the
yyAn error (381) "Data transfer to sensor
sensor” (Page A-19).
fails." may also be displayed.
yyConnection became impossible after yyTap the [Specify Sensor] button to connect the sensor.
“Specifying the IP address of and connecting to the
sensor” (Page 6-59)
connection cannot be established by specifying the

Status Remedy
When the connection cannot be established by
searching for the sensor
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network
equipment.
“Connecting via network (Direct connection (2 units
or more)/Network connection)” (Page 2-31)
yyConfirm that the IP address of the monitor does not
The sensor was not found using the [Search coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also,
Sensor] button on the Sensor Connect correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway.
screen. “Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor”
(Page A-25)
yyChange to direct connection (“1 unit” or “2 units or more”)
and confirm that the IP address of the sensor does not
coincide with that of the monitor or another device. Also,
reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor.
“When directly connecting with a sensor (1 unit)” (Page
6-56)
“When directly connecting with multiple sensors (2
units or more)” (Page 6-57)
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor”
(Page A-26)
A
(Page A-30)
yyThe following conditions are required for a successful
sensor search.
yyThe subnet masks of the sensor and monitor are matched.
yyThe sensor network setting is not set or the IP address
is not duplicated.

Status Remedy
When the connection cannot be established by
specifying the sensor
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment.
“Connecting via network (Direct connection (2 units
or more)/Network connection)” (Page 2-31)
yySpecify the correct IP address of the sensor.
yyIf the sensor IP address has not been set, establish a
Connection is not possible using the [Specify
connection using the [Search Sensor] button.
Sensor] button or the [Connect] button on

“Searching for and connecting to sensors on the network”
the Sensor Connect screen.
(Page 6-58)
yyConfirm that the IP address of the monitor does not
coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also,
correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway.
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor”
(Page A-25)
yyChange to direct connection (“1 unit” or “2 units or more”)
and confirm that the IP address of the sensor does not
coincide with that of the monitor or another device. Also,
A correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway.

Also, reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor.
“When directly connecting with a sensor (1 unit)”
(Page 6-56)
“When directly connecting with multiple sensors (2 units
or more)” (Page 6-57)
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor”
(Page A-26)
(Page A-30)
yyTap the [Search Sensor] button to search for the sensor.

“Searching for and connecting to sensors on the
network” (Page 6-58)
connection cannot be established by searching for the
yyTap the [Specify Sensor] button to connect.
“Specifying the IP address of and connecting to the sensor”
First connection after purchasing, or (Page 6-59)
connection after monitor initialization. If a connection is unavailable, refer to “When the
connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor”
(Page A-20).

Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light

Displays the link status with the network.
zz
IV-HG10/IV-HG15 zz
IV‑H2000MA
LINK/ACT LINK/ACT indicator

indicator light light
Status of the
LINK/ACT Status Remedy
indicator light
ON
Correct link with the monitor A
or the Ethernet switch.
Link is normal.
Green Correct link with the monitor When connection with the monitor is not possible, check
or the Ethernet switch. the STATUS indicator light.
Blink
Data are being sent and
received.
No correct link with the
monitor or the Ethernet
switch.
yySupply power to the monitor or the Ethernet switch of
OFF yyPower is not supplied to this
the connection target.
unit or the connection target.
yyConnect the cable correctly.
yyThe cable is not connected
correctly.

STATUS indicator light

Indicates the connection status with the monitor.
Confirm that the LINK/ACT indicator light is green (lighting) or green (blinking) and then check the STATUS
indicator light.
zz
IV-HG10/IV-HG15 zz
IV‑H2000MA
STATUS indicator STATUS indicator

light light
Status of the STATUS

Status Remedy
indicator light
Correct connection with the monitor.
The connection with the monitor
A ON
has been established by acquiring
-
the IP address.
For direct connection (1 unit)
“Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is
Green No correct connection with the unavailable” (Page A-16)
monitor.
For direct connection (2 units or more)
The IP address of the sensor has
Blink “Remedy when direct connection (2 units or
been acquired, but connection
more) is unavailable” (Page A-17)
with the monitor has not been
established. For network connection
“Remedy when connection via a network is
“Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is
No correct connection with the
monitor.
OFF “Remedy when direct connection (2 units or
The IP address of the sensor has
more) is unavailable” (Page A-17)
not been acquired.
For network connection
If the light is ON (red), the IP address coincides or a network loop is detected.
yyThe communication timeout time is 1 minute.

yyDuring the timeout interval after trouble has occurred, the monitor screen may fail to be updated while
the STATUS indicator light turned on, or the monitor may not accept an operation.
yyDuring the timeout interval, devices other than the previously connected monitor cannot be connected.

Confirming the status by observing the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor
The causes of an unavailable connection and countermeasures can be confirmed by checking the
SENSOR indicator light of the monitor.
SENSOR indicator light
Status of
the SENSOR Status Remedy
indicator light
Correct connection with the
ON -
sensor.
No correct connection with the “Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is
Green
sensor.
The link with the sensor or
A
Blink the Ethernet switch has been “Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is
established, but connection unavailable” (Page A-17)
with the sensor has not been For network connection
established. “Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable”
(Page A-18)
No correct connection with the
yySupply power to the monitor.
sensor.
yySupply power to the sensor or the Ethernet switch of
OFF The link with the sensor or the
the connection target.
Ethernet switch has not been
yyConnect the cable correctly.
established.
yyThe communication timeout interval is 1 minute.

yyDuring the timeout interval after trouble has occurred, the screen may fail to be updated while the
SENSOR indicator light in on, or the monitor may not accept an operation.

Other methods of confirming 3 Input the IP address of the sensor whose

a network connection existence is to be confirmed and tap the
[Ping Test] button.
Confirming the existence of the sensor

from the monitor
Whether or not the sensor is correctly connected can
be confirmed by performing a test communication
from the monitor to the sensor to be connected.
1 Displays the Sensor Connect screen.

The confirmation result will be displayed on the
monitor.
zz
When the confirmation result is “OK”
zz
When the confirmation result is “NG”
zz
For the first startup of the monitor or after
monitor initialization

If the displayed confirmation result is
A “Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(Network Connection)” (Page 3-9)
“NG”
Confirm the following contents.
zz
If not connected with the sensor via a
yySupply power to the sensor and the network
network
equipment.
Automatically opens after the power is turned on.
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the
zz
If connected with the sensor via a network network equipment.
“ When connecting with the sensor via a “ Connecting via network (Direct connection
network” (Page 6-58) (2 units or more)/Network connection)”
(Page 2-31)
When the monitor and the sensor are connected yyCorrectly set the IP address, the subnet mask,
via a network, the [Network Connection] will be and the default gateway of the monitor and
displayed and the IP address of the connected sensor.
sensor will be displayed. “Searching for a sensor to be connected”
(Page 3-10)
2 Tap the [Specify Sensor] button. “Confirming/Setting the IP address of the
monitor” (Page A-25)
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the
sensor” (Page A-26)
The existence confirmation function utilizes the ping

command. Note that even when this is executed
for devices other than a sensor, confirmation will
succeed if there is a response to the ping command.

Confirming/Setting the IP address of 4 After confirmation/setting is completed,

the monitor
yyIf the setting has not been changed, system
1 Open the Monitor Device Settings screen. returns to the Monitor Settings screen.
yyIf the setting has been changed, the message
zz
If not connected with the sensor via "Monitor will be restarted." appears.
network
After the power turned on, the Sensor Connect 5 Tap the [OK] button if the setting has been
screen opens automatically. Tap the [Monitor changed.
Device Settings] button. The monitor restarts.
zz
If connected with the sensor via a network zz
If the monitor could be connected with the
“Monitor Settings” (Page 6-55) sensor
The run screen opens.
2 Tap the [Network Settings] button. zz
If the monitor could not be connected with
the sensor
The Sensor Connect screen opens. Set the
connection method etc. and connect the monitor
with the sensor.
“Sensor Connect” (Page 6-55)
A
The monitor network setting screen opens. For details of the connection method after initial
startup of the monitor or after monitor initialization
3 Confirm the IP address of the monitor. (Page 3-16), refer to “Operation for initial startup
of the monitor (Network Connection)” (Page 3-9).
To change the settings, tap the [Edit] button

and display the editing screen. Set an arbitrary
address and tap the [OK] button.

Confirming/Setting the IP address of 5 Confirm the IP address of the sensor.

the sensor
Directly connect (1 unit) the sensor and monitor,
and confirm the IP address of the sensor.
After returning to the network connection, set
the confirmed IP address of the sensor, and then
confirm whether or not to connect with the sensor.
1 Directly connect (1 unit) the monitor and yyTapping the [Edit] button displays the screen
the sensor of the confirmation/setting to edit the address. Set the arbitrary address
target. and tap the [OK] button.
yyWhen the [Reset] button is tapped, the setup
values for the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and
“When directly connecting with a sensor [Default Gateway] will be reset and nothing will
(1 unit)” (Page 6-56) be set. Again, set an arbitrary address.
2 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen. 6 After confirmation/setting is completed, tap
the [OK] button and exit from the network
(Page 6-2) settings.
3 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button. 7 Turn OFF the power and connect the
sensor and monitor via a network.
A “Connecting via network (Direct connection
(2 units or more)/Network connection)”
(Page 2-31)
8 Turn on the power.

zz
If the monitor could be connected with the
sensor
The run screen opens.
4 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then zz

If the monitor could not be connected with
the sensor
the [Network Settings] button.
The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. Set the
connection method etc. and connect with the
sensor.

Confirming the router settings

When a router is used, confirm that the following
port is opened.
Sensor : 63000 (default value)
For the setting methods of the sensor port

number, refer to the following.
yyBOOTP is fixed as 67 or 68.
yyThe FTP port number can be changed on the
server. It is generally 20 or 21.

Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable
Status Remedy
yyConfirm the IP address of the FTP server and set it
correctly.
yyConfirm the port number of the FTP server and set it
correctly. Moreover, confirm the firewall software on the
PC whether the port is available or not.
yyConfirm the user name for logging in to the FTP server
and set it correctly.
yyConfirm the password for logging in to the FTP server
and set it correctly.
Connection with the FTP server failed.
“FTP Destination Settings” (Page 6-42)

A yyAuthorization for accessing the transfer destination folder
is not granted. Acquire the access authorization of the
transfer destination folder and perform the operation
again.
yyConfirm that there is no file with the same name as the
transfer destination folder name which has been set. If a
file with the same name exists, change the file name or
change the transfer destination folder.
“Transfer Destination Folder Settings” (Page 6-45)
Data transfer to the transfer destination
yyWhen you switched from the [Run] screen to the
folder failed.
[Program] screen, the screen is switched to the [Program]
screen after the transfer of untransferred data has
finished.
If you click the [Cancel] button during the transfer, the

transfer will be forcibly finished and the Error screen will
appear.

Status Remedy
yyChange the trigger cycle of the sensor.
“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-11)
yyConfirm the stress status of the network.
Data which is larger than the remaining

storage of the FTP buffer has been created
and the transfer failed.

Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)
The network settings such as the IP address can zz

Fixed IP address
be initialized to the factory default by means of the Assign a fixed IP address. Selection is not
IP reset switch of the sensor. A fixed IP address can necessary when connecting to the monitor (IV-M30).
also be assigned.
Settings after
Setting Items
initialization
yyThe IP reset switch is used when joining the
sensor used in another network to a new network, 100/10Mbps
Communication speed
or when trouble occurs during connection. Automatically switches
yyDo not initialize a correctly connected sensor. IV-HG Series
The connection will be interrupted. Main unit
192.168.10.10
IP Address Expansion unit
Settings after initialization
192.168.10.11
IV-H Series
zz
Factory default settings
192.168.10.10
Initialize the settings to the factory defaults.
Normally initialize the settings to the factory Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
defaults. The BOOTP client is enabled. Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
Settings after
Setting Items
initialization yySet the IP address of the PC to connect (IV-
100/10Mbps Navigator) to an IP address on the same network.
Communication speed (Example: 192.168.10.1)
A IP address setting
Automatically switches
BOOTP
yyTo assign an arbitrary IP address, first perform
initialization with a fixed IP address, connect to
method (Bootstrap Protocol) IV-Navigator, and then change the IP address to
IP Address 0.0.0.0*1, *2 the arbitrary value.
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0*2 “ Network Settings” (Page 6-40)
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 *2 yyDo not connect multiple sensor amplifiers to the
same network and initialize them simultaneously.
*1 If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, only the BOOTP
Doing so will result in duplicate IP addresses.
client function can be used.
yyCheck that no devices connected to the same
Do not assign an IP address from the BOOTP
network have the IP address 192.168.10.10
server or DHCP server except the IV-Navigator
or 192.168.10.11. Failing to do so will result in
to be connected.
duplicate IP addresses.
*2 Becomes blank in the Network settings screen.
“ Network Settings” (Page 6-40)

Initializing the network settings For the IV-H500CA/IV-H150MA/

IV‑H500MA/IV‑H2000MA
For the IV-HG10 / IV-HG15
1 Remove the fixing screw of the front cover
1 Use a long and thin pin (1 to 2 mm in indicated by the mark.
diameter) to hold down the IP reset switch
with the power on. Remove only the fixing screw of the front
STATUS cover indicated by the mark. Do not remove
indicator the front cover.
light
Indicator light
mark
Long and thin pin
zz
Press the switch for about 3 seconds. The STATUS
indicator light will blink twice (orange) and then
2 Insert a long and thin pin (1 to 2 mm in
turn off. The settings are initialized to the factory
diameter) into the screw hole to hold down
the IP reset switch with the power on.
A
defaults.
zz
Fixed IP address
Press the switch for about 10 seconds. Continue
pressing the switch after the settings are initialized
to the factory defaults after about 3 seconds. After
about 10 seconds, the STATUS indicator light will
blink twice (orange) and then blink once (green). Long and
A fixed IP address (main unit: 192.168.10.10, thin pin
expansion unit: 192.168.10.11) is assigned.
zz
Press the switch for about 3 seconds. The STATUS
indicator light will blink twice (orange) and then turn
off. The settings are initialized to the factory defaults.
zz
Fixed IP address
Press the switch for about 10 seconds. Continue
pressing the switch after the settings are initialized
to the factory defaults after about 3 seconds. After
about 10 seconds, the STATUS indicator light will
blink twice (orange) and then blink once (green). A
fixed IP address (192.168.10.10) is assigned.

3 Tighten the fixing screw of the front cover.


Maintenance
Maintenance
Attaching the protection sheet Replacing the front cover

A protection sheet (OP-87463) can be attached to
yyIV-H500CA yyIV-H150MA yyIV-H500MA
protect the LCD panel.
yyIV-H2000MA
1 Remove the backing film (transparent) The front cover can be replaced with the optional
from the back and front sides of the spare front cover (OP-87461) if it became dirty or
protection sheet. damaged.
Replace the front cover with the correct

procedure by following the precautions
below. Otherwise the enclosure rating (IP67)
may not be maintained.
yyDo not let dust or dirt stick to the O-shaped ring.
yyAttach the O-shaped ring on the correct position.
1 Remove the old front cover and the

O-shaped ring.
Backing film
(back)
O-shaped ring (small)
Adhesive side
(back of the protection
sheet) O-shaped ring (large)
A
Protection sheet
Backing film (front)
2 Apply the protection sheet on the monitor Front cover

display with the tab at the lower right. Dedicated screw
2 Install the front cover after embedding the

O-shaped ring.
yyScrew: Dedicated screw × 2
Use the attached dedicated screw.
Tab yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 N·m
O-shaped ring (small)
O-shaped ring (large)

Protection sheet
Apply the protection film while make sure that

no trash tucked in.
Dedicated screw
Front cover

Index
Index
Numerics B
1. Image Optimization Backing up in a batch.........................................6-24
(Clearly Image a Target).......................................4-6 Backlight.............................................................6-63
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image Basic configurations of IV-H/IV-HG Series...........1-2
as a Reference for Judgment)............................4-22 Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method Basic Operation for the Monitor..........................3-17
for Targets).........................................................4-30 Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Basic Tools.........................................................4-30
Outputting to Output Line)................................4-138 Bracket..................................................... 1-14, 8-18
Brightness correction..........................................4-28
A
Achieving adequate image brightness...............5-35
C
If the brightness cannot be adjusted Cables................................................................2-17
due to uneven brightness.............................5-35 Cancelling One-Shot output.................................7-7
If the brightness cannot be adjusted Capturing the monitor screen and saving to
in the Auto Brightness Adjustment................5-35 the USB memory................................................6-30
Achieving good focus.........................................5-36 Capturing the screen..........................................6-30
If good focus cannot be achieved by the Changeover for a Target
Auto Focus Adjustment.................................5-36 (Program Functions)...........................................6-10
Adding a tool......................................................4-39 Changing Over.....................................................7-8
Adding Date and Time information to the Changing the logging conditions of the image
sensor (function for adding sensor date history.................................................................6-19
information)........................................................6-20 Changing the Sensor Displayed on the Monitor
A Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool............................4-39
Adjustable bracket for IV-HG series......... 1-12, 8-14
(Change Connected Sensor Function).................6-3
Changing the sensor to be displayed on a
Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)........5-38 monitor.................................................................6-4
Adjusting the installed distance (WD).................5-34 Changing the timing of the status output..............7-7
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-17 Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR
Advanced Brightness Adjustment.......................4-19 indicator light..................................................... A-10
Advanced Color Extraction/Advanced Checking the Package Contents........................1-10
Brightness Extraction.........................................4-57 Checking the view and installed distance
Advanced Diam.Ext............................................4-92 (IV‑HG series).......................................................2-2
Advanced Network Settings...............................6-41 Checking the view and installed distance (IV-H
Advanced Tools..................................................4-33 series)...................................................................2-3
Attaching the optional mounting bracket..............2-4 Clearing Errors...................................................7-11
When using the adjustable bracket for Clearing the saved images.................................6-19
IV‑HG series (OP-87910)................................2-5 Color Area/Area tool...........................................4-48
When using the transverse mounting Color Filters (color type only).............................4-20
bracket for IV-HG series (OP-87909)..............2-5 Communication Cable........................................1-16
When using the vertical mounting bracket Communication cables.......................................8-23
for IV-HG series (OP-87908)..........................2-4 Confirming error messages of the monitor........ A-12
Attaching the protection sheet........................... A-33 Confirming or deleting the images registered
Auto Brightness Adjustment...............................4-12 for the Tool Auto Tuning......................................5-28
Auto Focus Adjustment Position.........................6-52 Confirming/Setting the IP address of the
monitor.............................................................. A-25
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the
sensor................................................................ A-26
Confirming the existence of the sensor from
the monitor........................................................ A-24
Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of
the Sensor Connected (List of NG Sensor
Occurrences Function).........................................6-5

Index
Confirming the router settings........................... A-27 D

Confirming the status by observing the
indicator light of the sensor............................... A-21 Default value....................................................4-139
Confirming the status by observing the Deleting a tool....................................................4-39
SENSOR indicator light of the monitor.............. A-23 Device Name......................................................6-38
Connecting directly (1 unit)....................... 2-27, 2-31 Device settings...................................................6-38
Connecting the cable to the sensor amplifier.....2-18 Diameter Extract.................................................4-89
Connecting the Ethernet cable or Diameter tool......................................................4-86
LAN cable.....................................................2-18 Digital Zoom.......................................................4-20
Connecting the I/O cable (OP-87906)..........2-18 Dimensions...........................................................8-8
Connection diagram......................................2-21 DIN mounting adapter.............................. 1-15, 8-22
Supplying power to the sensor amplifier.......2-20 Displaying and outputting the status result.......... A-4
Connecting the monitor and multiple sensors......1-4 Displaying and outputting the status result at
Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable....2-32 the time of position adjustment............................ A-5
Connecting the power cable of the monitor........2-26 Displaying from the run screen................. 6-16, 6-23
Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable Displaying from the Sensor Setup Menu
for IV-HG series and sensor amplifier................2-17 screen....................................................... 6-16, 6-23
Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable Displaying Matching List.....................................5-15
for IV-HG series and sensor head......................2-17 Displaying the histogram....................................5-13
Connecting the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Displaying the Sensor Image History screen.....6-16
(IV-HG series).....................................................2-17 Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen..........6-2
Connecting the Vision Sensor (IV‑H series).......2-22 Displaying the Settings Navigator guide...............4-5
Connecting via network (Direct connection Displaying the statistical information..................5-11
(2 units or more)/Network connection)...............2-31 Displaying the USB Memory screen...................6-23
Connecting via network (Direct Connection
(2 units or more)/Network Connection)..............2-28
Display Method of Extended Functions Menus.
4-144
A
Connection examples of the IV-HG series.........2-29 Display methods for tools.....................................5-8
Connection examples when connecting the For color type..................................................5-8
IV-H series and IV‑HG series For monochrome type.....................................5-9
sensors together.................................................2-30 Display Settings..................................................6-60
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......7-2 Dome attachment......................................1-11, 1-13
Copying a program.............................................6-14 Dome attachment for IV-HG series....................8-13
Copy Tool............................................................4-75 Dome attachment for IV-H series.......................8-16
Correcting the distorted images due to the
installation..........................................................5-35 E
Cut-off process of the matching rate................... A-6
Edge Detect......................................................4-136
Edge Detection.................................................4-103
EdgePixels tool...................................................4-60
Edge Sens Adjust...............................................4-65
Edge Sens Auto Adj.......... 4-79, 4-100, 4-108, 4-133
Edge Sens Man. Adj......... 4-83, 4-103, 4-112, 4-136
Edge tool............................................................4-96
Editing a program name.....................................6-14
Editing a tool.......................................................4-39
Editing the tool window.......................................3-18
Editing the value with the slider..........................3-17
Enabling the screen capturing function..............6-30
Enlarging the image display.................................5-6
Environmental....................................................6-33
Error Messages................................................. A-10
Ethernet cable....................................................8-23
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45).....................1-16

Index
Exiting the sensor settings I

and starting an operation......................................5-2
Extended functions for the Diameter tool...........4-91 If the displayed confirmation result is “NG”....... A-24
Extended functions for the EdgePixels tool........4-67 Imaging Area......................................................4-18
Extended functions for the Hi-Sp.Adj tool.........4-134 Imaging the target widely...................................5-34
Extended functions Importing the individual status output
for the Image Optimization.................................4-16 of each detection tool/logic...................................7-6
Extended functions for the Master Registration.4-24 Importing the Status Output.................................7-5
Extended functions for the OCR tool................4-124 Importing
Extended functions for the Outline tool..............4-45 the total status/total status NG output..................7-5
Extended functions Infrared polarization filter attachment.................1-13
for the Output Assignment................................4-140 Initialize Monitor.................................................6-65
Extended functions Initializing a program..........................................6-15
for the Position Adjustment tool..........................4-74 Initializing the monitor.........................................3-16
Extended functions for the Tool settings.............4-75 Initializing the network settings.......................... A-31
Extended functions for the Width tool.................4-81 For the IV-H500CA/IV-H150MA/
Extended functions items for the Output IV‑H500MA/IV‑H2000MA............................. A-31
Assignment.......................................................4-140 For the IV-HG10 / IV-HG15.......................... A-31
Extended functions Initializing the Network Settings
of the Color Area/Area tool.................................4-56 (IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-30
Extended functions of the Edge tool.................4-102 Initializing the sensor................................ 3-15, 6-54
Extended functions of the Pitch tool.................4-110 Input circuit............................................... 2-24, 2-25
External trigger.....................................................7-2 Input Response Time.........................................7-13
Description for symbols................................7-13
A F Response time for the error clear input........7-13

Response time for the external master
Field Network.....................................................6-47 registration input...........................................7-13
Finishing by completing all steps..........................4-5 Response time for the switch program
Finishing the Settings Navigator...........................4-5 input..............................................................7-13
Finishing without completing the step..................4-5 Input Settings.....................................................6-34
Fixed Ref. Area...................................................4-68 Inputting characters............................................3-19
Fixed Reference Area.........................................4-59 Installed distance of the dome attachment.........2-11
Flow in the Settings Navigator..............................4-2 Installing/Removing the USB memory................6-23
Flow of the internal process...............................5-44 Installing the sensor at an angle.........................5-37
Focus Adjustment...............................................4-13 Installing the USB memory.................................6-23
Folder composition and file naming rules...........6-31 Intelligent Monitor.............................. 1-14, 8-6, 8-19
For the processing time......................................5-44 Internal trigger......................................................7-3
For Ultra Compact Vision Sensor I/O cable for IV-HG series.........................1-11, 8-14
(IV-HG series).......................................................2-2 I/O Monitor..........................................................6-37
For Vision Sensor (IV-H series)............................2-3 I/O Settings.........................................................6-34
Front cover.........................................................8-17 Items of extended functions
Front cover (for replacement).............................1-14 for the Image Optimization.................................4-16
FTP.....................................................................6-41 Items of extended functions
FTP Destination Settings....................................6-42 for the Master Registration.................................4-24
Items of extended functions
H for the Tool settings............................................4-75
Hanging on the hook..........................................2-13 IV-HG Series........................................................8-2
Hiding the histogram..........................................5-15 IV-H/IV-HG Series................................................1-6
Hiding the statistical information.........................5-12 IV-H Series...........................................................8-4
Hi-Sp.Adj tool...................................................4-127
Holding the Image of the Sensor
on which NG Occurred (NG Hold Function).........6-9

Index
J Mounting the Monitor..........................................2-13

Mounting the mounting adapter............................2-9
Judgment processing flow....................................1-8 Mounting from the jig side...............................2-9
Mounting on the wall.......................................2-9
L Mounting the polarizing filter attachment for
IV‑HG500CA/500MA/150MA (OP‑87899),
LAN cable...........................................................8-23
polarizing filter attachment for IV‑HG300CA
LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45).................................1-16
(OP‑87900),
Language...........................................................6-62
or polarizing filter attachment for IV-HG600MA
Lighting...............................................................4-19
(OP‑87901)...........................................................2-8
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light............... A-21
Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2
Loading and confirming the saved images.........6-17
Mounting the sensor amplifier of the Ultra
Logic Settings...................................................4-141
Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series)................2-5
L type Ethernet cable..........................................8-23
Mounting the sensor head............................ 2-2, 2-4
L type Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)...........1-16
When screws are secured
L type Monitor cable for a sensor with a built-in
from the sensor head......................................2-4
amplifier..............................................................8-23
When screws are secured from the wall.........2-4
L type Monitor cable for a sensor
Mounting the sensor head of the Ultra
with a built-in amplifier (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)....1-16
Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series)................2-4
L type Power I/O cable.......................................8-17
Mounting the sensor onto the mounting
L type Power I/O cable
adapter...............................................................2-10
(M12 12pin - strand wire)...................................1-13
Mounting the spread lens attachment for
IV‑HG150MA (OP-87902)
M (for the IV‑HG150MA)...........................................2-9
Main screen for the Image Optimization...............4-7
Main screen for the Master Registration............4-22
Mounting the Vision Sensor (IV-H series).............2-9
Mounting to a panel............................................2-15
A
Main screen for the Output Assignment...........4-138 Mounting to a wall..............................................2-13
Main screen for the Tool Settings.......................4-38 Mounting to the DIN rail......................................2-16
Maintenance...................................................... A-33 Mounting using DIN mounting adapter...............2-16
Mask.................4-64, 4-78, 4-88, 4-99, 4-107, 4-118 Mounting with the wall mounting adapter...........2-13
Mask settings.....................................................4-53
Master image registration from the image N
history in the sensor...........................................4-24
Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-17
Matching rate at the time of protrusion................ A-6
Name and function of each part of the sensor...1-20
Name and function of each part
and Position Adjustment Tool.............................. A-6
of the sensor amplifier........................................1-18
Menu Screen........................................................5-4
Name and function of each part
Monitor...............................................................1-22
of the sensor head..............................................1-17
Monitor cable for a sensor with a built-in
Names and Functions
amplifier..............................................................8-23
of the Operation Screen.......................................5-4
Monitor cable for a sensor with a built-in
Network Settings...................................... 6-40, 6-60
amplifier (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)..........................1-16
No-voltage input
Monitor Device Settings.....................................6-55
(When the NPN output is selected).......... 2-24, 2-25
Monitor Environment..........................................6-55
Monitor Information............................................6-64
Monitor power cable...........................................8-22
Monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire)......1-15
Monitor Settings.................................................6-55
Mounting adapter..................................... 1-14, 8-17
Mounting the attachment for IV-HG series...........2-6
Mounting the attachment for IV-H series............2-11
Mounting the dome attachment..........................2-11
Mounting the IV-HG10 (Main)...............................2-5
Mounting the IV-HG15 (Expansion)......................2-5
Index
O Polarized visible light filter attachment...............1-13

Polarizing filter attachment........................1-11, 8-17
OCR Tool..........................................................4-115 Polarizing filter attachment for
Operating in the shortest cycle.............................7-4 IV‑HG500CA/500MA/150MA (OP‑87899)
Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..............5-19 Polarizing filter attachment for IV‑HG300CA
Operation flow when the power is turned on........3-5 (OP-87900)
Operation for changing the sensor head Polarizing filter attachment for IV‑HG600MA
(IV‑HG series only).............................................3-14 (OP‑87901).........................................................8-13
Operation for initial startup of the monitor Position Adjustment tool.....................................4-69
(Direct Connection (1 unit))..................................3-6 Power I/O cable..................................................8-17
Operation for initial startup of the monitor Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire).........1-13
(Direct Connection (2 units or more))...................3-7 Preparation flow.................................................6-11
Operation for initial startup of the monitor Preparation procedures......................................6-11
(Network Connection)...........................................3-9 Preparing the program functions........................6-11
Operation for initial startup of the sensor...........3-13 Processing during an operation..........................5-38
Operation of the indicator light...........................1-21 Program..............................................................6-33
Operation of the sensor amplifier Program Switch Method.....................................6-52
indicator light......................................................1-19 Protection sheet....................................... 1-15, 8-22
Operation of the sensor head indicator light.......1-17
Operations when Power of the Sensor is R
Turned on...........................................................7-12
Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5 Reading Settings..............................................4-119
Optional parts for the monitor................... 1-15, 8-22 Reducing the effect of illumination variation.......5-38
Optional parts Reducing the image blur....................................5-36
Reducing the shininess of the glossy or metal
A for the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor..................8-13
Optional parts for the Ultra Compact Vision surface................................................................5-37
Sensor (IV-HG series)........................................1-11 Registering from the image in the USB
Optional parts for the Vision Sensor...................8-16 memory...............................................................4-26
Optional parts for the Vision Sensor When using a batch backup file (*.iva).........4-26
(IV-H series)........................................................1-13 When using an image capture file (*.ivp)......4-27
Registering the images from the file saved in
Other connections..............................................2-29
the USB memory................................................5-25
Other methods of confirming a network
Registering the images from the image history
connection......................................................... A-24
saved in the sensor............................................5-23
Outline tool.........................................................4-40
Registering the images taken
Output circuit............................................ 2-24, 2-25
in the Test mode.................................................5-21
Output Settings...................................................6-36
Registering the master image............................4-23
Overview for Adding Sensor Date Information
Registering the Master Image..............................7-9
Function..............................................................6-20
Registering the OK/NG images to be used for
Overview of IV-H/IV-HG Series............................1-6
the Tool Auto Tuning...........................................5-21
Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2
Remedy when connection via a network is
Overview of the List of NG Sensor
unavailable........................................................ A-18
Occurrences function...........................................6-5
Remedy when data transfer via FTP is
Overview of the NG Hold function........................6-9
unavailable........................................................ A-28
Overview of the Operation Screen.......................5-3
Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is
Overview of the program functions.....................6-10
unavailable........................................................ A-16
Remedy when direct connection (2 units or
P
more) is unavailable.......................................... A-17
Panel cutting dimension.....................................2-15 Remedy when the Monitor cannot be
Panel mounting adapter........................... 1-15, 8-22 Connected with the Sensor............................... A-16
Password Lock...................................................6-39 Removing the USB memory...............................6-23
Pitch Extract..................................................... 4-111 Replacing the front cover.................................. A-33
Pitch tool...........................................................4-105 Response time for the error clear input..............7-13
Polarity...............................................................6-37

Index
Response time for the external master Setting range of the Output Assignment...........4-138
registration input.................................................7-13 Settings after initialization.................................. A-30
Response time for the switch program input......7-13 Settings for disabling outlines................... 4-43, 4-72
Rotate 180°........................................................6-50 Settings for the Trigger Options............................4-8
Rotation Range........................................ 4-46, 4-74 Setting shade contrast......................................4-124
Settings Navigator................................................4-2
S Settings Navigator screen and operation flow......4-4
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information.........6-55
Saving the image history individually.................6-27
Setting the Color Area/Area tool.........................4-50
Saving the program individually.........................6-25
Setting the Diameter tool....................................4-87
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a
Setting the EdgePixels tool................................4-62
USB Memory......................................................6-23
Setting the Edge tool..........................................4-98
Saving the sensor settings
Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor...6-33
or the image history............................................6-24
Setting the Hi-Sp.Adj tool.................................4-129
Scaling........................................... 4-84, 4-93, 4-113
Setting the Image Optimization............................4-6
Search Algorithm................................................4-46
Setting the List of NG Sensor Occurrences.........6-7
Searching for a sensor to be connected.............3-10
Setting the network address of the monitor..........3-9
Selecting a display method for tools.....................5-7
Setting the NG Hold function................................6-9
Selecting the file in the USB memory.................3-20
Setting the OCR algorithm...............................4-125
Selecting the tool................................................5-45
Setting the OCR tool........................................4-117
Selecting the tool by tapping it on the monitor.....5-7
Setting the Outline tool.......................................4-41
Selecting the tool from the pull-down menu.........5-7
Setting the Output Assignment.........................4-139
Selecting the tool whose information to be
Setting the Pitch tool........................................4-106
displayed..............................................................5-7
Setting the Position Adjustment tool...................4-70
Sensor advanced settings..................................6-33
Sensor Connect........................................ 6-55, 6-56
Setting the status conditions............................4-121
To read characters......................................4-121
A
When connecting with the sensor via a
To read the date..........................................4-122
network.........................................................6-58
Setting the Trigger Options..........................4-8, 4-11
When directly connecting with a sensor
Setting the upper limit.........................................4-54
(1 unit)...........................................................6-56
Setting the Width tool.........................................4-77
When directly connecting with multiple
Setting to the Factory Default.............................3-15
sensors (2 units or more)..............................6-57
Setup Adjustment...............................................6-33
Sensor head/amplifier cable
Shortening the imaging processing time............5-45
for IV-HG series.........................................1-11, 8-13
Shortening the Processing Time........................5-44
Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images
Shortening the processing time of each tool......5-46
whose Status Result is NG)...............................6-16
Shortening the processing time of the Color
Sensor Information.............................................6-53
Area/Area/EdgePixels/Width/Diameter/Edge/
Setting Adding Sensor Date Information
Pitch tool.............................................................5-46
Function..............................................................6-20
Direct Connection (2 units or more)/
Network Connection.....................................6-21 of the OCR tool...................................................5-47
For direct connection (1 unit)........................6-20 Shortening the processing time
Setting a search region............................ 4-43, 4-72 of the Outline tool...............................................5-46
Setting a sensitivity................................... 4-44, 4-73 Shortening the processing time
Setting items for Edge tool.................................4-96 of the position adjustment..................................5-47
Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool..........4-48 Specification of I/O circuit and current of the
Setting items for the Diameter tool.....................4-86 Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG series)......2-24
Setting items for the EdgePixels tool..................4-60 Specification of I/O circuit and current of the
Setting items for the Hi-Sp.Adj tool..................4-127 Vision Sensor (IV-H series)................................2-25
Setting items for the OCR tool..........................4-115 Specifications.......................................................8-2
Setting items for the Outline tool........................4-40 Specifying sensor to be connected by IP
Setting items for the Pitch tool..........................4-105 address...............................................................3-12
Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool....4-69 Spread lens attachment.....................................1-11
Setting items for the Width tool..........................4-76 Spread lens attachment for IV-HG150MA..........8-13

Index
Stabilizing by correcting If the detection becomes unstable due to

the misaligned target position.............................5-38 the effect of unwanted edges other than
Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool....................5-41 the target.......................................................5-42
If the area search becomes unstable due If the edge of a target cannot be detected....5-42
to unwanted colors being extracted..............5-41 Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning........5-19
If the color you wish to judge cannot be Starting an Operation...........................................5-2
extracted.......................................................5-41 Starting the Settings Navigator.............................4-3
Stabilizing the Diameter tool...............................5-43 STATUS indicator light....................................... A-22
If the detection becomes unstable due to Status table......................................................... A-2
the effect of unwanted circles other than Stylus........................................................ 1-15, 8-22
the target.......................................................5-43 Switching the display to the full-screen mode......5-6
If the target circle cannot be detected...........5-43 System..................................................... 6-33, 6-55
Stabilizing the EdgePixels tool...........................5-42 System Configuration...........................................1-2
If it becomes unstable due to unwanted
edge pixels being extracted..........................5-42 T
If the target edge pixels cannot be
extracted.......................................................5-42 Things can be performed with the program
Stabilizing the High-Speed Position functions.............................................................6-10
Adjustment.........................................................5-40 Tilt Correction.....................................................6-48
If the detection becomes unstable due to Time....................................................................6-63
the effect of unwanted edges other than Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the
the target.......................................................5-40 Judgment Condition)..........................................5-18
If the edge of a target cannot be detected....5-40 Tool Auto Tuning
If the target tilts and the position by the previous registration information.............5-29
adjustment becomes unstable......................5-40 Tool Auto Tuning
A Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-34 by the registration information file......................5-31
Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a Tool Name.............................4-47, 4-58, 4-68, 4-85,
clear image of the target.....................................5-34 4-95, 4-104, 4-114, 4-126
Stabilizing the OCR tool.....................................5-43 Tool settings.......................................................5-38
When the text and date on the object Total Status Conditions.....................................4-143
cannot be read..............................................5-43 Touch Panel Calibration.....................................6-64
When unwanted text and date are read........5-43 Touch Screen Lock.............................................6-61
Stabilizing the Outline tool..................................5-40 Transfer Condition Settings................................6-43
If the detection becomes unstable due to Transfer Destination Folder Settings..................6-45
the effect of the unwanted outline other Transferring the settings backed up in the USB
than the target...............................................5-40 memory to the sensor.........................................6-28
If the match rate difference between Transverse mounting bracket
the high and low-quality-targets is small.......5-41 for IV-HG series........................................ 1-12, 8-14
If the outline cannot be detected Trigger number...................................................5-12
when the target becomes out of position......5-40 Troubleshooting................................................... A-7
If the outline of the target cannot be Turning on the power and starting an operation...5-2
detected........................................................5-41 Types of tools.....................................................4-30
If the target tilts
and the outline cannot be detected...............5-41
Stabilizing the position adjustment.....................5-39
If the outline of the reference target cannot
be detected...................................................5-39
If the position adjustment becomes
unstable due to the effect of the unwanted
outlines.........................................................5-39
If the target tilts and the position
adjustment becomes unstable......................5-39
Stabilizing the Width/Edge/Pitch tool..................5-42

Index
U V
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Vertical mounting bracket
(IV-HG series): Sensor amplifier............... 1-10, 1-18 for IV-HG series........................................ 1-12, 8-14
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Vision Sensor.....................................................8-15
(IV-HG series): Sensor head.................... 1-10, 1-17 Vision Sensor (IV-H series): Sensor......... 1-12, 1-20
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Voltage input
Sensor amplifier.................................................8-12 (When the PNP output is selected).......... 2-24, 2-25
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
Sensor head.........................................................8-8 W
Unmounting from the DIN mounting adapter......2-16
Wall mounting adapter.............................. 1-15, 8-22
Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter......2-14
When connecting the Vision Sensor
Unmounting the sensor......................................2-10
(IV-H series) and the monitor.............................2-31
Update Monitor...................................................6-65
When connecting with the Ultra Compact
Updating the sensor...........................................6-54
Vision Sensor (IV-HG series)................................1-3
Upper Limit................4-66, 4-80, 4-90, 4-101, 4-109
When connecting with the Ultra Compact
USB memory (1GB)............................................1-15
Vision Sensor (IV-HG series) and the monitor....2-27
Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment...............5-37
When connecting
Using the digital zooming function......................5-34
with the Vision Sensor (IV-H Series)....................1-2
Using the dome attachment...............................5-37
When the NPN output is selected............ 2-24, 2-25
Using the dome attachment (IV-D10).................2-11
When the PNP output is selected............. 2-24, 2-25
Using the dome attachment
White Balance (for color type only)....................6-51
(IV-GD05/IV-GD10)..............................................2-6
Width Extract......................................................4-82
Mounting examples.........................................2-7
Width tool...........................................................4-76
Mounting the dome attachment......................2-6
Using the image files saved in the USB A
memory...............................................................5-18
Using the image history saved in the sensor......5-18
Using the images taken in the Test mode...........5-18
Using the polarizing filter attachment.................5-37
(OP‑87436/OP-87437).......................................2-12
(OP‑87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or spread
lens attachment (OP-87902)................................2-8
Using the program functions (changing over)....6-12
When the [External IN] is selected in the
Program Switch Method...............................6-13
When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in the
Program Switch Method...............................6-12
Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)...........1-6
Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)......................1-7

Copyright notice
Copyright notice
/*
* EDMA3 LLD
*
* Copyright (C) 2009 Texas Instruments Incorporated - http://www.ti.com/
*
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* Neither the name of Texas Instruments Incorporated nor the names of
* its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
* from this software without specific prior written permission.
A *
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
* "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
* A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
* OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
* DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
* THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
* OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*/

STLport
STLport
License Agreement
Boris Fomitchev grants Licensee a non-exclusive, non-transferable, royalty-free license to use STLport
and its documentation without fee.
By downloading, using, or copying STLport or any portion thereof, Licensee agrees to abide by the
intellectual property laws and all other applicable laws of the United States of America, and to all of the
terms and conditions of this Agreement.
Licensee shall maintain the following copyright and permission notices on STLport sources and its
documentation unchanged :
Copyright 1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev
This material is provided "as is", with absolutely no warranty expressed or implied. Any use is at your own
risk.
Permission to use or copy this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided the
above notices are retained on all copies. Permission to modify the code and to distribute modified code is
granted, provided the above notices are retained, and a notice that the code was modified is included with
the above copyright notice.
The Licensee may distribute binaries compiled with STLport (whether original or modified) without any
royalties or restrictions.
The Licensee may distribute original or modified STLport sources, provided that:
yyThe conditions indicated in the above permission notice are met;
yyThe following copyright notices are retained when present, and conditions provided in accompanying A
permission notices are met :
Copyright 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company
Copyright 1996,97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc.
Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby
granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied
warranty.
granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice
and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no representations about
the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice
and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Moscow Center for SPARC Technology makes no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied
warranty.

Revision history
Revision history Edition number Revision details
October, 2015 1st edition
August, 2016 Revised 2nd

edition
February, 2017 Revised 3nd

edition
February, 2018 Revised 4th

edition
February, 2018 Revised 5th

edition
May, 2019 Revised 6th

edition
October, 2019 Revised 7th

edition
March, 2021 Revised 8th

edition
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models
or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to
represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products
found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered
to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole
option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be
defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but
not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture,
vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only
suggestions, and it is Buyer’s responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended
use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples (“Products/Samples”) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in
humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications
state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way,
KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE
harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH
NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY
RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED
ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS,
THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES,
OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED
OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST
BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may
not apply.
BUYER’S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must
provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets
and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2020 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 244019GB 2031-8 519GB Printed in Japan

As 117800 Iv-H2000ma Iv-H500ca Iv-H500ma Um 519GB WW GB 2031 8

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

As 117800 Iv-H2000ma Iv-H500ca Iv-H500ma Um 519GB WW GB 2031 8

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

519GB

Ultra Compact Vision Sensor 2 Installation and

IV-HG Series 3 Basic Operation

Vision Sensor 4 Settings Navigator

IV-H Series 5 Operating/Adjusting

Read this manual before use. 8 Specifications

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product

Indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during

Indicates additional information on proper operation.

Indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

Safety Information for IV-H/IV-HG Series

2 - IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs

- IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 3

Safety Precautions on LED Product

The degree of risk of this product is shown below.

Model Light source Risk Group*

yyExempt Group Does not pose any photobiological hazard

Model Light source Risk Group*

yyExempt Group Does not pose any photobiological hazard

4 - IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

UL Certification For IV-M30

- IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 5

6 - IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Version of the IV-H/IV-HG Series

Operation software of the Vision Sensor (IV‑H150/500/2000)

Operation software of the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV‑HG150/500/300/600)

You cannot upgrade from R4.00.* * to R5.**.**.

- IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 7

Operation software of the monitor (IV-M30)

8 - IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Structure of This Manual

This chapter explains the system configuration and overview

A Appendices This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.

- IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 9

10 - IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Communication Cable.....................................1-16 Mounting the attachment for IV-HG series........2-6

- IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 11

12 - IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

2. Master Registration (Registering an Image Position Adjustment tool..................................4-69

- IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 13

14 - IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-34 Stabilizing the Outline tool..............................5-40

- IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 15

Saving the Sensor Settings

16 - IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information.........6-55

- IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 17

18 - IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

- IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 1-1

1 Basic configurations of IV-H/IV-HG Series

When connecting with the Vision Sensor (IV-H Series)

Monitor power cable

Photoelectric/ Indicator light/buzzer PLC

1-2 - IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Monitor power cable

Photoelectric/ Indicator light/buzzer PLC

- IV-H/IV-HG Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 1-3

1 Connecting the monitor and multiple sensors

You cannot upgrade from R4.00.* * to R5...

Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-HG

3 yyGreen (ON).......The power is turned ON.